810995
3
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/586
Next page
LS
Owner’s Manual
Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA Address: Avenue du bourget
60 –1140 Brussels, Belgium
2015 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION All rights
reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in
whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corportation
LS500-LS350EE
1
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Before driving
Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment
before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats, power windows)
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)
Interior features
Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information......................................6
Reading this manual.......................................9
How to search ............................................... 10
Pictorial index..................................................11
1-1. For safe use
Before driving....................................24
For safe driving..................................25
Seat belts .............................................26
SRS airbags ....................................... 30
Pop Up Hood ................................... 38
Exhaust gas precautions.............. 40
1-2. Child safety
Airbag manual on-off system.......41
Riding with children.........................42
Child restraint systems ..................43
1-3. Emergency assistance
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK............ 60
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system..........64
Double locking system ..................76
Alarm ....................................................77
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators.... 82
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ........................... 86
Gauges and meters (F SPORT
models)............................................. 89
Multi-information display............. 93
Head-up display .............................101
Fuel consumption information
........................................................... 105
3-1. Key information
Keys..................................................... 110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors and trunk
Doors...................................................114
Trunk....................................................119
Smart entry & start system.........126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................................165
Power rear seat ..............................172
Driving position memory............177
Rear seat position memory........ 181
Head restraints .............................. 182
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel ............................... 185
Inside rear view mirror ............... 186
Digital Rearview Mirror............. 187
Outside rear view mirrors..........195
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and
moon roof
Power windows ............................. 198
Moon roof........................................ 201
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....................... 207
Cargo and luggage.......................214
Trailer towing...................................215
1
For safety and security
2
Vehicle status information and
indicators
3
Before driving
4
Driving
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 216
Automatic transmission.............. 219
Turn signal lever ........................... 226
Parking brake ................................ 227
Brake Hold......................................230
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch........................... 232
AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem)................................................. 235
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
...........................................................238
Multi Weather Lights................... 241
Rear fog lights................................ 242
Windshield wipers and washer
........................................................... 243
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System + A...........250
Lexus Safety System + ............... 262
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +
A) ..................................................... 273
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +)
...........................................................285
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
........................................................... 293
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)........ 297
RSA (Road Sign Assist).............307
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................... 311
Cruise control ............................... 323
Stop & Start system..................... 325
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 332
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
.......................................................... 349
Lexus parking assist-sensor ......351
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)
function ......................................... 355
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
function ......................................... 359
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
...........................................................362
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)............................ 367
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ..........372
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians)..................... 375
Driving mode select switch .....378
Electronically modulated air sus-
pension..........................................380
Driving assist systems ................ 384
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.......................390
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch............................... 394
Center Display.............................. 396
Rear Multi Operation Panel ...398
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge ........ 401
5-3. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning
system............................................ 403
Rear automatic air conditioning
system..............................................413
5
Interior features
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Heated steering wheel/seat heat-
ers/seat ventilators.................... 416
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............................420
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features .............. 424
Trunk features................................ 429
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features .............. 432
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle exterior................................... 442
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle interior .................................... 445
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements.....448
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
...........................................................450
Hood .................................................. 451
Positioning a floor jack............... 452
Engine compartment.................. 453
Battery .............................................. 463
Tires ................................................... 465
Replacing the tire......................... 482
Tire inflation pressure.................486
Wheels..............................................487
Air conditioning filter..................488
Electronic key battery................490
Checking and replacing fuses
........................................................... 492
Light bulbs.......................................495
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................... 498
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency ............................ 498
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water .............................................. 499
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
........................................................... 501
If you think something is wrong
.......................................................... 505
Fuel pump shut off system........ 506
If a warning light turns on or a warn-
ing buzzer sounds..................... 507
If a warning message is displayed
............................................................515
If you have a flat tire ..................... 518
If the engine will not start............519
If you lose your keys.................... 520
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ............................................521
If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly...................................521
If the vehicle battery is discharged
...........................................................524
If your vehicle overheats........... 530
If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 534
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.)................................................. 536
6
Maintenance and care
7
When trouble arises
8
Vehicle specifications
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
Fuel information............................ 545
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ..............546
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize...........................563
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
...........................................................566
Alphabetical Index ...................... 569
Index
6
Please note that this manual applies to
all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this man-
ual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at
any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehi-
cle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and
equipment.
For Eurasian Economic Union: The
information on the procedure for the
safe use of the vehicle and its systems,
presented on the manufacturer’s labels
on the body in English, is intended only
for service workers.
Both genuine Lexus and a wide variety
of other spare parts and accessories
for Lexus vehicles are currently availa-
ble on the market. Should it be deter-
mined that any of the genuine Lexus
parts or accessories supplied with the
vehicle need to be replaced, Lexus
recommends that genuine Lexus parts
or accessories, be used to replace
them. Other parts or accessories of
matching quality can also be used.
Lexus cannot accept any liability or
guarantee spare parts and accessories
which are not genuine Lexus products,
nor for replacement or installation
involving such parts. In addition, dam-
age or performance problems result-
ing from the use of non-genuine Lexus
spare parts or accessories may not be
covered under warranty.
The installation of an RF-transmitter
system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
Lexus Safety System + A
Lexus Safety System +
Cruise control system
Anti-lock brake system
Vehicle dynamics integrated man-
agement
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer for
precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of an
RF-transmitter system.
Further information regarding fre-
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Lexus
Installation of an RF-transmitter
system
7
quency bands, power levels, antenna
positions and installation provisions for
the installation of RF-transmitters, is
available on request at any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The vehicle is equipped with sophisti-
cated computers that will record cer-
tain data, such as:
Engine speed / Electric motor
speed (traction motor speed)
Accelerator status
•Brake status
Vehicle speed
Operation status of the driving
assist systems
Images from the cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with cameras.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for the location of recording cam-
eras.
The recorded data varies according to
the vehicle grade level, options and
destinations with which it is equipped.
These computers do not record con-
versations or sounds, and only record
images outside of the vehicle in certain
situations.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this
computer to diagnose malfunctions, con-
duct research and development, and
improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to
a third party except:
With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-
cle is leased
In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
For research purposes where the data is
not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
Recorded image information can be
erased by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The image recording function can be disa-
bled. However, if the function is disabled,
data from when the system operates will
not be available.
The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner
devices and Pop Up Hood system in
your Lexus contain explosive chemi-
cals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the
airbags, seat belt pretensioners and
Pop Up Hood micro gas generators
left as they are, this may cause an acci-
dent such as fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt
pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro
gas generators removed and disposed
of by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer before you scrap your
vehicle.
Vehicle data recording
Scrapping of your Lexus
8
For Russia and Kazakhstan:
TECHNICAL REGULATION OF
THE CUSTOMS UNION “ON THE
SAFETY OF WHEELED VEHICLES”
TR CU 018/2011 Attachment No.3,
Section 2 (Requirements for vehicles
concerning their interior noise), Table
2.1, Remarks 3
This vehicle may not be used for public
purposes (as taxis, for example).
Toyota Motor Europe NV/SA, Avenue
du Bourget 60 - 1140 Brussels, Bel-
gium www.toyota-europe.com
Noise levels inside the vehicle
(LS500 only)
WARNING
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive
your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your
ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coordina-
tion, which could lead to an accident that
could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defen-
sively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and
be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full
attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting con-
trols, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with
resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding chil-
dren’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the
vehicle can be fatal to children.
9
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in this man-
ual.
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause death or serious
injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause damage to or a
malfunction in the vehi-
cle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or
working procedures. Fol-
low the steps in numeri-
cal order.
Symbols in illustrations
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the action
(pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches
and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of
an operation (e.g. a lid
opens).
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the component
or position being
explained.
Means Do not, Do not do
this, or Do not let this
happen.
10
Searching by name
Alphabetical index: P.569
Searching by installation position
Pictorial index: P.11
Searching by symptom or sound
What to do if... (Troubleshooting):
P.566
Searching by title
Table of contents: P.2
How to search
11
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
Exterior
Doors ...........................................................................................................................P.114
Locking/unlocking.............................................................................................................. P.114
Opening/closing the side windows............................................................................P.198
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key..................................................P.521
Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515
Trunk............................................................................................................................P.119
Opening from inside the cabin...................................................................................... P.121
Opening from outside....................................................................................................... P.121
Opening by using the mechanical key.................................................................... P.522
Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515
Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.195
Adjusting the mirror angle..............................................................................................P.195
Folding the mirrors ............................................................................................................P.196
Driving position memory................................................................................................. P.177
Defogging the mirrors....................................................................................................P.403
A
B
C
12
Pictorial index
Windshield wipers................................................................................................. P.243
Precautions for winter season.....................................................................................P.390
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)
*
................................................ P.407
Precautions for car wash............................................................................................... P.443
Fuel filler door ........................................................................................................ P.248
Refueling method.............................................................................................................P.248
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity.........................................................................................P.538
Tires............................................................................................................................P.465
Tire size/inflation pressure................................................................................P.465, 543
Winter tires/tire chains..................................................................................................P.390
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system ............................................. P.465
Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................ P.518
Hood ...........................................................................................................................P.451
Opening.................................................................................................................................P.451
Engine compartment cover.........................................................................................P.455
Engine oil..............................................................................................................................P.539
Coping with overheating ..............................................................................................P.530
Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515
Headlights/front position lights/daytime running lights/
cornering lights...................................................................................................... P.232
Turn signal lights .....................................................................................................P.226
Tail lights .................................................................................................................. P.232
Stop lights
Hill-start assist control....................................................................................................P.384
License plate lights ............................................................................................... P.232
Back-up lights
Changing the shift position to R...................................................................................P.219
Rear fog lights ..........................................................................................................P.241
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.495)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
13
Pictorial index
*
:If equipped
14
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Engine switch............................................................................................................P.216
Starting the engine/changing the modes.................................................................P.216
Emergency stop of the engine....................................................................................P.498
When the engine will not start ......................................................................................P.519
Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515
Shift lever...................................................................................................................P.219
Changing the shift position.............................................................................................P.221
Precautions for towing.....................................................................................................P.501
Meters ................................................................................................................. P.86, 89
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light .........P.86, 88, 89, 92
Warning lights/indicator lights...................................................................................... P.82
When a warning light turns on.................................................................................... P.507
Multi-information display ...................................................................................... P.93
Display...................................................................................................................................... P.93
When a warning message is displayed .....................................................................P.515
A
B
C
D
15
Pictorial index
Parking brake switch.............................................................................................P.227
Applying/releasing the parking brake.....................................................................P.227
Precautions for winter season.......................................................................................P.391
Warning buzzer/messages ...........................................................................................P.515
Turn signal lever .....................................................................................................P.226
Headlight switch.................................................................................................... P.232
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running
lights....................................................................................................................................... P.232
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)
*1
.................................................................... P.235
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
*1
.................................................................................P.238
Multi Weather Lights........................................................................................................P.241
Rear fog lights.....................................................................................................................P.242
Windshield wiper and washer switch.............................................................. P.243
Usage .................................................................................................................................... P.243
Adding washer fluid..........................................................................................................P.462
Warning messages............................................................................................................P.515
Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.498
Hood lock release lever........................................................................................P.451
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch..................................................... P.185
Adjustment........................................................................................................................... P.185
Driving position memory................................................................................................. P.177
Air conditioning system....................................................................................... P.403
Usage ....................................................................................................................................P.403
Rear window defogger ..................................................................................................P.403
Audio system
*2
Brake hold switch .................................................................................................. P.230
Trunk opener main switch ....................................................................................P.125
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
16
Pictorial index
Switches
HUD (Head-up display) switch
*1
.........................................................................P.101
Camera switch
*2
Stop & Start cancel switch................................................................................... P.331
Instrument panel light control switches .................................................... P.88, 92
“ODO TRIP” switch .........................................................................................P.87, 92
VSC OFF switch.................................................................................................... P.385
Snow mode switch ................................................................................................ P.223
Driving mode select switch................................................................................ P.378
Trunk opener switch................................................................................................P.121
Fuel filler door opener switch............................................................................ P.249
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
17
Pictorial index
Position memory buttons...................................................................................... P.177
Mode change button.............................................................................................. P.167
Window lock switch.............................................................................................. P.200
Outside rear view mirror switches ....................................................................P.195
Door lock switches .................................................................................................. P.116
Power window switches ....................................................................................... P.198
Rear door sunshade switches
*
...........................................................................P.436
*
:If equipped
Meter control switches .......................................................................................... P.94
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
18
Pictorial index
Paddle shift switches ..................................................................................P.224, 225
Phone switch
*1
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch
*2
..................................................................P.297
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
*2
...............................................................P.315
Cruise control switches
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
*2
........................................ P.311
Cruise control
*2
................................................................................................................ P.323
Audio remote control switches
*1
Talk switch
*1
*1
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2
: If equipped
Remote Touch
*1
..................................................................................................... P.394
Seat switch ................................................................................................................P.166
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators switch
*2
...............P.417
Rear sunshade switch ...........................................................................................P.437
Vehicle height adjustment switch
*2
................................................................ P.380
P position switch .................................................................................................... P.222
*1
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2
: If equipped
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
19
Pictorial index
Interior
SRS airbags................................................................................................................ P.30
Floor mats................................................................................................................... P.24
Front seats .................................................................................................................P.165
Head restraints ....................................................................................................... P.182
Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.26
Inside lock buttons ...................................................................................................P.116
Console box.............................................................................................................P.427
Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.426
Assist grips .............................................................................................................. P.433
Coat hooks.............................................................................................................. P.434
Rear Multi Operation Panel
*1
........................................................................... P.398
Rear seat entertainment system
*1, 2
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
20
Pictorial index
Ceiling
Moon roof switches ............................................................................................... P.201
Personal lights..........................................................................................................P.421
“SOS” button
*1
.......................................................................................................... P.60
Auxiliary box
*1
........................................................................................................ P.428
Vanity mirrors ........................................................................................................ P.435
Sun visors
*2
............................................................................................................. P.435
Door-linked interior light switch ........................................................................P.421
Inside rear view mirror
*1
.......................................................................................P.186
Digital Rearview Mirror
*1
.....................................................................................P.187
Interior light ..............................................................................................................P.421
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch ................................................. P.78
*1
: If equipped
*2
: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR-
BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. (P.46)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
21
Pictorial index
22
Pictorial index
1
23
1
For safety and security
For safety and security
.
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................24
For safe driving...............................25
Seat belts ..........................................26
SRS airbags .................................... 30
Pop Up Hood ................................ 38
Exhaust gas precautions ........... 40
1-2. Child safety
Airbag manual on-off system....41
Riding with children .....................42
Child restraint systems ...............43
1-3. Emergency assistance
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK......... 60
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.......64
Double locking system ...............76
Alarm .................................................77
24
1-1. For safe use
1-1.For safe use
Use only floor mats designed specifi-
cally for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix
them securely in place onto the carpet.
1Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
2Turn the upper knob of each retain-
ing hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.
Always align the marks .
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips)
may differ from that shown in the illustra-
tion.
Before driving
Observe the following before start-
ing off in the vehicle to ensure
safety of driving.
Installing floor mats
A
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s
floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with
the pedals while driving. An unexpect-
edly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This
could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
When installing the driver’s floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for
other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genu-
ine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the
driver’s seat.
Always install the floor mat securely
using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on
top of each other.
Do not place the floor mat bot-
tom-side up or upside-down.
Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
With the engine stopped and the shift
position in P, fully depress each pedal
to the floor to make sure it does not
interfere with the floor mat.
25
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and
so that you do not have to lean for-
ward to steer. (P.165)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (P.165)
Lock the head restraint in place
with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears.
(P.182)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.26)
Make sure that all occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle. (P.26)
Use a child restraint system appropri-
ate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt. (P.43)
Make sure that you can see backward
clearly by adjusting the inside and out-
side rear view mirrors properly.
(P.186, 187, 195)
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and
mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.
Correct driving posture
WARNING
For safe driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
A
B
C
D
Do not adjust the position of the
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the
driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct pos-
ture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and
head restraint.
Do not place anything under the front
seats.
Objects placed under the front seats
may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in
place. This may lead to an accident
and the adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
When driving over long distances, take
regular breaks before you start to feel
tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while
driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immedi-
ately.
Correct use of the seat belts
Adjusting the mirrors
26
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat
belt.
Always wear a seat belt properly.
Each seat belt should be used by one
person only. Do not use a seat belt for
more than one person at once, includ-
ing children.
Lexus recommends that children be
seated in the rear seat and always use
a seat belt and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.
To achieve a proper seating position,
do not recline the seat more than nec-
essary. The seat belt is most effective
when the occupants are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under
your arm.
Always wear your seat belt low and
snug across your hips.
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (
P.27)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (
P.27)
When children are in the vehicle
P.56
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allow-
ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
27
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possi-
ble over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were princi-
pally designed for persons of adult size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate
for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt. (P.43)
When the child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-
low the instructions regarding seat belt
usage. (P.26)
Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country
where you reside, please contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer, for
seat belt replacement or installation.
1To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
2To release the seat belt, press the
release button .
WARNING
Inspect the seat belt system periodi-
cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt
until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant from
death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are
locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function cor-
rectly, immediately contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Replace the seat assembly, including
the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if
there is no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove,
modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs
carried out by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer. Inappropriate
handling may lead to incorrect opera-
tion.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat
belt
A
28
1-1. For safe use
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it.
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sud-
den stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy
motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
The front seat belt buckles move out-
ward automatically for easier access.
When entering the vehicle
When a front door is opened, the seat
belt buckle for the corresponding seat
will move outward automatically. The
buckle will retract automatically after
the plate is inserted and locked to the
buckle.
When exiting the vehicle (driver’s
seat only)
If the engine switch is turned off when
the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
driver’s seat belt buckle will move out-
ward. The buckle will retract automati-
cally when the driver’s seat belt is
released.
*
:If equipped
Easy Access Buckle
When the seat belt buckle is in the out-
ward position and not latched, if the front
passenger’s seat is not occupied and the
vehicle is driven, the seat belt buckle will
return to its original position.
If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves
the front door open and then enters the
vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not
operate until the door is closed and then
opened again.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
1Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release
button .
2Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.
Move the height adjuster up and down as
needed until you hear a click.
Easy Access Buckle (front
seats)*
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder
anchor height (front seats)
WARNING
Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce
the amount of protection in an accident
and cause death or serious injuries in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
A
29
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehi-
cle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal or side collision.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a minor
side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle
rollover.
Replacing the belt after the
pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple colli-
sions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the
second or subsequent collisions.
When the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 20 km/h (12 mph) or
higher, the seat belts will retract slightly
to remove any slack.
If the system determines that a collision
is unavoidable, the front seat belts will
retract before the collision. (P.274)
Active Assist
A motor sound may be heard when a front
seat belt is released or a front door is
opened. This does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
Seat belt pretensioners (front
and outboard rear seats)
WARNING
Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS
warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and
must be replaced at any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
Active Assist (front seats of vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +
A)
30
1-1. For safe use
Location of the SRS airbags
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe
impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together
with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system
A
B
C
D
31
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped)
Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants
SRS airbag system components
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Side impact sensors (front door)
Airbag manual on-off switch
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator light
Front side airbags
Side impact sensors (front)
SRS warning light
Rear side airbags
Seat belt pretensioners
Driver airbag
Seat cushion airbags (if equipped)
Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped)
Side impact sensors (rear)
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
32
1-1. For safe use
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front impact sensors
Pop Up Hood computer assembly
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag sys-
tem is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As the airbags deploy, a chemical
reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may
be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (infla-
tion) by hot gases.
A loud noise and white powder will be
emitted.
Parts of the airbag module (steering
wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, parts of the front and
rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot
for several minutes. The airbag itself may
also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
All of the doors will be unlocked.
(P.115)
The brakes and stop lights will be con-
trolled automatically. (P.385)
The interior lights will turn on automati-
cally. (P.422)
The emergency flashers will be turned on
automatically. (P.498)
Fuel supply to the engine will be stopped.
(P.506)
Vehicle with ERA-GLONASS/EVAK: If
any of the following situations occur, the
system is designed to send an emergency
call
*
to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-
trol center, notifying them of the vehicle’s
location (without needing to push the
“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt
to speak with the occupants to ascertain
the level of emergency and assistance
required. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency and helps
to dispatch the necessary emergency
services. (P.60)
An SRS airbag is deployed.
A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
The vehicle is involved in a severe
rear-end collision.
The vehicle is involved in a rollover acci-
dent.
*
: In some cases, the call cannot be made.
(P.62)
PCS-linked SRS airbag deployment
control (vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) deter-
mines that the possibility of a side collision is
high, the SRS side and curtain shield
airbags will be prepared to operate.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS
front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cush-
ion airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold
level (the level of force corresponding to
an approximately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18
mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher in the following situa-
tions:
If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a
parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
Q
R
S
T
U
33
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
move or deform on impact
If the vehicle is involved in an underride
collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle underrides, or goes
under, the bed of a truck
Depending on the type of collision, it is
possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear
seat will not operate if the occupant is not
wearing a seat belt.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS
side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level
of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately
1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with
the vehicle cabin from a direction per-
pendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 -
18 mph]).
Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also
deploy in the event of a severe frontal col-
lision.
Conditions under which the SRS
airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may
also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or falling
Types of collisions that may not deploy
the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS
seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion
airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle
is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any
type causes sufficient forward deceleration
of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may
occur.
Collision from the side
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
Types of collisions that may not deploy
the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may not activate if the vehicle is subjected
to a collision from the side at certain angles,
or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved
34
1-1. For safe use
in a low-speed side collision.
Collision from the front
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not gen-
erally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved
in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal
collision.
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
When to contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer
In the following cases, the vehicle will
require inspection and/or repair. Contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
as soon as possible.
Any of the SRS airbags have been
inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags and SRS cushion
airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged, deformed or has had a
hole made in it, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not
severe enough to cause the SRS side and
curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger
airbag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat
cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
35
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-
taining the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
The driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental
devices to be used with the seat belts.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag
is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.) of infla-
tion, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.)
from your driver airbag provides you with
a clear margin of safety. This distance is
measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less
than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several
ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as
you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many
drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10
in.) distance, even with the driver seat
all the way forward, simply by reclining
the back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat makes it
hard to see the road, raise yourself by
using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or
raise the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
•If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt
it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head
and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recom-
mended above, while still maintaining
control of the foot pedals, steering wheel,
and your view of the instrument panel
controls.
The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury
especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passen-
ger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
36
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag.
An infant or child who is too small to
use a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly recommends that all
infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are safer for
infants and children than the front pas-
senger seat. (
P.43)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants
to hold items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or
put their head or hands outside the
vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
37
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
WARNING
Do not attach anything to areas such
as a door, windshield, side windows,
front or rear pillar, roof side rail and
assist grip.
Do not hang coat hangers or hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
may cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy.
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where
the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be
sure to remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere
with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side
airbags from activating correctly, disa-
ble the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting
in death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels
of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components or the front doors. Doing
so can cause the SRS airbags to mal-
function.
Do not touch any of the component
parts immediately after the SRS
airbags have deployed (inflated) as
they may be hot.
If breathing becomes difficult after the
SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.
Wash off any residue as soon as possi-
ble to prevent skin irritation.
If the areas where the SRS airbags are
stored, such as the steering wheel pad
and front and rear pillar garnishes, are
damaged or cracked, have them
replaced by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Modification and disposal of SRS
airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or per-
form any of the following modifications
without consulting any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer. The SRS airbags
may malfunction or deploy (inflate) acci-
dentally, causing death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and
repair of the SRS airbags
Repairs, modifications, removal or
replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or
seat upholstery, front, side and rear pil-
lars, roof side rails, front door panels,
front door trims or front door speakers
Modifications to the front door panel
(such as making a hole in it)
Repairs or modifications of the front
fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
Installation of a grille guard (bull bars,
kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or
winches
Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen-
sion system
Installation of electronic devices such
as mobile two-way radios (RF-trans-
mitter) and CD players
38
1-1. For safe use
Sensors
Hood
Lifters
Pop Up Hood precautions
Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure
to contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer.
The Pop Up Hood system cannot be
reused once it has operated. Have it
replaced by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer.
PCS-linked Pop Up Hood operation
control (Vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A or Lexus Safety System +
*
)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) deter-
mines that the possibility of a collision with a
pedestrian or bicyclist is high, the Pop Up
Hood will be prepared to operate.
*
: For countries/areas specified as Region
A (P.286)
Pop Up Hood operational conditions
The Pop Up Hood will operate when the
vehicle detects an impact such as the fol-
lowing:
The front bumper detects a frontal impact
equivalent to or greater than that of a
pedestrian while the vehicle being driven
within the operational speed range of
approximately 25 to 55 km/h (16 to 34
mph). (The system is operated by an
impact of threshold level or greater, even
in the case of a minor collision that may
not leave a trace on the front bumper.
Also, depending on the impact condi-
tions or vehicle speed, the system may
operate by a collision with a light or small
object or a small animal.)
In other situations, such as the following
the system may operate when an impact
is applied to the lower part of the vehicle
or front bumper:
Colliding with a curb
Falling into a deep hole
•Landing hard
Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an
undulating road, a protruding object or
falling object
Conditions under which the Pop Up
Hood may not operate properly
If a pedestrian collides with the right or
left corner of the front bumper or the side
of the vehicle. As such impacts may be
difficult to detect, the system may not
operate.
Pop Up Hood
In the event of a frontal collision
with a body, such as a pedestrian,
the Pop Up Hood system raises the
hood to reduce the possibility of a
serious impact to the pedestrian’s
head area by adding clearance to
the engine compartment.
When the sensors located at the
back of the front bumper detect a
frontal impact with a body, such as a
pedestrian, which meets or
exceeds the threshold level while
the vehicle is being driven within
the operational speed range, the
system operates.
System components
A
B
C
39
1
1-1. For safe use
For safety and security
If the vehicle speed is not detected cor-
rectly, such as if the vehicle is sliding side-
ways, the system may not operate
properly.
Conditions under which the Pop Up
Hood will not operate
The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the
following situations:
Colliding with a lying person
A frontal impact applied to the front
bumper while driving at speeds outside
of the operational speed range
A side impact or rear impact
A vehicle rollover (In some accident situ-
ations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)
WARNING
When the Pop Up Hood is operated
Do not pull the hood lock release lever.
Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has
operated will further raise the hood
and may cause an injury. Do not drive
with the hood raised, as doing so may
block the driver’s vision, possibly caus-
ing an accident.
Do not forcibly push down the hood.
As the popped up hood cannot be
lowered by hand, doing so may deform
the hood or cause an injury.
If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have
it replaced by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer. If the Pop Up
Hood has operated, stop the vehicle in
a safe place and contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not touch the lifters immediately
after the Pop Up Hood has operated,
as the lifters may be hot and burn you.
NOTICE
Pop Up Hood precautions
Make sure to close the hood before
driving, as the system may not operate
properly if the hood is not fully closed.
Make sure that all 4 tires are of the
specified size and inflated to the speci-
fied tire pressure. If tires of a different
size are used, the system may not
operate properly.
If something has hit the area around
the front bumper, the sensors may be
damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has
not operated. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Do not remove or repair the parts or
wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing
so may cause accidental operation or
prevent the system from operating
properly. If repair or replacement is
necessary, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not remove such components as
the front bumper, hood or suspension,
or replace them with non-genuine
parts, as doing so may prevent the sys-
tem from operating properly.
Do not install anything to the front
bumper or hood, as doing so may pre-
vent the sensors from detecting an
impact correctly and prevent the sys-
tem from operating properly.
Do not close the hood with force or
apply load to the lifters, as doing so
may damage the lifters and prevent the
system from operating properly.
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes made to the vehicle height
may prevent the system from operat-
ing properly.
40
1-1. For safe use
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human
body is included in exhaust gases if
inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases
enter the vehicle and may lead to an
accident caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
Important points while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi-
cle even when the trunk lid is closed,
open the windows and have the vehi-
cle inspected at any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-
sible.
When parking
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated
area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
Do not leave the vehicle with the
engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided,
park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter
the vehicle interior.
Do not leave the engine running in an
area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around
the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter
the vehicle.
Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked
periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint
or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and repaired
by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
41
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
1-2.Child safety
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indica-
tor
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” and “ON” indi-
cator light turns on when the airbag system
is on, and about after 60 seconds they go
off. (only when the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode)
Airbag manual on-off switch
Insert the mechanical key into the cyl-
inder and rotate to the “OFF” position.
The “OFF” indicator light turns on (only
when the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode).
“PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator
information
If any of the following problems occur, it is
possible that there is a malfunction in the
system. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
The “OFF” indicator does not illuminate
when the airbag manual on-off switch is
set to “OFF”.
The indicator light does not change when
the airbag manual on-off switch is
switched to “ON” or “OFF”.
Airbag manual on-off system
This system deactivates the front
passenger airbag and front passen-
ger knee airbag.
Only deactivate the airbags when
using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat.
System components
A
B
Deactivating the front seat pas-
senger airbag and front passen-
ger knee airbag
42
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
For safety reasons, always install a child
restraint system in a rear seat. In the
event that the rear seat cannot be used,
the front seat can be used as long as the
airbag manual on-off system is set to
“OFF”.
If the airbag manual on-off system is left
on, the strong impact of the airbag
deployment (inflation) may cause serious
injury or even death.
When a child restraint system is not
installed on the front passenger seat
Ensure that the airbag manual on-off sys-
tem is set to “ON”.
If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in
the event of an accident, which may
result in serious injury or even death.
Riding with children
Observe the following precautions
when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appro-
priate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that children
sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-
dental contact with the shift lever,
wiper switch etc.
Use the rear door child-protector
lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door
while driving or operating the
power window accidentally.
(P.118, 200)
Do not let small children operate
equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the
power window, hood, trunk, seats
etc.
WARNING
When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the
vehicle can be fatal to children.
43
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
Points to remember: P.43
When using a child restraint system:
P.44
Child restraint system compatibility for
each seating position: P.48
Child restraint system installation
method: P.54
Fixed with a seat belt: P.55
Fixed with an ISOFIX lower anchor-
age: P.57
Using a top tether anchorage: P.58
Prioritize and observe the warn-
ings, as well as the laws and regula-
tions for child restraint systems.
Use a child restraint system until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
Choose a child restraint system
appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
Note that not all child restraint sys-
tems can fit in all vehicles.
Before using or purchasing a child
restraint system, check the compati-
bility of the child restraint system
with seat positions. (P.48)
Child restraint systems
Before installing a child restraint
system in the vehicle, there are pre-
cautions that need to be observed,
different types of child restraint sys-
tems, as well as installation meth-
ods, etc., written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system when
riding with a small child that can-
not properly use a seat belt. For
the child’s safety, install the child
restraint system to a rear seat. Be
sure to follow the installation
method that is in the operation
manual enclosed with the
restraint system.
The use of a Lexus genuine child
restraint system is recom-
mended, as it is safer to use in this
vehicle. Lexus genuine child
restraint systems are made specif-
ically for Lexus vehicles. They can
be purchased at a Lexus dealer.
Table of contents
Points to remember
WARNING
When a child is riding
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
For effective protection in automobile
accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a
seat belt or child restraint system
which is correctly installed. For installa-
tion details, refer to the operation man-
ual enclosed with the child restraint
system. General installation instruction
is provided in this manual.
Lexus strongly urges the use of a
proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the weight and size of the
child, installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
44
1-2. Child safety
When installing a child restraint
system to a front passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install child
restraint systems to a rear seats. When
installing child restraint system to a
front passenger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and install the
child restraint system:
Move the front seat fully rearward.
Adjust the seatback angle to the
most upright position.
When installing a forward-facing child
seat, if there is a gap between the child seat
and the seatback, adjust the seatback
angle until good contact is achieved.
Adjust the front of the seat cushion
to the lowest position.
Adjust the seat height to the upper-
most position.
Adjust the lumbar support to the
lowest position.
Adjust the shoulder bolster to the
lowest position (if equipped).
Adjust the pelvic support to the low-
est position.
Adjust the seatback side bolster to
the widest position (if equipped).
Adjust the seat cushion side bolster
to the lowest position (if equipped).
Adjust the hip support to the lowest
position (if equipped).
If the head restraint interferes with
WARNING
Holding a child in your or someone
else’s arms is not a substitute for a child
restraint system. In an accident, the
child can be crushed against the wind-
shield or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
Handling the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is not prop-
erly fixed in place, the child or other pas-
sengers may be seriously injured or even
killed in the event of sudden braking, sud-
den swerving, or an accident.
If the vehicle were to receive a strong
impact from an accident, etc., it is pos-
sible that the child restraint system has
damage that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the restraint
system.
Depending on the child restraint sys-
tem, installation may be difficult or
impossible. In those cases, check
whether the child restraint system is
suitable for installment in the vehicle.
(
P.48) Be sure to install and
observe the usage rules after carefully
reading the child restraint system fixing
method in this manual, as well as the
operation manual enclosed with the
child restraint system.
Keep the child restraint system prop-
erly secured on the seat even if it is not
in use. Do not store the child restraint
system unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
If it is necessary to detach the child
restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.
When using a child restraint sys-
tem
45
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
the child restraint system installa-
tion and the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head restraint in
the upper most position.
When installing a child restraint
system to a power rear seat (if
equipped)
When using a child restraint system in
an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as
follows and install the child restraint
system:
Adjust the seat cushion to the fully
rearward position.
Adjust the upper seatback to the
rearmost position.
Adjust the front of the seat cushion
to the lowest position.
Adjust the head restraint to the low-
est and rearmost position.
Adjust the shoulder bolster to the
lowest position.
Adjust the lumbar support to the
lowest position.
Adjust the pelvic support to the low-
est position.
Disable the automatic rear seat
operation. (P.175)
For the rear seat with an ottoman (if
equipped): Adjust the seatback to
the most upright position and otto-
man (footrest) to the stowed posi-
tion.
WARNING
When using a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
46
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat
when the airbag manual on-off switch
is on. (P.41)
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to children in
the event of an accident.
There is a label(s) on the passenger
side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden
to attach a rear-facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat.
Details of the label(s) are shown in the
illustration below.
47
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
WARNING
Only put a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a for-
ward-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible. Failing to do so may
result in death or serious injury if the
airbags deploy (inflate).
Do not allow the child to lean his/her
head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat,
front or rear pillars, or roof side rails
from which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
When a junior seat is installed, always
ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child’s neck, but not so that it
could fall off the child’s shoulder.
Use child restraint system suitable to
the age and size of the child and install
it to the rear seat.
48
1-2. Child safety
Child restraint system compatibil-
ity for each seating position
Compatibility of each seating position
with child restraint systems (P.49)
displays the type of child restraint sys-
tems that can be used and possible
seating positions for installation using
symbols. Also, the recommended child
restraint system that is suitable for your
child can be selected.
Otherwise, check [Recommended
child restraint systems and Compatibil-
ity table] for recommended child
restraint systems. (P.52)
Check the selected child restraint sys-
tem together with the following
[Before confirming the compatibility of
each seating position with child
restraint systems].
Before confirming the compatibil-
ity of each seating position with
child restraint systems
1Checking the child restraint system
standards.
Use a child restraint system that
conforms to UN(ECE) R44
*1
or
UN(ECE) R129
*1, 2
.
The following approval mark is dis-
played on child restraint systems
which are conformed.
Check for an approval mark
attached to the child restraint sys-
tem.
Example of the displayed regulation Num-
ber
UN(ECE) R44 approval mark
*3
The weight range of the child who is
applicable for an UN(ECE) R44
approval mark is indicated.
UN(ECE) R129 approval mark
*3
The height range of the child who is
applicable as well as available
weights for an UN(ECE) R129
approval mark is indicated.
WARNING
If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the
right-hand rear seat. (P.52)
Child restraint system compati-
bility for each seating position
A
B
49
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
2Checking the category of the child
restraint system.
Check the approval mark of the
child restraint system for which of
the following categories the child
restraint system is suitable.
Also, if there are any uncertainties,
check the user’s guide included
with the child restraint system or
contact the retailer of the child
restraint system.
“universal”
•“semi-universal
•“restricted
“vehicle specific”
*1
: UN(ECE) R44 and UN(ECE) R129
are U.N. regulations for child restraint
systems.
*2
: The child restraint systems mentioned in
the table may not be available outside of
the EU area.
*3
: The displayed mark may differ depend-
ing on the product.
Compatibility of each seating posi-
tion with child restraint systems
*1, 2, 3
*4
*2, 3
*2, 3
Suitable for “universal” category
child restraint system fixed with
the seat belt.
Suitable for child restraint systems
given on recommended child
restraint systems and compatibility
table (P.52)
Suitable for i-Size and ISOFIX
child restraint system.
Includes a top tether anchorage
point.
50
1-2. Child safety
*1
: Move the front seat fully rearward. If the
passenger seat height can be adjusted,
move it to the upper most position.
*2
: Adjust the seatback angle to the most
upright position. When installing a for-
ward-facing child seat, if there is a gap
between the child seat and the
seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved.
*3
: If the head restraint interferes with your
child restraint system, and the head
restraint can be removed, remove the
head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head restraint in the
upper most position.
*4
: Use only a front-facing child restraint
system when the airbag manual on-off
switch is on.
Detail information for CRS installation
Not suitable for child restraint sys-
tem.
Never use a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat when the airbag man-
ual on-off switch is on.
Seating position
Seat position number Airbag manual on-off
switch
ON OFF
Seating position suitable for uni-
versal belted (yes/no)
yes
Forward
facing only
yes yes yes
i-Size seating position (yes/no) no no yes yes
Seating position suitable for lateral
fixture (L1/L2/no) no no no no
Suitable rearward facing fixture
(R1/R2X/R2/R3/no) no no R1, R2X, R2,
R3
R1, R2X, R2,
R3
Suitable forward facing fixture
(F2X/F2/F3/no) no no F2X, F2, F3 F2X, F2, F3
Suitable junior seat fixture
(B2/B3/no) no no B2, B3 B2, B3
51
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
ISOFIX child restraint systems are divided into different “fixture”. The child
restraint system can be used in the seating positions for “fixture” mentioned in the
table above. For kind of “fixture” relation, confirm the following table.
If your child restraint system has no kind of “fixture” (or if you cannot find informa-
tion in the table below), please refer to the child restraint system “vehicle list” for
compatibility information or ask the retailer of your child seat.
Fixture Description
F3 Full-height, forward-facing child restraint systems
F2 Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
F2X Reduced-height forward-facing child restraint systems
R3 Full-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems
R2 Reduced-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems
R2X Reduced-size, rearward-facing child restraint systems
R1 Rearward-facing infant seat
L1 Left lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
L2 Right lateral-facing (carrycot) infant seat
B2 Junior seat
B3 Junior seat
52
1-2. Child safety
Recommended child restraint systems and Compatibility table
Vehicles without power rear seat
Mass groups Recommended Child
Restraint System
Seating position
Airbag manual
on-off switch
ON OFF
0, 0+
Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)
LEXUS G0+, BABY SAFE
PLUS (yes/no) no yes yes yes
LEXUS G0+ BABY SAFE
PLUS with SEAT BELT FIX-
ATION, BASE PLATFORM
(yes/no)
no yes no no
LEXUS MINI (yes/no) no yes yes yes
LEXUS MINI with
ISO-BASE (yes/no) no no yes yes
LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes
I
9 to 18 kg (20 to
39 lb.)
LEXUS DUO PLUS
(yes/no)
yes
Belt fix
only
yes
Belt fix
only
yes yes
LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes
53
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
Vehicles with power rear seat
The child restraint systems mentioned in the table may not be available outside the
EU area.
When securing some types of child
restraint systems in rear seat, it may not
be possible to properly use the seat
belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across
your shoulder and low on your hips. If it
does not, or if it interferes with the child
restraint, move to a different position.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
When installing a child restraint in
the rear seats, adjust the front seat
so that it does not interfere with the
child or child restraint system.
When installing a child seat with
support base, if the child seat inter-
feres with the seatback when latch-
ing it into the support base, adjust
the seatback rearward until there is
no interference.
If the seat belt shoulder anchor is
Mass groups Recommended Child
Restraint System
Seating position
Airbag manual
on-off switch
ON OFF
0, 0+
Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)
LEXUS G0+, BABY SAFE
PLUS (yes/no) no yes yes yes
LEXUS G0+ BABY SAFE
PLUS with SEAT BELT FIX-
ATION, BASE PLATFORM
(yes/no)
no yes yes yes
LEXUS MINI (yes/no) no yes yes yes
LEXUS MINI with
ISO-BASE (yes/no) no no yes yes
LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes
I
9 to 18 kg (20 to
39 lb.)
LEXUS DUO PLUS
(yes/no)
yes
Belt fix
only
yes
Belt fix
only
yes yes
LEXUS MIDI (yes/no) no no yes yes
54
1-2. Child safety
ahead of the child seat belt guide,
move the seat cushion forward.
When installing a junior seat, if the
child in your child restraint system is
in a very upright position, adjust the
seatback angle to the most comfort-
able position. And if the seat belt
shoulder anchor is ahead of the
child seat belt guide, move the seat
cushion forward.
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about
the installation of the child restraint system.
Child restraint system installation method
Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.55
55
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
Installing child restraint system
using a seat belt
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
If the child restraint system on hand is
not within the “universal” category (or
the necessary information is not in the
table), refer to the “Vehicle List” pro-
vided by the child restraint system
maker for various possible installation
positions, or check the compatibility
after asking the retailer of the child
seat. (P.48, 49)
1Adjust the seat
When using the front passenger
seat
If installing the child restraint system to the
front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.44for the front passenger seat adjust-
ment.
When using the power rear seat (if
equipped)
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved. (P.45)
2Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted. Securely fix the
seat belt to the child restraint sys-
tem in accordance to the directions
ISOFIX lower anchorage
attachment P.57
Top tether anchorage
attachment P.58
Installation method Page
Child restraint system fixed with
a seat belt
56
1-2. Child safety
enclosed with the child restraint
system.
3If your child restraint system is not
equipped with a lock-off (a seat belt
locking feature), secure the child
restraint system using a locking clip.
4After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(P.56)
Removing a child restraint system
installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child
restraint system may spring up due to the
rebound of the seat cushion. Release the
buckle while holding down the child
restraint system.
Since the seat belt automatically reels itself,
slowly return it to the stowing position.
When installing a child restraint system
You may need a locking clip to install the
child restraint system. Follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manufacturer of the
system. If your child restraint system does
not provide a locking clip, you can purchase
the following item from any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer: Locking clip for
child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
WARNING
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may
lead to choking or other serious inju-
ries that could result in death. If this
occurs and the buckle cannot be
unfastened, scissors should be used to
cut the belt.
Ensure that the belt and plate are
securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
Shake the child restraint system left
and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely
installed.
After securing a child restraint system,
never adjust the seat.
When a junior seat is installed, always
ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s
shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child’s neck, but not so that it
could fall off the child’s shoulder.
Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
57
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
ISOFIX lower anchorages
(ISOFIX child restraint system)
Lower anchorages are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Tags displaying
the location of the anchorages are
attached to the seats.)
Installation with ISOFIX lower
anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint
system)
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
If the child restraint system on hand is
not within the “universal” category (or
the necessary information is not in the
table), refer to the “Vehicle List” pro-
vided by the child restraint system
maker for various possible installation
positions, or check the compatibility
after asking the retailer of the child
seat. (P.48, 49)
1Vehicles with power rear seat:
Adjust the seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved. (P.45)
2Open the cover.
3Insert the tab into the slit of
the cover.
The cover will be held open.
4Check the positions of the exclu-
sive fixing bars, and install the child
restraint system to the seat.
The bars are installed in the clearance
Child restraint system fixed with
an ISOFIX lower anchorage
B
A
58
1-2. Child safety
between the seat cushion and seatback.
5After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(P.56)
Top tether anchorages
Top tether anchorages are provided
for the outboard rear seats.
Use top tether anchorages when fixing
the top strap.
Top tether anchorages
Top strap
Fixing the top strap to the top
tether anchorages
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
Open the top tether anchorages cover,
latch the hook onto the top tether
anchorage and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is securely latched.
(P.56)
WARNING
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
After securing a child restraint system,
never adjust the seat.
When using the lower anchorages, be
sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchorages and that the
seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system.
Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Using a top tether anchorage
A
B
59
1
1-2. Child safety
For safety and security
Hook
Top strap
WARNING
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Firmly attach the top strap and make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Do not attach the top strap to anything
other than the top tether anchorages.
After securing a child restraint system,
never adjust the seat.
Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
NOTICE
Top tether anchorages
When not in use, make certain to close
the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be
damaged.
A
B
60
1-3. Emergency assistance
1-3.Emergency assist ance
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Operates within regions offering emer-
gency notification services. Ask any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
*3
: The system name differs depending on
the country.
Microphone
“SOS” button
*
Indicator lights
*
: This button is intended for communica-
tion with the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK
system operator.
Other SOS buttons available in other
systems of a motor vehicle do not relate
to the device and are not intended for
communication with the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK system opera-
tor.
Automatic Emergency Calls
If any airbag deploys, the system is
designed to automatically call the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center.
*
The answering operator
receives the vehicle’s location, the time
of the incident and the vehicle VIN,
and attempts to speak with the vehicle
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK*1, 2, 3
The Emergency Call system is a
device installed on a vehicle to
determine its location and move-
ment direction (using GLONASS
[Global Navigation Satellite Sys-
tem] and GPS [Global Positioning
System] signals), and ensure the
generation and transmission of
vehicle information (in a nonadjust-
able form) in case of traffic acci-
dents or other incidents on motor
roads in the countries offering
emergency notification services. In
addition, it ensures two-way voice
communication between the vehi-
cle and an ERA-GLONASS/EVAK
system operator through cellular
networks (GSM).
Automatic Emergency Calls (via
Automatic Collision Notification)
and manual Emergency Calls (by
pressing the “SOS” button) can be
made to the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center.
This service is mandatory accord-
ing to the technical regulations of
the Customs Union.
System components
Emergency Notification Ser-
vices
A
B
C
61
1
1-3. Emergency assistance
For safety and security
occupants to assess the situation. If the
occupants are unable to communicate,
the operator automatically treats the
call as an emergency and contacts the
nearest emergency services provider
(112 system etc.) to describe the situa-
tion and request that assistance be sent
to the location.
*
: In some cases, the call cannot be made.
(P.62)
Manual Emergency Calls
In the event of an emergency, press the
“SOS” button to call the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center.
*
The answering operator will
determine your vehicle’s location,
assess the situation, and dispatch the
necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button,
tell the operator that you are not experi-
encing an emergency.
*
: In some cases, the call cannot be made.
(P.62)
When the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the red indica-
tor light will illuminate for 10 seconds
and then the green indicator light will
illuminate, indicating that the system is
enabled. The indicator lights indicate
the following:
If the green indicator light illumi-
nates and stays on, the system is
enabled.
If the green indicator light flashes
twice per second, an automatic or
manual Emergency Call is being
made.
If no indicator lights illuminate, the
system is not enabled.
If the red indicator light illuminates
at any time other than immediately
after the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the system
may be malfunctioning or the
backup battery may be depleted.
If the red indicator light blinks for
approximately 30 seconds during
an Emergency Call, the call has
been disconnected or the cellular
network signal is weak.
The service life of the backup battery does
not exceed 3 years.
A test mode is provided for to check
the performance of the Emergency
Call system. To test the device, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Free/Open Source Software Informa-
tion
This product contains Free/Open Source
Software (FOSS). The license information
and/or the source code of such FOSS can
be found at the following URL.
http://www.opensourceautomotive.com/
dcm/lexus/
Indicator lights
Device test mode
62
1-3. Emergency assistance
WARNING
When the Emergency Call may not
be made
It may not be possible to make Emer-
gency Calls in any of the following situ-
ations. In such cases, report to
emergency services provider (112 sys-
tem etc.) by other means such as
nearby public phones.
Even when the vehicle is in the cellular
phone service area, it may be difficult
to connect to the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center if the reception is poor or the
line is busy. In such cases, even though
the system attempts to connect to the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center, you may not be able to connect
to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-
trol center to make Emergency Calls
and contact emergency services.
When the vehicle is out of the cellular
phone service area, the Emergency
Calls cannot be made.
When any related equipment (such as
the “SOS” button panel, indicator
lights, microphone, speaker, DCM,
antenna, or any wires connecting the
equipment) is malfunctioning, dam-
aged or broken, the Emergency Call
cannot be made.
During an Emergency Call, the system
makes repeated attempts to connect
to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK con-
trol center. However, if it cannot con-
nect to the ERA-GLONASS/EVAK
control center due to poor radio wave
reception, the system may not be able
to connect to the cellular network and
the call may finish without connecting.
The red indicator light will blink for
approximately 30 seconds to indicate
this disconnection.
This device may not function if a shock
is applied to it.
If the battery’s voltage decreases or
there is a disconnection, the system
may not be able to connect to the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control
center.
When the Emergency Call system is
replaced with a new one
The Emergency Call system should be
registered. Contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
For your safety
Please drive safely.
The function of this system is to assist
you in making the Emergency Call in
case of accidents such as traffic acci-
dents or sudden medical emergencies,
and it does not protect the driver or
passengers in any way. Please drive
safely and fasten your seatbelts at all
times for your safety.
In case of an emergency, make lives
the top priority.
If you smell anything burning or other
unusual smells, leave the vehicle and
evacuate to a safe area immediately.
Since the system detects shocks, the
automatic reporting may not always
occur synchronized with the operation
of the airbag system. (If the vehicle is
struck from behind, etc.)
For safety, do not make the Emergency
Call while driving.
Making calls during driving may cause
mishandling of the steering wheel,
which may lead to unexpected acci-
dents.
Stop the vehicle and confirm the safety
of your surroundings before making
the Emergency Call.
When changing fuses, please use the
specified fuses. Using other fuses may
cause ignition or smoke in the circuit
and lead to a fire.
63
1
1-3. Emergency assistance
For safety and security
WARNING
Using the system while there is smoke
or an unusual smell may cause a fire.
Stop using the system immediately and
consult any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
NOTICE
To prevent damage
Do not pour any liquids onto the “SOS”
button panel, etc. and do not impact it.
If the “SOS” button panel, speaker or
microphone malfunctions during an
Emergency Call or manual mainte-
nance check
It may not be possible to make Emer-
gency Calls, confirm the system status, or
communicate with the
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK control center
operator. If any of the above equipment is
damaged, please consult any authorized
Lexus retailer, Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
64
1-4. Theft deterrent system
1-4.Theft deterrent system
The indicator light flashes after the
engine switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the engine switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to
malfunction
If the grip portion of the key is in contact
with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touch-
ing a key to the security system (key with
a built-in transponder chip) of another
vehicle
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in
transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if a key has not
been previously registered in the
vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help pre-
vent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security
against all vehicle thefts.
Operating the system
65
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
Certification for the engine immobilizer system
66
1-4. Theft deterrent system
67
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
68
1-4. Theft deterrent system
69
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
70
1-4. Theft deterrent system
71
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
72
1-4. Theft deterrent system
73
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
74
1-4. Theft deterrent system
75
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates cor-
rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.
76
1-4. Theft deterrent system
Setting
Turn the engine switch off, have all the
passengers exit the vehicle and ensure
that all the doors are closed.
Using the entry function: Touch the
sensor area on the outside door handle
twice within 5 seconds.
Using the wireless remote control:
Press twice within 5 seconds.
Canceling
Using the entry function: Hold the out-
side door handle, press the power
trunk lid switch or move your foot
under the center of the rear bumper
(vehicles with a Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid).
Using the wireless remote control:
Press .
Double locking system
Unauthorized access to the vehicle
is prevented by disabling the door
unlocking function from both the
interior and exterior of the vehicle.
Vehicles employing this system
have labels on the window glass of
both front doors.
Setting/canceling the double
locking system
WARNING
Double locking system precaution
Never activate the double locking sys-
tem when there are people in the vehicle
because all the doors cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle.
77
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
Items to check before locking the
vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of
the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof are
closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal
items are left in the vehicle.
Setting
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and
lock all the doors using the entry func-
tion or wireless remote control. The
system will be set automatically after
30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on
to flashing when the system is set.
Deactivating or stopping
Do one of the following to deactivate
or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors or open the trunk
using the entry function or wireless
remote control.
Starting the engine. (The alarm will
be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
alarm system.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following
situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm
system.)
The doors are unlocked using the
mechanical key.
Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to
give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the follow-
ing situations when the alarm is set:
A locked door or trunk is
unlocked or opened in any way
other than using the entry func-
tion or wireless remote control.
(The doors will lock again auto-
matically.)
The hood is opened.
The intrusion sensor detects
something moving inside the
vehicle. (Example: an intruder
breaks a window and gets into the
vehicle.)
The tilt sensor detects a change of
vehicle inclination.
Setting/deactivating/stopping
the alarm system
78
1-4. Theft deterrent system
The trunk is opened using the mechanical
key.
A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.
The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked. (P.527)
Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the sit-
uation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
When a person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door and the alarm is acti-
vated.
While the alarm is activated, a person
remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
detection
The intrusion sensor detects intrud-
ers or movement in the vehicle.
The tilt sensor detects changes in
vehicle inclination, such as when the
vehicle is towed away.
This system is designed to deter and
prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all
intrusions.
Setting the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will
be set automatically when the alarm is
set. (P.77)
Canceling the intrusion sensor and
tilt sensor
If you are leaving pets or other moving
things inside the vehicle, make sure to
disable the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor before setting the alarm, as they
will respond to movement inside the
vehicle.
1Turn the engine switch off.
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates cor-
rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.
The intrusion sensor and tilt sen-
sor detection
79
1
1-4. Theft deterrent system
For safety and security
2Press the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor cancel switch.
Press the switch again to re-enable the
intrusion sensor and tilt sensor.
Each time the intrusion sensor and tilt sen-
sor are canceled/set, a message will be
shown on the multi-information display.
Canceling and automatic re-enabling of
the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
The alarm will still be set even when the
intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are
canceled.
After the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
are canceled, pressing the engine switch
or unlocking the doors using the entry
function or wireless remote control will
re-enable the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor.
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor will
automatically be re-enabled when the
alarm system is deactivated.
Intrusion sensor detection considera-
tions
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the fol-
lowing situations:
People or pets are in the vehicle.
A window or moon roof is open.
In this case, the sensor may detect the fol-
lowing:
Wind or the movement of objects such as
leaves and insects inside the vehicle
Ultrasonic waves emitted from devices
such as the intrusion sensors of other
vehicles
The movement of people outside the
vehicle
Small insects such as moths or flies are in
the vehicle.
Unstable items, such as dangling acces-
sories or clothes hanging on the coat
hooks, are in the vehicle.
The vehicle is parked in a place where
extreme vibrations or noises occur, such
as in a parking garage.
Ice or snow is removed from the vehicle,
causing the vehicle to receive repeated
impacts or vibrations.
80
1-4. Theft deterrent system
The vehicle is inside an automatic or
high-pressure car wash.
The vehicle experiences impacts, such as
hail, lightning strikes, and other kinds of
repeated impacts or vibrations.
Tilt sensor detection considerations
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the fol-
lowing situations:
The vehicle is transported by a ferry,
trailer, train, etc.
The vehicle is parked in a parking garage.
The vehicle is inside a car wash that
moves the vehicle.
Any of the tires loses air pressure.
The vehicle is jacked up.
An earthquake occurs or the road caves
in.
Cargo is loaded onto or unloaded from
the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
To ensure the intrusion sensor func-
tion correctly
To ensure that the sensors operate
properly, do not touch or cover them.
Do not spray air fresheners or other
products directly into the sensor holes.
Installing accessories other than genu-
ine Lexus parts or leaving objects
between the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seat may reduce the
detection performance.
2
81
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Vehicle status information
and indicators
.
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
........................................................... 82
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ........................ 86
Gauges and meters (F SPORT
models).......................................... 89
Multi-information display.......... 93
Head-up display .......................... 101
Fuel consumption information
.........................................................105
82
2-1. Instrument cluster
2-1.Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights
and indicators illuminated.
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and
outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various
systems.
Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster
83
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Warning lights inform the driver of mal-
functions in the indicated vehicle’s sys-
tems.
*1
: These lights come on when the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a
system if the lights do not come on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
*2
: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-
Warning lights
(red)
Brake system warning light
*1
(P.507)
(yellow)
Brake system warning light
*1
(P.507)
High coolant temperature
warning light
*2
(P.507)
Charging system warning
light
*2
(P.508)
Low engine oil pressure warn-
ing light
*2
(P.508)
Malfunction indicator lamp
*1
(P.508)
SRS warning light
*1
(P.508)
Pop Up Hood warning light
*1
(P.509)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.509)
Inappropriate pedal operation
warning light
*2
(P.509)
(red)
Electric power steering system
warning light
*1
(P.510)
(yellow)
Electric power steering system
warning light
*1
(P.510)
Low fuel level warning light
(P.510)
Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light
(P.510)
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder lights
(except F SPORT mod-
els) (P.511)
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder lights (F SPORT mod-
els) (P.511)
Tire pressure warning light
*1
(P.511)
(orange)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(P.511)
(flashes)
Stop & Start cancel indicator
*1
(P.512)
(flashes)
RCD OFF indicator (if
equipped) (P.512)
(flashes or
illuminates)
PCS warning light
*1
(if
equipped) (P.512)
Slip indicator
*1
(P.513)
(flashes)
Parking brake indicator
(P.513)
(flashes)
Brake hold operated indicator
*1
(P.513)
84
2-1. Instrument cluster
mation display.
The indicators inform the driver of the
operating state of the vehicle’s various
systems.
WARNING
If a safety system warning light does
not come on
Should a safety system light such as the
ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine, this could
mean that these systems are not available
to help protect you in an accident, which
could result in death or serious injury.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately if this occurs.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator (P.226)
Tail light indicator (P.232)
Headlight high beam indicator
(P.233)
AHS indicator (if equipped)
(P.235)
AHB indicator (if equipped)
(P.238)
Multi Weather Lights indicator
(P.241)
Rear fog light indicator
(P.242)
PCS warning light
*1, 2
(if
equipped) (P.276, 288)
Cruise control indicator
(P.311, 323)
Dynamic radar cruise control
indicator (if equipped) (P.311)
Cruise control “SET” indicator
(P.311, 323)
(white)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(P.302)
(green)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(P.302)
(orange)
(flashes)
LTA indicator (if equipped)
(P.302)
BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators
*1, 3
(if equipped)
(P.332, 355)
BSM OFF indicator
*1, 2
(if
equipped) (P.332)
Lexus parking assist-sensor
OFF indicator
*1, 2
(P.351)
RCTA OFF indicator
*1, 2
(if
equipped) (P.355)
RCD OFF indicator
*2
(if
equipped) (P.359)
PKSB OFF indicator
*1, 2
(if
equipped) (P.363)
Stop & Start indicator
*1
(P.325)
Stop & Start cancel indicator
*1,
2
(P.331)
(flashes)
Slip indicator
*1
(P.385)
VSC OFF indicator
*1, 2
(P.385)
High mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.381)
Smart entry & start system indi-
cator
*4
(P.216)
Parking brake indicator
(P.227)
85
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Drive mode indicators
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
*1
: These lights come on when the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a
system if the lights do not come on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
*2
: This light comes on when the system is
turned off.
*3
: This light illuminates on the outside rear
view mirrors.
*4
: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-
mation display.
*5
: When the outside temperature is
approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, this
indicator will flash for approximately 10
seconds, then stay on.
*6
: This light illuminates on the center
panel.
Brake hold standby indicator
*1
(P.230)
Brake hold operated indicator
*1
(P.230)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
*1
(P.97)
Low outside temperature indi-
cator
*5
(P.86, 89)
Security indicator
*6
(P.64,
77)
“PASSENGER AIR
BAG” indicator
*1, 6
(P.41)
Snow mode indicator
(P.223)
Normal mode indicator
(P.378)
Custom mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.378)
Comfort mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.378)
Eco drive mode indicator
(P.378)
Sport mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.378)
Sport S mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.378)
Sport S+ mode indicator (if
equipped) (P.378)
Snow mode indicator
(P.223)
Normal mode indicator
(P.378)
Custom mode indicator
(P.378)
Comfort mode indicator
(P.378)
Eco drive mode indicator
(P.378)
Sport S mode indicator
(P.378)
Sport S+ mode indicator
(P.378)
86
2-1. Instrument cluster
Locations of gauges and meters
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Odometer and trip meter display (P.87)
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will
change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
Speedometer
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)
Shift position indicator (P.221)
Shift range/gear position (P.219)
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Multi-information display
Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models)
Meter display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
87
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct
outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer
than normal to change:
When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])
When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle
to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Liquid crystal display
P.94
Customization
The gauges and meters can be customized
on of the multi-information display.
(P.99)
Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be
driven until an oil change is necessary.
Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is
pressed, the displayed item will be
changed. When the trip meter is dis-
played, pressing and holding the switch
will reset the trip meter.
WARNING
The information display at low tem-
peratures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm
up before using the liquid crystal infor-
mation display. At extremely low temper-
atures, the information display monitor
may respond slowly, and display changes
may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the
driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine brak-
ing and possibly an accident resulting in
death or injury.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and
its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the
tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the
engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-
diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it has
cooled completely. (P.530)
Odometer and trip meter dis-
play
88
2-1. Instrument cluster
Pop-up display
In some situations the following will be
temporarily displayed:
Stop & Start system operation time
(current) (P.325)
Stop & Start system operating state
(P.329)
Distance until next engine oil
change
When a warning message indicating that
oil maintenance should be performed soon
or is required is displayed.
The brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted.
1Darker
2Brighter
Brightness of the meters (day mode and
night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes
between day mode and night mode.
Day mode: When the tail lights are off or
when the tail lights are on but the sur-
rounding area is bright
Night mode: When the tail lights are on
and the surrounding area is dark
Changing the instrument panel
light brightness
89
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Locations of gauges and meters
When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the
gauge layout will change. (P.93)
Main meter in center position
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
Odometer and trip meter display (P.92)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will
change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
Rev indicator (P.91)
•Rev peak (P.91)
Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)
Speedometer
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)
Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)
Meter display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
90
2-1. Instrument cluster
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Shift position indicator (P.221)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)
Main meter moved to the right
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F)
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (P.434)
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will
change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
Rev indicator (P.91)
•Rev peak (P.91)
Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)
Speedometer
Shift position indicator (P.221)
Odometer and trip meter display (P.92)
Fuel gauge
H
I
J
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
91
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.93)
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (P.515)
Rev indicator
When the engine speed reaches a set
speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped
indicator ( ) will be displayed on the
tachometer.
The indicators will be displayed in amber
when the engine speed reaches a set
speed, and in red when the engine speed
reaches the red zone.
The engine speed at which the rev indica-
tor will begin to be displayed can be set on
of the multi-information display.
(P.99)
Rev peak
When the engine speed reaches or
exceeds 5000 r/min, an afterimage of
the tachometer will be displayed at the
highest engine speed for approxi-
mately 1 second.
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct
outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer
than normal to change:
When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])
When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle
to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Liquid crystal display
P.94
Customization
The gauges and meters can be customized
on of the multi-information display.
(P.99)
I
J
A
92
2-1. Instrument cluster
Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been
driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Distance until next engine oil
change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be
driven until an oil change is necessary.
Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is
pressed, the displayed item will be
changed. When the trip meter is dis-
played, pressing and holding the switch
will reset the trip meter.
Pop-up display
In some situations the following will be
temporarily displayed:
Stop & Start system operation time
(current) (P.325)
Stop & Start system operating state
(P.329)
Distance until next engine oil
change
When a warning message indicating that
oil maintenance should be performed soon
or is required is displayed.
The brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted.
WARNING
The information display at low tem-
peratures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm
up before using the liquid crystal infor-
mation display. At extremely low temper-
atures, the information display monitor
may respond slowly, and display changes
may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the
driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine brak-
ing and possibly an accident resulting in
death or injury.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and
its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the
tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the
engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-
diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it has
cooled completely. (P.530)
Odometer and trip meter dis-
play
Changing the instrument panel
light brightness
93
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
1Darker
2Brighter
Brightness of the meters (day mode and
night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes
between day mode and night mode.
Day mode: When the tail lights are off or
when the tail lights are on but the sur-
rounding area is bright
Night mode: When the tail lights are on
and the surrounding area is dark
The display can be switched between
the center and side positions.
Display (except F SPORT models)
By selecting menu icons on the
multi-information display, a variety of
driving-related information can be dis-
played. The multi-information display
can also be used to change display set-
tings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up
displays are also displayed in certain
situations.
Display (F SPORT models)
Main meter in center position
The multi-information display presents
the driver with a variety of driv-
ing-related information.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up
displays are also displayed in certain
situations.
Changing the main meter loca-
tion
Multi-information display
Display and menu icons
94
2-1. Instrument cluster
Main meter moved to the right
By selecting menu icons on the
multi-information display, a variety of
driving-related information can be dis-
played. The multi-information display
can also be used to change display set-
tings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up
displays are also displayed in certain
situations.
Menu icons
The menu icons will be displayed by
pressing or of the meter con-
trol switch.
F SPORT models: The menu icons can be
displayed when the main meter is moved to
the right.
Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the
display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no
problem continuing to use the display.
The multi-information display is oper-
ated using the meter control switches.
Driving information display
(P.95)
Navigation system-linked dis-
play (if equipped) (P.98)
Audio system-linked display
(P.98)
Driving support system infor-
mation display (P.99)
Warning message display
(P.515)
Settings display (P.99)
WARNING
Caution for use while driving
When operating the multi-information
display while driving, pay extra atten-
tion to the safety of the area around the
vehicle.
Do not look continuously at the
multi-information display while driving
as you may fail to see pedestrians,
objects on the road, etc. ahead of the
vehicle.
The information display at low tem-
peratures
P.87, 92
Changing the meter display
95
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
/ : Select menu icons
/ : Change displayed con-
tent, scroll up/down the screen and
move the cursor up/down
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset
Move the main meter
*
and return
to the previous screen
Call sending/receiving and history
display
Linked with the hands-free system, sending
or receiving call is displayed. For details
regarding the hands-free system, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*
: F SPORT models
Display items (except F SPORT
models)
Press or of the meter control
switch and select . Then press
or to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Stop & Start system information
Eco Driving Indicator
Boost gauge (LS500)
Tire pressure (P.467)
Display off
Display items (F SPORT models)
Main meter in center position
Press or of the meter control
switch to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Tire pressure (P.467)
Gear positions
Units (if equipped)
Display off
Driving support system information
*
(P.99)
*
: Can be selected when a driving support
system is enabled. (P.297, 311)
Main meter moved to the right
Press or of the meter control
switch and select . Then press
or to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Stop & Start system information
Eco Driving Indicator
Boost gauge (LS500)
G-force
Gear Position
Tire pressure (P.467)
Content of driving information
A
B
C
D
96
2-1. Instrument cluster
Display off
Drive information 1/Drive infor-
mation 2
Displays drive information such as the
following:
Use the displayed values as a reference
only.
Drive information 1
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel economy (after reset)
Drive information 2
Distance (driving range)
Average vehicle speed (after reset)
Displayed items (listed below) can be
changed on . (P.99)
Current fuel consumption
Bar type: Displays instantaneous current
fuel consumption
Average fuel economy
After reset: Displays average fuel con-
sumption since the display was reset
*1
After start: Displays average fuel con-
sumption since engine start
After refuel: Displays average fuel con-
sumption since refuel
Average vehicle speed
After reset: Displays average vehicle
speed since the display was reset
*1
After start: Displays average vehicle speed
since engine start
Elapsed time
After reset: Displays elapsed time since the
display was reset
*1
After start: Displays elapsed time since
engine start
Distance
Driving range: Displays driving range with
remaining fuel
*2, 3
After start: Displays the distance driven
since engine start
Other
Blank: No item
*1
: To reset, display the desired item and
press and hold of the meter control
switch.
*2
: This distance is computed based on
your average fuel consumption. As a
result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.
*3
: When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may not
be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch
off. If the vehicle is refueled without
turning the engine switch off, the display
may not be updated.
Stop & Start system information
Display items
Stop & Start system operation time (cur-
rent)/status notification
Displays the current amount of time the
engine has been stopped due to the opera-
tion of the Stop & Start system.
Also shows the status of the Stop & Start
system with a pop-up display. (P.329)
Stop & Start system operation time since
engine start
Stop & Start system operation time since
display was reset
Stop & Start system settings
Press
of the meter control switch to
97
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
display the Stop & Start system settings
screen.
On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
Stop & Start
The length of time the Stop & Start system
will operate when the “A/C” switch of the
air conditioning system is on can be set to
2 different levels.
This setting can also be changed on .
•Reset
Resets the Stop & Start system operation
time and amount of fuel saved.
To reset the recorded values, move the
cursor to “Reset”, and then press and hold
of the meter control switch.
Stop & Start system display
Select to display Stop & Start system oper-
ation time (since engine start and since dis-
play was reset) or amount of fuel saved
*
(since engine start and since display was
reset).
*
: Use the displayed amount of saved fuel
for reference only.
Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn on. When the acceleration
exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when
the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with cur-
rent Eco driving ratio based on accelera-
tion.
Eco driving ratio based on acceler-
ation
If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, the right side of the Eco Driv-
ing Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
At this time, the Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn off.
Zone of Eco driving
Boost gauge (LS500)
Displays the boost pressure. The dis-
play will change color if the specified
pressure is exceeded.
This display is intended for use as a guide-
line. Depending on factors such as the road
surface condition, temperature and vehicle
speed, the display may not show the actual
condition of the vehicle.
G-force (F SPORT models)
Displays lateral G-forces on the vehi-
cle. Also displays, around the periph-
ery of the G-force display, the left and
right steering amount, accelerator
pedal input, and brake fluid pressure.
A
B
C
D
98
2-1. Instrument cluster
Acceleration G-force on the vehi-
cle
Current G-force value (analyzed
value of front/rear and left/right
G-forces)
Record of the maximum G-forces
Accelerator pedal input
Brake fluid pressure
Steering amount
This display is intended for use as a guide-
line. Depending on factors such as the road
surface condition, temperature and vehicle
speed, the display may not show the actual
condition of the vehicle.
Resetting the record of maximum
G-forces
Press and hold of the meter control
switch to reset the record.
Peak hold function
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are
generated, the G-force value display will
turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.
Gear Position (F SPORT models)
Displays the current shift range or gear
position when the shift position is in D
or M.
Units (F SPORT models)
On some models, the units of measure
used can be changed while driving.
Unlike the units setting performed on the
settings display, the units setting per-
formed on the drive information display
can be changed while driving.
Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate
under the following conditions:
The shift position is in any position other
than D.
A paddle shift switch is operated.
The driving mode is set to sport mode.
The driving mode is set to custom mode
and the powertrain control is set to power
(P.378)
Snow mode is selected.
The vehicle speed is approximately 130
km/h (80 mph) or higher.
Select to display the following naviga-
tion system-linked information.
Route guidance to destination
Compass display (heading-up dis-
play)
Route guidance to destination display
When the route guidance to destination
display is enabled on the head-up display, it
will not be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.103)
Select to enable selection of an audio
source or track on the meter using the
A
B
C
D
E
F
Navigation system-linked dis-
play (if equipped)
Audio system-linked display
99
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
meter control switches.
Select to display the operational status
of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.297)
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
(P.311)
Cruise control (if equipped)
(P.323)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.307)
Meter display settings that can be
changed
Language
Select to change the language displayed.
Units
Select to change the units of measure dis-
played.
Speedometer display (except F
SPORT models)
Select to set the display of the speedome-
ter to digital/analog/both digital and ana-
log.
Drive information 1/Drive informa-
tion 2
Select to select up to 2 items (P.96) that
will be displayed on each Drive information
screen (Drive information 1 screen and
Drive information 2 screen) respectively.
Clock
Select to switch between 24-hour display
and 12-hour display.
Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up displays
for each relevant system.
Accent color
Select to change the accent color on the
screen, such as the cursor color.
Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
Select to enable/disable the rev indica-
tor.
Select to set the engine speed at which
the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be
displayed.
Rev peak (F SPORT models)
Select to enable/disable the rev peak.
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to enable/disable the Eco Driving
Indicator Light.
Default setting
Select to reset the meter display settings to
the default setting.
Vehicle functions and settings that
can be changed
P.546
Suspension of the settings display
Some settings cannot be changed while
driving. When changing settings, park
the vehicle in a safe place.
If a warning message is displayed, opera-
tion of the settings display will be sus-
pended.
Driving support system informa-
tion display
Settings display
100
2-1. Instrument cluster
Displays suggestions to the driver in
the following situations. To select a
response to a displayed suggestion,
use the meter control switches.
Suggestion to turn off the head-
lights
If the headlights are left on for a certain
amount of time with the headlight
switch in after the engine switch
has been turned off, a suggestion mes-
sage will be displayed asking if you
wish to turn the headlights off.
To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”.
If a front door is opened after the engine
switch is turned off, this suggestion mes-
sage will not be displayed.
Suggestion to close the power win-
dows (linked to windshield wiper
operation)
If the windshield wipers are operated
with a power window open, a sugges-
tion message will be displayed asking if
you wish to close the power windows.
To close all of the power windows,
select “Yes”.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
WARNING
Cautions during setting up the dis-
play
As the engine needs to be running dur-
ing setting up the display, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with ade-
quate ventilation. In a closed area such as
a garage, exhaust gases including harm-
ful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that
the engine is running while setting up the
display features.
Suggestion function
101
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
*
:If equipped
Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is
actually displayed by the head-up display.
Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:
Route guidance to destination
•Street name
Compass (heading-up display)
Driving support system display area (P.104)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped) (P.307)
Outside temperature display area
Driving information display area
Displays the following items:
Speedometer
Head-up display*
The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the
operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
102
2-1. Instrument cluster
Shift position/shift range/gear position (P.219)
Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator display area (P.105)
HUD (Head-up display) switch
Head-up display will operate when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
When using the head-up display
The head-up display may seem dark or hard
to see when viewed through sunglasses,
especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the
brightness of the head-up display or
remove your sunglasses.
Street name display
Only street names which are included in the
map data will be displayed.
Outside temperature display
When the ambient temperature is
approximately 3°C (37°F) or lower, the
low outside temperature indicator will
flash for approximately 10 seconds and
the outside temperature display will turn
off. In this case, the display will be dis-
played again when the outside tempera-
ture becomes approximately 5°C (41°F)
or higher.
In the following situations, the correct
outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer
than normal to change:
When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 20 km/h [12 mph])
When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle
to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
F
G
WARNING
When using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness
of the head-up display image does not
interfere with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s position or
brightness may obstruct the driver’s
view and lead to an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
Do not continuously look at the
head-up display while driving as you
may fail to see pedestrians, objects on
the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Head-up display projector
Do not place any drinks near the
head-up display projector. If the pro-
jector gets wet, electrical malfunctions
may result.
Do not place anything on or put stick-
ers onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up dis-
play indications.
Do not touch the inside of the head-up
display projector or thrust sharp edges
or the like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical mal-
functions.
103
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
Enabling/disabling the head-up dis-
play
Press the HUD switch.
Changing settings of the head-up
display
The following settings can be changed
on of the multi-information display.
(P.546)
Brightness and vertical position of
the head-up display
Select to adjust the brightness or vertical
position of the head-up display.
Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator
Select to display the tachometer, Eco Driv-
ing Indicator or no content.
Display content
Select to enable/disable the following
items:
Route guidance to destination/street
name
Driving support system display
*
Compass (heading-up display)
Audio system operation status
*
: Make sure to enable this display when
using the driving support systems
Display angle
Select to adjust the angle of the head-up
display.
Enabling/disabling of the head-up dis-
play
If the head-up display is disabled, it will
remain disabled when the engine switch is
turned off then back to IGNITION ON
mode.
Display brightness
The brightness of the head-up display can
be adjusted on of the multi-information
display. Also, it is automatically adjusted
according to the ambient brightness.
Head-up display automatic position
adjustment
If the display position is recorded into mem-
ory, the head-up display will be automati-
cally adjusted to the desired position.
(P.177)
When the battery is disconnected
The customize settings of the head-up dis-
play will be reset.
Using the head-up display
WARNING
Caution for changing settings of the
head-up display
As the engine needs to be running while
changing the settings of the head-up dis-
play, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a
place with adequate ventilation. In a
closed area such as a garage, exhaust
gases including harmful carbon monox-
ide (CO) may collect and enter the vehi-
cle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
104
2-1. Instrument cluster
Displays the operational status of the
following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.297)
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
(P.311)
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that dis-
played on the multi-information display. For
details, refer to the explanation of each sys-
tem.
Pop-up displays for the following sys-
tems will be displayed when necessary.
Driving support systems
Displays a warning/suggestion/advice
message or the operating state of a rel-
evant system.
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if
equipped) (P.273, 285)
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if
equipped) (P.293)
Lexus parking assist-sensor
(P.351)
Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) (if equipped)
(P.367)
Brake Override System (P.208)
Drive-Start Control (P.213)
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that dis-
played on the multi-information display. For
details, refer to the explanation of each sys-
tem.
/ icons
These icons are linked to the
multi-information display
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning message is dis-
played on the multi-information display.
(P.515)
: Information icon
Displayed when a suggestion pop-up dis-
play (P.100) or advice pop-up display is
displayed on the multi-information display.
Warning message
Some warning messages are displayed
when necessary, according to certain
conditions.
Details of content displayed on the
head-up display may differ from that dis-
played on the multi-information display.
Audio system operation status
Displayed when an audio remote con-
trol switch on the steering wheel is
operated.
Hands-free system status
Displayed when the hands-free system
is operated.
NOTICE
When changing the settings of the
head-up display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that
the engine is running while the changing
the settings of the head-up display.
Driving support system display
area
Pop-up display
105
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
When a pop-up display is displayed
When a pop-up display is displayed, a cur-
rent display may no longer be displayed. In
this case, the display will return after the
pop-up display disappears.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolu-
tions per minute.
Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Eco driving ratio based on acceler-
ation
Zone of Eco driving
Displayed content is the same as that dis-
played on the multi-information display
(Eco Driving Indicator). For details, refer to
P.97.
Center Display
“MENU” button
Touchpad
Trip information
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the
Tachometer/Eco Driving Indica-
tor
A
B
C
Fuel consumption informa-
tion
Fuel consumption information can
be displayed on the Center Display.
The fuel consumption information
can be displayed and operated on
the side display.
System components
Consumption
A
B
C
106
2-1. Instrument cluster
menu screen.
If a screen other than “Trip information”
is displayed, select “Trip information”.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen.
Resetting the consumption data
Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes
Current fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed since the
engine was started.
Elapsed time since the engine was
started.
Cruising range
Average fuel consumption for the past
15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since
the engine switch was last turned to
IGNITION ON mode. Use the dis-
played average fuel consumption as a
reference.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
History
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the
menu screen.
If a screen other than “History” is dis-
played, select “History”.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen.
Best recorded fuel consumption
Latest fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption record
Resetting the history data
Updating the latest fuel consump-
tion data
The average fuel consumption history
is divided by color into past averages
and the average fuel consumption
since the last updated. Use the dis-
played average fuel consumption as a
reference.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption by
selecting “Update” to measure the current
fuel consumption again.
Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted
by selecting “Clear”.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance
that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
107
2
2-1. Instrument cluster
Vehicle status information and indicators
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your
average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.
Display the vehicle information on the
side display (P.397), and then select
or to display the desired
screen.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Trip information (type A)
Displays the average fuel consumption
for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute
intervals, as well as the cruising range.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
Trip information (type B)
Displays the cruising range, latest fuel
consumption and the amount of time
elapsed since the engine was started.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
History
Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
Using the side display
108
2-1. Instrument cluster
3
109
3
Before driving
Before driving
.
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................. 110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors and trunk
Doors ............................................... 114
Trunk ................................................ 119
Smart entry & start system..... 126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats..................................... 165
Power rear seat .......................... 172
Driving position memory ........ 177
Rear seat position memory..... 181
Head restraints............................182
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel ............................185
Inside rear view mirror.............186
Digital Rearview Mirror ..........187
Outside rear view mirrors...... 195
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows ..........................198
Moon roof ..................................... 201
110
3-1. Key information
3-1.Key informat ion
The following keys are provided with
the vehicle.
Electronic keys
Operating the smart entry & start sys-
tem (P.126)
Operating the wireless remote control
function (P.112)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Card key (electronic key) (if
equipped)
Operating the smart entry & start system
(P.126)
Card key (if equipped)
The card key is not waterproof.
The mechanical key that is stored inside
the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the card
key does not operate properly.
If it is difficult to take out the mechanical
key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to
pull it out, use a coin etc.
To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it while pressing the lock
release button.
If the battery cover is not installed and the
battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, rein-
stall the battery with the positive terminal
facing the Lexus emblem.
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an
aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside
the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that
the buttons are not likely to be pressed acci-
dentally. Pressing a button may cause the
electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the air-
craft.
Electronic key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
(The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
If the battery becomes low, an alarm will
sound in the cabin and a message will be
Keys
The keys
A
B
C
D
111
3
3-1. Key information
Before driving
shown on the multi-information display
when the engine is stopped.
To reduce key battery depletion when the
electronic key is to not be used for long
periods of time, set the electronic key to
the battery-saving mode. (P.127)
As the electronic key always receives
radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not
used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when nec-
essary.
The smart entry & start system or the
wireless remote control does not oper-
ate.
The detection area becomes smaller.
The LED indicator on the key surface
does not turn on.
To avoid serious deterioration, do not
leave the electronic key within 1 m (3 ft.)
of the following electrical appliances that
produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and
battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless
phones
Table lamps
Induction cookers
Replacing the battery
P.490
Confirmation of the number of regis-
tered keys
The number of keys already registered to
the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer for
details.
If “A New Key has been Registered
Contact Your Dealer for Details” is
shown on the multi-information display
This message will be displayed each time
the driver’s door is opened when the doors
are unlocked from the outside for approxi-
mately 10 days after a new electronic key
has been registered.
If this message is displayed but you have not
had a new electronic key registered, ask
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
to check if an unknown electronic key
(other than those in your possession) has
been registered.
NOTICE
To prevent key damage
Do not drop the keys, subject them to
strong shocks or bend them.
Do not expose the keys to high tem-
peratures for a long period of time.
Do not get the keys wet or wash them
in an ultrasonic washer etc.
Do not attach metallic or magnetic
materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
Do not disassemble the keys.
Do not attach a sticker or anything else
to the surface of the electronic key.
Do not place the keys near objects that
produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and induction cookers,
or medical electrical equipment, such
as low-frequency therapy equipment.
Carrying the electronic key on your
person
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.)
or more away from electric appliances
that are turned on. Radio waves emitted
from electric appliances within 10 cm
(3.9 in.) of the electronic key may inter-
fere with the key, causing the key to not
function properly.
In case of a smart entry & start system
malfunction or other key-related
problems
P.521
When an electronic key is lost
P.520
112
3-1. Key information
The electronic keys are equipped with
the following wireless remote control:
Locks the doors (P.114)
Closes the windows and moon
roof
*
(P.114)
Unlocks the doors (P.114)
Opens the windows and moon
roof
*
(P.114)
Opens the trunk (P.121)
*
: These settings must be customized at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in
one direction, as the key only has grooves
on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in
a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in
the electronic key. Carry the mechanical
key together with the electronic key. If the
electronic key battery is depleted or the
NOTICE
Handling the card key (if equipped)
Do not apply excess force when insert-
ing the mechanical key into the card
key. Doing so may damage the card
key.
If the battery or card key terminals get
wet, the battery may corrode and the
card key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if
drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover
and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp
and pull it.) If the battery is corroded,
have any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer replace the battery.
Do not crush the battery cover or use
a screwdriver to remove the battery
cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover
may bend or damage the key.
If the battery cover is frequently
removed, the battery cover may
become loose.
When installing the battery, make sure
to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong
direction may cause the battery to
deplete rapidly.
The surface of the card key may be
damaged, or its coating may peel off in
the following situations:
The card key is carried together with
hard objects, such as coins and keys.
The card key is scraped with a sharp
object, such as the tip of a mechanical
pencil.
The surface of the card key is wiped
with thinner or benzene.
Wireless remote control
Using the mechanical key
A
B
C
D
E
113
3
3-1. Key information
Before driving
entry function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P.521)
When required to leave the vehicle’s
key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off
(P.125) and lock the glove box (P.425)
as circumstances demand.
Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the elec-
tronic key only.
If you lose your mechanical keys
P.520
If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated
from the internal mechanism.
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3-2.Opening, closing and locking t he doors and trunk
Smart entry & start system
Carry the electronic key to enable this
function.
1Grip the door handle to unlock the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back
of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 sec-
onds after the doors are locked.
*
: The door unlock settings can be
changed.
2Touch the lock sensor (indentation
on the upper part of the door han-
dle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
Wireless remote control
1Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
Press and hold to close the windows and
moon roof.
*
2Unlocks all the doors
Press and hold to open the windows and
moon roof.
*
*
: These settings must be customized at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry
function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
1Turn the engine switch off.
2Cancel the intrusion sensor and tilt sen-
sor of the alarm system to prevent unin-
tended triggering of the alarm while
changing the settings. (if equipped)
(P.78)
3When the indicator light on the key sur-
face is not on, press and hold or
for approximately 5 seconds
while pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an operation
is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release
the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 3.)
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
from the outside
115
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
To prevent unintended triggering of the
alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door
once after the settings have been changed.
(If a door is not opened within 30 seconds
after is pressed, the doors will be
locked again and the alarm will automati-
cally be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, imme-
diately stop the alarm. (P.77)
Impact detection door lock release sys-
tem
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a
strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the
type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
Operation signals
The emergency flashers flash to indicate
that the doors have been locked/unlocked.
(Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the win-
dows and moon roof are operating.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately
30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked,
the security feature automatically locks the
vehicle again.
When the doors cannot be locked by the
lock sensor on the upper part of the
door handle
When the doors cannot be locked even if
the lock sensor on the upper part of the
door handle is touched by a finger, touch
the lock sensor with the palm.
If you are wearing gloves, remove them.
Open door warning buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when
a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the
door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehi-
cle once more.
Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system.
(P.77)
Conditions affecting the operation of
the smart entry & start system or wire-
less remote control
P.127
If the smart entry & start system or the
wireless remote control does not oper-
ate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock
the doors. (P.521)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it
is depleted. (P.490)
If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked and unlocked
using the smart entry & start system or
wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the
doors using the mechanical key. (P.521)
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
Multi-information
display/Beep Unlocking function
Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Interior: Pings once
Holding the driver’s
door handle unlocks
only the driver’s
door.
Holding any of the
passenger door
handles unlocks all
the doors.
Exterior: Beeps
twice
Interior: Pings once
Holding a door han-
dle unlocks all the
doors.
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
(P.546)
Door lock switches (to
lock/unlock)
1Locks all the doors
2Unlocks all the doors
Inside lock buttons (to lock)
Push down the inside lock button to
lock the door.
WARNING
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while
driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door
opening and an occupant throwing out of
the vehicle, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Ensure that all doors are properly
closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the
doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors,
as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
Set the rear door child-protector locks
when children are seated in the rear
seats.
When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle
such as whether the vehicle is on an
incline, whether there is enough space
for a door to open and whether a strong
wind is blowing. When opening or clos-
ing the door, hold the door handle tightly
to prepare for any unpredictable move-
ment.
When using the wireless remote con-
trol and operating the power windows
or moon roof
Operate the power windows or the
moon roof after checking to make sure
that there is no possibility of any passen-
ger having any of their body parts caught
in the windows or the moon roof. Also, do
not allow children to operate the wireless
remote control. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get caught in
the power windows or the moon roof.
Vehicle height control precautions
(vehicles with electronically modu-
lated air suspension)
In the following situations, make sure to
check the safety of the area around the
vehicle, as the vehicle height may change
and part of someone’s body may be
caught in the vehicle, possibly causing
injury or the vehicle may be damaged.
When opening or closing a door
When locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
from the inside
117
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Inside door handles (to unlock)
For the front doors
Pull the handle to unlock and open the
door.
When the door is unlocked, the inside lock
button will pop up.
For the rear doors
Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull
the handle a second time to open the
door.
When the door is unlocked, the inside lock
button will pop up.
Locking the front doors from the outside
without a key
1Push down the inside lock button.
2Close the door while pulling the door
handle.
The door cannot be locked if the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle. However, the key may not
be detected correctly and the door may be
locked.
Door closer
In the event that a door is left slightly open,
the door closer will automatically close it to
the fully closed position.
The door closer will operate regardless
of the engine switch mode.
The door closer will not function if the
door has been closed while pulling the
inside or outside door handle.
The door can be opened by pulling the
inside or outside door handle, even when
the door closer is operating (except
when the lock button is in the lock posi-
tion or the child-protector lock is set).
A motor sound may be heard for several
seconds after the door closer closes the
door. This does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Open door warning buzzer
If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a
buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed
reaches 5 km/h (3 mph).
The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on
the multi-information display.
WARNING
Door closer
In the event that a door is left slightly
open, the door closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the door
easy closer begins to operate.
If the child-protector lock is set, the door
closer will not stop during operation even
if an attempt is made to open the door
from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else in the door.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury.
NOTICE
To prevent door closer malfunction
Do not frequently repeat opening and
closing of doors, or apply excessive force
to a door while the door closer is operat-
ing.
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
1Unlock
2Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children
from opening the rear doors. Push down
on each rear door switch to lock both rear
doors.
The following functions can be set or
canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to
P.546.
Rear door child-protector lock
Automatic door locking and
unlocking systems
Function Operation
Speed linked
door locking
function
All doors are automati-
cally locked when vehi-
cle speed is
approximately 20
km/h (12 mph) or
higher.
Shift position
linked door lock-
ing function
All doors are automati-
cally locked when the
shift position is shifted
to a position other than
P.
Shift position
linked door
unlocking func-
tion
All doors are automati-
cally unlocked when
the shift position is
shifted to P.
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking func-
tion
All doors are automati-
cally unlocked when
driver’s door is opened
within approximately
45 seconds after turn-
ing the engine switch
off.
Function Operation
119
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the
trunk opener switch, entry function
or wireless remote control.
The trunk can be closed using the
trunk closer.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Before driving
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
closed. If the trunk lid is not fully
closed, it may open unexpectedly
while driving and hit near-by objects or
luggage in the trunk may be thrown
out, causing an accident.
Do not allow children to play in the
trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the
trunk, they could suffer from heat
exhaustion, suffocation or other inju-
ries.
Do not allow a child to open or close
the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to
open unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be
caught by the closing trunk lid.
Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the
event of sudden braking or a collision,
they are susceptible to death or serious
injury.
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the
body to be caught, resulting in serious
injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow
and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause
the trunk lid to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
When opening or closing the trunk lid,
thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure
they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing
the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the trunk lid on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the trunk lid is fully open and
secure before using the trunk.
When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the trunk handle is used to fully close
the trunk lid, it may result in hands or
arms being caught.
Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk
lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut
again after it is opened.
Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the trunk
easy closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in
the trunk lid, as this may cause bone frac-
tures or other serious injuries.
Power trunk lid
Observe the following precautions when
operating the power trunk lid.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
Check the safety of the surrounding
area to make sure there are no obsta-
cles or anything that could cause any
of your belongings to get caught.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure
they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
If the trunk closer switch is pressed
while the trunk lid is opening during
automatic operation, the trunk lid
stops opening. Take extra care when
on an incline, as the trunk lid may open
or close suddenly.
On an incline, the trunk lid may sud-
denly shut after it opens automatically.
Make sure the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
In the following situations, the power
trunk lid may detect an abnormality
and automatic operation may be
stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has
to be operated manually. Take extra
care in this situation, as the stopped
trunk lid may suddenly shut, causing an
accident.
When the trunk lid contacts an obsta-
cle
When the battery voltage suddenly
drops, such as when the engine switch
is turned to IGNITION ON mode or
the engine is started during automatic
operation
Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk
lid. The power trunk lid may not oper-
ate, causing itself to malfunction, or the
trunk lid may suddenly shut again after
it is opened.
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if
equipped)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust
pipes to become quite hot. When
operating the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust
pipe.
Do not operate the Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid if there is little space under
the rear bumper.
121
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk opener switch
Press the trunk opener switch.
The trunk lid will fully open.
Smart entry & start system
While carrying the electronic key,
press the button.
The trunk lid will fully open.
If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is
opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.
When all the doors are unlocked using
one of the following methods, the trunk
can be opened without the electronic
key:
Entry function
Wireless remote control
Door lock switches
Automatic door unlocking system
Mechanical key
Wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
The trunk lid will fully open.
If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is
WARNING
Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
The jam protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the trunk lid fully closes. Be
careful not to catch fingers or anything
else in the trunk lid.
The jam protection function may not
work depending on the shape of the
object that is caught. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
To prevent trunk easy closer malfunc-
tions
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while
the trunk easy closer is operating.
To prevent damage to the power
trunk lid
Make sure that there is no luggage or
snow on the trunk lid before operating
the power trunk lid. In addition, make
sure that there is no ice between the
trunk lid and frame that prevents
movement of the trunk lid. Operating
the power trunk lid when excessive
load is present on the trunk lid may
cause a malfunction.
Do not apply excessive force to the
trunk lid while the power trunk lid is
operating.
Opening/closing the trunk
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if
equipped)
1While carrying an electronic key,
stand within the smart entry & start
system operation area, approxi-
mately 30 to 50 cm (11.8 to 19.7
in.) from the rear bumper.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid opera-
tion detection area
Smart entry & start system opera-
tion detection area (P.126)
2Perform a kick operation by mov-
ing your foot to within approxi-
mately 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the rear
bumper and then pulling it back.
Perform the entire kick operation
within 1 second.
The trunk lid will not start operating
while a foot is detected under the
rear bumper.
Operate the Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid without contacting the
rear bumper with your foot.
If another electronic key is in the
cabin or trunk, it may take slightly
longer than normal for the opera-
tion to begin.
Kick sensor
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid opera-
tion detection area
3When the kick sensor detects that
your foot is pulled back, a buzzer
will sound and the trunk will auto-
matically fully open/close.
If a foot is moved under the rear bumper
while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid
will stop moving.
If a foot is moved under the rear bumper
while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid
will open.
A
B
C
A
B
123
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk closer switch
Press the trunk closer switch.
A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will
fully close.
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is
closing opens the trunk lid again.
Trunk grip
Using the trunk grip, pull down the
trunk lid without applying sideways
force and push the trunk lid down from
the outside to close it.
Trunk lid light/trunk light
The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on
when the trunk is opened.
If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on
when the engine switch is turned off, the
light will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position.
The trunk easy closer will operate
regardless of the engine switch mode.
If the trunk easy closer does not operate,
open the trunk to the half open position
or more and then close it.
Function to prevent the trunk being
locked with the electronic key inside
When all doors are locked, closing the
trunk lid with the electronic key left inside
the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened
pressing the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
If the spare electronic key is put in the
trunk with all the doors locked, the key
confinement prevention function is acti-
vated so the trunk can be opened. In
order to prevent theft, take all electronic
keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
If the electronic key is put in the trunk with
all the doors locked, the key may not be
detected depending on the location of
the key and the surrounding radio wave
conditions. In this case, the key confine-
ment prevention function cannot be acti-
vated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk is closed. Make sure to check
where the key is before closing the trunk.
The key confinement prevention function
cannot be activated if any one of the
doors is unlocked. In this case, open the
trunk using the trunk opener.
Overload protection function
The trunk lid will not operate when exces-
sive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
Fall-down protection function
While the trunk lid is opening automatically,
applying excessive force to it will stop the
opening operation to prevent the trunk lid
from rapidly falling down.
Jam protection function
While the trunk lid is closing automatically,
the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the
mechanical key. (P.522)
If the trunk is unlocked using the mechani-
cal key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy
closer will not be operational. To return
them to an operational state, fully close the
trunk lid by hand.
If the smart entry & start system or the
wireless remote control does not oper-
ate properly
Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk.
(P.522)
Replace the key battery with a new one if it
is depleted.
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating
conditions (if equipped)
When the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid
(kick sensor) operation setting is turned
on and the engine switch is turned off
When an electronic key is carried within
the operation range
Situations in which the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may not operate prop-
erly (if equipped)
In the following situations, the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly:
When a foot remains under the rear
bumper
If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a
foot or is touched for a while
If the rear bumper has been touched for a
while, wait for a short time before
attempting to operate the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid again.
When standing excessively close to the
rear bumper
When an external radio wave source
interferes with the communication
between the electronic key and the vehi-
cle (P.127)
When the vehicle is parked near an elec-
trical noise source which affects the sen-
sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,
such as a pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluorescent
light
When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that gen-
erates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to
the rear bumper
When the vehicle has been parked for a
while near objects that may move and
contact the rear bumper, such as plants
When an accessory is installed to the rear
bumper
If an accessory has been installed, turn the
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor)
operation setting off.
Preventing unintentional operation of
the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if
equipped)
When an electronic key is in the operation
detection area, the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid may operate unintentionally, so be care-
ful in the following situations:
When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper
When a small animal or small object, such
as a ball, moves under the rear bumper
When an object is moved from under the
rear bumper
If someone is swinging their legs while sit-
ting on the rear bumper
If the legs or another part of someone’s
body contacts the rear bumper while
passing by the vehicle
When the vehicle is parked near an elec-
trical noise source which affects the sen-
sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,
such as a pay parking spot, gas station,
electrically heated road, or fluorescent
light
When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
125
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
display, airport or other facility that gen-
erates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
When the vehicle is parked in a place
where objects such as plants are near the
rear bumper
If luggage, etc. is set near the rear
bumper
If accessories or a vehicle cover is
installed/removed near the rear bumper
When the vehicle is being towed
To prevent unintentional operation, turn the
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor)
operation setting off.
Open door warning buzzer
P.117
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
The trunk opener switch can be tem-
porarily disabled to protect luggage
stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove box
off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even with
the wireless remote control, entry function
or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.
When leaving a key to the vehicle with a
parking attendant
P.113
Luggage security system
A
B
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the trunk
Antenna outside the trunk
Effective range (areas within which the
electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.)
of an outside door handle. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.)
of the trunk release button.
When starting the engine or changing
engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is inside the vehicle.
Alarms and warning messages
An alarm sounds and warning messages
are displayed on the multi-information dis-
play to protect against unexpected acci-
dents or theft of the vehicle resulting from
erroneous operation. When a warning mes-
sage is displayed, take appropriate meas-
ures based on the displayed message.
(P.515)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances
and correction procedures are as follows.
When an exterior alarm sounds once for
5 seconds
Smart entry & start system
The following operations can be
performed simply by carrying the
electronic key (including the card
key) on your person, for example in
your pocket. The driver should
always carry the electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the doors
(P.114)
Opens the trunk (P.121)
Starts the engine (P.216)
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
127
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
When an interior alarm sounds continu-
ously
IfKey Detected in Vehicle” is shown on
the multi-information display
An attempt was made to lock the doors
using the smart entry & start system while
the electronic key was still inside the vehi-
cle. Retrieve the electronic key from the
vehicle and lock the doors again.
Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be acti-
vated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the battery from being dis-
charged while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time.
In the following situations, the smart entry
& start system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
The electronic key has been left in an
area of approximately 2 m (6 ft.) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or
longer.
The smart entry & start system has not
been used for 5 days or longer.
If the smart entry & start system has not
been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any doors
except the driver’s door. In this case, take
hold of the driver’s door handle, or use
the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
Turning an electronic key to bat-
tery-saving mode
When battery-saving mode is set, battery
depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-
tronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indica-
tor flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart entry & start system cannot be used.
To cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
Conditions affecting operation
The smart entry & start system uses weak
radio waves. In the following situations, the
communication between the electronic key
and the vehicle may be affected, preventing
the smart entry & start system, wireless
remote control and engine immobilizer sys-
tem from operating properly. (Ways of cop-
ing: P.521)
When the electronic key battery is
depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
gas station, radio station, large display,
Situation Correction
procedure
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the
doors and lock
the doors
again.
The trunk was closed
while the electronic key
was still inside the trunk
and all the doors were
locked.
Retrieve the
electronic key
from the trunk
and close the
trunk lid.
Situation Correction
procedure
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (The
driver’s door was opened
when the engine switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode).
Turn the engine
switch off and
close the
driver’s door.
The engine switch was
turned off while the
driver’s door was open.
Close the
driver’s door.
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
airport or other facility that generates
strong radio waves or electrical noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular
phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
When the electronic key is in contact
with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil
inside
Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
Hand warmers made of metal
Media such as CDs and DVDs
When other wireless keys (that emit radio
waves) are being used nearby
When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
Another vehicle’s electronic key or a
wireless key that emits radio waves
Personal computers or personal digital
assistants (PDAs)
Digital audio players
Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or
metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
When the electronic key is placed near a
battery charger or electronic devices
When the vehicle is parked in a pay park-
ing spot where radio waves are emitted.
Note for the entry function
Even when the electronic key is within the
effective range (detection areas), the sys-
tem may not operate properly in the fol-
lowing cases:
The electronic key is too close to the win-
dow or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors
are locked or unlocked.
The electronic key is near the ground or
in a high place, or too close to the center
of the rear bumper when the trunk is
opened.
The electronic key is on the instrument
panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the
engine is started or engine switch modes
are changed.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of
the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle.
Depending on the radio wave reception
conditions, it may be detected by the
antenna outside the cabin and the doors
will become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic key
inside the vehicle.
As long as the electronic key is within the
effective range, the doors may be locked
or unlocked by anyone. However, only
the doors detecting the electronic key
can be used to unlock the vehicle.
Even if the electronic key is not inside the
vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the
window.
The doors may unlock or lock if a large
amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car
wash, when the electronic key is within
the effective range. (The doors will auto-
matically be locked after approximately
30 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
If the wireless remote control is used to
lock the doors when the electronic key is
near the vehicle, there is a possibility that
the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
Touching the door lock sensor while
wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation.
If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, follow the follow-
ing correction procedures to wash the
vehicle:
Place the electronic key in a location 2 m
(6 ft.) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not
stolen.)
Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart entry & start
system. (P.127)
129
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle
and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on
the multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To
turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if
it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,
etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again.
A sudden approach to the effective
range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case,
return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock
before pulling the door handle again.
If there is another electronic key in the
detection area, it may take slightly longer
to unlock the doors after the door handle
is gripped.
When the vehicle is not driven for
extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not
leave the electronic key within 2 m (6 ft.)
of the vehicle.
The smart entry & start system can be
deactivated in advance.
Setting the electronic key to battery-sav-
ing mode helps to reduce key battery
depletion. (P.127)
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key
when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle
when operating the system from the out-
side of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding
condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system
may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock pre-
vention function may not operate.)
Do not leave the electronic key inside the
trunk.
The key confinement prevention function
may not operate, depending on the loca-
tion of the key (the inside edge of the
trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag,
close to metallic objects) and the radio
waves in the surrounding area. (P.123)
If the smart entry & start system does
not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and
trunk: P.521
Starting the engine: P.523
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
If the smart entry & start system has
been deactivated in a customized set-
ting
Locking and unlocking the doors and
opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P.114, 121, 521)
Starting the engine and changing engine
switch modes: P.523
Stopping the engine: P.217
130
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Certification for the smart entry & start system
131
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
133
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
134
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
135
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
136
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
137
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
138
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
139
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
140
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
141
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
142
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
143
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
144
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
145
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
146
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
147
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
148
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
149
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
150
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
151
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
152
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
153
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
154
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
155
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
156
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
157
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
158
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
159
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
160
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
161
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
162
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
163
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
164
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
Caution regarding interference with
electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the smart
entry & start system antennas.
(P.126)
The radio waves may affect the opera-
tion of such devices. If necessary, the
entry function can be disabled. Ask
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details, such as the fre-
quency of radio waves and timing of
the emitted radio waves. Then, consult
your doctor to see if you should disa-
ble the entry function.
Users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medi-
cal devices.
Ask any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details on disabling the entry
function.
165
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
3-3.Adjusting the seats
Seat adjustment switches
Seat position adjustment
Seatback angle adjustment
Head restraint height adjustment (if
equipped) (P.182)
Front seats
WARNING
When adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat
position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving
seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat
or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.
Make sure to leave enough space
around the feet so they do not get
stuck.
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap
belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may
slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while
driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Operating the front passenger’s seat
from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Do not operate the front passenger’s seat
when a passenger is seated in it. In addi-
tion, do not let anyone sit down in the
front passenger’s seat while the seat is
being operated or when the head
restraint is being folded. The front pas-
senger may catch their legs between the
instrument panel and seat, or the head
restraint may interfere with their head,
resulting in injury.
When the front passenger’s seat is
folded forward
If the outside rear view mirror is difficult
to see, due to the position of the front
passenger’s seat, move the front passen-
ger’s seat to an appropriate position.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the
vehicle and cause an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Operating the front passenger’s seat
from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Before operating the front passenger’s
seat, make sure that there is no luggage
or any other objects on the seat or in the
footwell that could prevent its operation.
Such items may result in excess force
being applied, causing damage to the
seat and/or the luggage.
Adjustment procedure
A
B
C
166
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-
ment
Vertical height adjustment
Lumbar support adjustment
Seat cushion length adjustment (if
equipped)
Center Display
1Press the seat switch.
2Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver seat adjustment” or
“Passenger seat adjustment”.
3Select the button for the desired
adjustment.
Head restraint adjustment (if
equipped) (P.182)
Shoulder bolster adjustment (if
equipped)
Lumbar support adjustment
Pelvic support adjustment
Seatback side bolster adjustment (if
equipped)
Seat cushion side bolster adjust-
ment (if equipped)
Hip support adjustment (if
equipped)
4Perform adjustment using the dis-
played buttons.
The seat will move while a button is
selected.
When adjusting the front seats
While adjusting a front seat, to avoid con-
tact with the ceiling, instrument panel or
rear seats, the operation of the seat may be
restricted or parts of the seat other than that
being adjusted may move.
Operation after the engine switch is
turned off
After a certain time elapses after the engine
switch is turned off, the following parts of
the front seats will move to their neutral
positions.
Shoulder bolster (if equipped)
Lumbar support
Pelvic support
Seatback side bolster (if equipped)
Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped)
Hip support (if equipped)
Automatic angle adjustment of the rear
displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the
rear display will be adjusted automatically
to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the
rear display from the rear seat.
Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-
ger seats (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A or Lexus Safety System +)
P.274, 286
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
167
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
(P.546)
Using the driver’s seat adjustment
switches to adjust the front passen-
ger’s seat (front passenger mode)
The mode of the driver’s seat adjust-
ment switches can be changed to
adjust the front passenger’s seat.
1Press the mode change button on
the driver’s side door.
The indicator will illuminate when front
passenger mode is selected.
2Using the seat adjustment switches
on the driver’s seat, adjust the front
passenger’s seat.
To cancel front passenger mode, press the
mode change button again.
Front passenger mode will be canceled
automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are not operated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
Using the Center Display (vehicles
with a foldable head restraint)
1Press the seat switch.
2Select the button for the desired
operation.
“Full front” of “Passenger”: Move the
front passenger’s seat forward and folds
the seatback and head restraint.
“Return” of “Passenger”: Move the
front passenger’s seat rearward and the
seatback and head restraint to the upright
position.
If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s
seat is not in the upright position, it will
move to the upright position before the
front passenger’s seat moves to its upright
position.
Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment
system: If the front passenger’s seat is
moved to the upright position and then
is selected again, the front passenger’s seat
will move rearward.
To stop the front passenger's seat while
it is moving, select the or pas-
senger’s seat operation button or press
the seat switch.
Operating the foldable head restraint
using the driver’s seat adjustment
switches in front passenger mode (if
equipped)
When the front passenger’s seatback
angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat
Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the driver’s seat
A
168
3-3. Adjusting the seats
adjustment switches in front passenger
mode, the front passenger’s head
restraint will operate automatically as fol-
lows:
When the front passenger’s seatback is
moved forward to the upright position,
the head restraint will lower and fold for-
ward when the seatback angle adjust-
ment switch is released.
When the front passenger’s seatback is
moved backward to the upright position,
the head restraint will move to the upright
position when the seatback angle adjust-
ment switch is released.
If any of the following conditions are met,
the front passenger’s head restraint will
not fold forward even though the front
passenger’s seatback angle is being
adjusted using the driver’s seat adjust-
ment switches in front passenger mode:
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front pas-
senger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the engine switch is turned off.
Vehicles without a rear seat entertain-
ment system:The front passenger’s seat is
in the rear most position.
The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-
tened.
The front passenger’s door is open. (The
front seat will not move forward.)
The front passenger’s seat is not in the
lowest position.
The front passenger’s seat seat cushion
(front) is not in the lowest position.
The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is
extended (if equipped).
If either of the following conditions is met,
the front passenger’s head restraint will
not return to the upright position even
though the front passenger’s seatback
angle is being adjusted using the driver’s
seat adjustment switches in front passen-
ger mode:
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
The front passenger’s seat position is
moved to a position forward of the neu-
tral position.
Operating the foldable head restraint
using the front passenger’s seat adjust-
ment switches (if equipped)
When the front passenger’s head restraint is
folded forward and the front passenger’s
door is open, if the front passenger’s seat
adjustment switches are used to move the
seat backward or recline the seatback, the
head restraint will move to the upright posi-
tion automatically when the switch is
released.
To stop the operation of the front passen-
ger’s head restraint part-way, perform any
of the following operations:
Operate any front passenger’s seat
adjustment switch.
The head restraint will stop when the seat
position adjustment switch or seatback
angle adjustment switch is operated to
move the seat backward or recline the
seatback, and will resume operating when
the switch is released.
Press the “SET” button.
Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button.
Press the seat switch.
Operation of the front passenger’s seat
using the Center Display will be
canceled when (vehicles with a foldable
head restraint)
In the following situations, the front passen-
ger’s seat cannot be operated using the
Center Display:
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front pas-
senger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the engine switch is turned off.
The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-
169
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
tened.
The front passenger’s door is open. (The
front seat will not move forward.)
When the front passenger’s seat is
folded forward
By reclining the front passenger’s seat
seatback, the forward view of the rear pas-
senger can be improved.
1Press and hold to move the front
passenger’s seat forward and fold
the seatback forward.
2Press and hold to move the front
passenger’s seat backward and
move the seatback to the upright
position.
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Passenger”.
3Touch the button for the desired
operation.
When the operating conditions are not
met, the buttons will be grayed out.
Move the front passenger’s seat
forward and fold the seatback for-
ward.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also fold forward.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, touch “STOP”.
Move the front passenger’s seat
backward and the seatback to the
upright position.
If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s
seat is not in the upright position, it will
move to the upright position before the
front passenger’s seat moves to its previous
position.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,
the head restraint will also move to the
upright position.
Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment
system: If the front passenger’s seat is
moved to the upright position and then
is selected again, the front passenger’s seat
will move rearward.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, touch “STOP”.
Move the front passenger’s seat
forward or backward
The seat will move while a button is
Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the rear seat (vehicles
without power rear seat)
Operating the front passenger’s
seat from the rear seat (vehicles
with power rear seat)
A
B
B
C
170
3-3. Adjusting the seats
touched and held.
Adjust the angle of the front pas-
senger’s seat seatback
*
The seatback will move while a button is
touched and held.
*
: Vehicles with a foldable head restraint
Operating the front passenger’s seat
from the rear seat
In the following situations, the front pas-
senger’s seat cannot be operated using
the Rear Multi Operation Panel:
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY
mode or off.
*
The rear seat belt is not fastened and
weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front pas-
senger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the engine switch is turned off.
The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-
tened.
The front passenger’s door is open. (The
front seat will not move forward.)
*
: Vehicles with foldable head restraint:
Even when the engine switch is in
ACCESSORY mode or off, the front
passenger seat position and seatback
angle can be adjusted.
If the rear armrest is stowed while the
seat position is being adjusted, the opera-
tion will stop.
Canceling an operation
To cancel an operation, press and hold the
button of the Rear Multi Opera-
tion Panel or press it 3 times in quick suc-
cession.
When the front passenger’s seat is
folded forward
P.169
Pneumatic chambers built into the
front seat apply pressure to the occu-
pant’s body at different modes and
intensities.
1Press the seat switch.
2Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver seat refresh” or “Pas-
senger seat refresh”.
3Select the desired mode.
“Centripetal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the
front of the seat cushion to top of the
seatback
“Centrifugal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the top
of the seatback to the front of the seat
cushion
“Upper body”
D
Front seat refresh system (if
equipped)
171
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-
tom to the top of the seatback
“Lower body”
Applies pressure sequentially from the
front to the back of the seat cushion
“Lumbar”
Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-
tom to the top of the lumbar area of the
seatback
4Select the desired intensity and
then confirm the setting.
The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
To stop the operation select “Stop”.
If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the
front seat refresh system for that seat.
Refresh system
Operating conditions
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The temperature in the cabin is not
extremely high.
For the front passenger’s seat: The weight
of an occupant is detected on the front
passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s
seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the engine switch is turned off.
Automatic stop function
The operation will be canceled automati-
cally after approximately 15 minutes.
•If the power easy access system begins
operating, the front seat refresh system
will stop.
WARNING
Important points while driving
Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh
system while driving.
Using it may affect your ability to control
the vehicle, possibly leading to an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
Using the refresh system
Those who are pregnant, have recently
given birth, or suffer from ailments
requiring rest (heart disease etc.)
should consult a doctor before use.
Do not allow children to use the
refresh function.
Do not use immediately after consum-
ing a meal or alcohol, or for an
extended period of time.
If you feel sick while using the refresh
function, immediately discontinue use.
172
3-3. Adjusting the seats
*
:If equipped
Automatic operation
The seat can be moved to preset posi-
tions.
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3Touch the desired preset button.
When the operating conditions are not
Power rear seat*
WARNING
When adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat
position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving
seat.
When adjusting the rear seat with an
ottoman, make sure there is sufficient
space so that a foot does not get
caught between the ottoman and front
passenger seat. (If equipped)
Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment
system: When the rear seat is moving
to the Entertainment Mode position,
do not allow hands near the rear dis-
play. Otherwise, a hand or finger may
be caught, possibly causing injury.
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap
belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may
slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while
driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Using the ottoman (if equipped)
Do not sit on the ottoman.
If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat
belt cannot be fitted properly, and they
may be thrown from the seat, resulting in
death or serious injury in the event of an
accident or sudden braking.
When getting in or out of the vehicle,
retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is
not retracted, it may cause a fall, result-
ing in injury.
Do not operate the ottoman when the
vehicle is moving.
Do not allow anyone to put their hands
or feet under the rear seat when stow-
ing the ottoman.
NOTICE
To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if
equipped)
Do not place any objects in the rear
seat footwell that could prevent the
operation of the ottoman.
Do not place heavy luggage on the
ottoman.
Do not place any objects under the
ottoman while it is raised for use. These
objects may interfere with the ottoman
being folded, causing damage to the
ottoman or the objects themselves.
To prevent a rear display malfunction
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to move the rear display
by hand, as doing so may damage the
rear display.
Adjustment procedure
173
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
met, the preset buttons will be grayed out.
/ : Moves the rear seat
to the upright position (Business
Mode)
/ : Moves the rear seat
with an ottoman to a slightly reclined
position (Entertainment Mode) (if
equipped)
Vehicles without a rear seat entertainment
system: Moves the front passenger’s seat
forward.
Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment
system: Moves the front passenger’s seat
and rear display to allow the rear display to
be comfortably viewed.
: Moves the rear seat with an
ottoman to a deeply reclined position
(Relaxation Mode) (if equipped)
Moves the front passenger’s seat forward
and folds the seatback and head restraint
forward.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is
moving, touch “STOP”.
Manual operation
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3Touch the button for the desired
adjustment.
Select the part you wish to adjust.
Adjust the position of the selected
part.
The part will move while a button is
touched.
Adjustment of the rear seat
When a rear seat is close to a front seat,
the operation of the rear seat may be
restricted.
If the rear armrest is stowed while the
seat position is being adjusted, the opera-
tion will stop.
Operating conditions of Business Mode
When the rear seat belt is not fastened and
weight is not detected on the rear seat,
Business Mode cannot be selected.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be
moved to Entertainment Mode/Relaxa-
tion Mode when (if equipped)
In the following situations, Entertainment
Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be
selected:
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY
A
B
174
3-3. Adjusting the seats
mode or off.
The rear seat belt is not fastened and
weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on the front pas-
senger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
front passenger’s door is opened then
closed or the engine switch is turned off.
The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-
tened.
The front passenger’s door is open.
When the front passenger’s seat is
folded forward
P.169
Automatic angle adjustment of the rear
displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the
rear display will be adjusted automatically
to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the
rear display from the rear seat.
Operation after the engine switch is
turned off
After a certain time elapses after the engine
switch is turned off, the following parts of
the rear seats will move to their neutral
positions.
Shoulder bolster
Lumbar/pelvic support
Canceling an operation
To cancel an operation, press and hold the
button of the Rear Multi Opera-
tion Panel or press it 3 times in quick suc-
cession.
Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-
ger seats (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A or Lexus Safety System +)
P.274, 286
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
1Press the seat switch.
2Select “Return” of “Rear”.
The rear seat will move to the upright posi-
tion.
Operation of the rear seats from the
front seats
In the following situations, the rear seats
cannot be operated from the front seats.
When the armrest is stowed and weight
of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is
detected on a rear seat
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
When the armrest is stowed and a rear
seat belt is fastened.
Returning the rear seat from the
front seats
175
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
The rear seat relaxation system utilizes
pneumatic chambers and dedicated
heaters, and applies pressure to the
occupant’s body at different modes
and intensities.
To display the rear seat relaxation sys-
tem screen, display the home screen
on the Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Relaxa-
tion”.
Touch to select the desired rear
seat.
Touch to select the desired mode.
When a button is touched, operation will
begin.
Touch to adjust the intensity.
The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
Touch to turn the spot heaters
on/off.
Touch to stop the operation.
If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the
rear seat relaxation system for that seat.
Relaxation system
Operating conditions
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The temperature in the cabin is not
extremely high.
The weight of an occupant is detected on
the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-
tened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
Automatic stop function
The operation will be canceled automati-
cally after approximately 15 minutes.
If the door for a seat that the relaxation
system is currently being used is opened,
the relaxation system will stop operating.
The following functions will cause the
WARNING
When returning the rear seats to the
neutral position
To avoid injuring the rear passengers,
wait until they have gotten out of the
vehicle before operating the switch.
Rear seat relaxation system (if
equipped)
A
B
C
D
WARNING
Using the relaxation system
Those who are pregnant, have recently
given birth, or suffer from ailments
requiring rest (heart disease etc.)
should consult a doctor before use.
Do not allow children to use the relax-
ation function.
Do not use immediately after consum-
ing a meal or alcohol, or for an
extended period of time.
If you feel sick while using the relaxa-
tion function, immediately discontinue
use.
Automatic Seat Operation
E
176
3-3. Adjusting the seats
rear seats to move automatically.
Seat return function linked to the
door opening operation
The rear seat will return to the upright
position automatically when the rear
door is opened for easier entry and exit
of the vehicle.
For the rear seat with an ottoman (if
equipped): When the rear door on the
side with the rear seat with an ottoman
is opened, the seatback of the rear seat
with an ottoman will move to a more
upright position. The seatback will
move to the upright position after the
door is closed and the system deter-
mines that the rear passenger has
exited.
However, if the armrest is stowed, the
rear seat will not move.
Shift-linked rear seat reclining
function
When the shift position is shifted from
P, to enhance rear visibility for the
driver, the rear seats will recline slightly.
However, the shift-linked rear seat
reclining function will not operate in
the following situations:
The weight of an occupant or heavy
object, etc. is detected on a rear
seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until a rear
door is opened then closed or the engine
switch is turned off and the doors are
locked.
A rear seat belt is fastened.
A rear door is open.
The armrest is stowed.
When a front seat is close to a rear
seat, the rear seats may not operate or
the range of movement may be
restricted.
Changing automatic seat opera-
tion settings
The settings can be changed on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
(P.398)
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3Touch .
4Touch a button to change the set-
ting.
Rear right seat automatic operation
Rear right seatback movement
amount when door-linked rear seat
return function operates
*
Rear left seat automatic operation
*
: Vehicles with a rear seat with an ottoman
A
B
C
177
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
The seat and steering wheel are auto-
matically adjusted to allow the driver to
enter and exit the vehicle easily.
Driver’s seat
When all of the following have been
performed, the seat and steering
wheel are automatically adjusted to a
position that allows driver to enter and
exit the vehicle easily.
The shift position has been shifted to
P.
The engine switch has been turned
off.
The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(P.167), the seat and steering wheel will
not move.
On vehicles with adjustable seat cush-
ion side bolsters, when the driver’s
door is opened with the engine switch
off, the seat cushion side bolsters will
lower if they are in the default position.
When any of the following has been
performed, the seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their
original positions.
The engine switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY mode or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
The driver’s seat belt has been fas-
tened.
Front passenger’s seat
If all of the following have been per-
formed while the vehicle is stopped,
the lumbar support, pelvic support,
shoulder bolster (if equipped),
seatback side bolster (if equipped),
and hip support (if equipped) will be
moved to their default position. On
vehicles with adjustable seat cushion
side bolsters, the seat cushion side bol-
sters will lower.
The passenger’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
The front passenger’s door is
opened.
Driving position memory
This feature automatically adjusts
the positions of the front seats,
steering wheel, outside rear view
mirrors and head-up display (if
equipped) to make entering and
exiting the vehicle easier or to suit
your preferences.
Up to 3 different driving positions
can be recorded.
Each electronic key (including a
card key) can be registered to
recall your preferred driving posi-
tion.
Power easy access system
178
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Operation of the power easy access sys-
tem
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy
access system may not operate if the seat
is already in the rearmost or uppermost
position or close to the rear seat.
If the seat position is adjusted during
power easy access system operation, the
automatic operation will stop. (The seat
will change to manual operation.)
If the seat position is adjusted during or
after the power easy access system oper-
ation when the driver is exiting the vehi-
cle, the power easy access system will not
operate when entering the vehicle.
Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if
equipped)
If the seat cushion side bolsters have been
lowered, when the front door is closed, the
seat cushion side bolsters will move to their
default position.
If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion
side bolsters are moving to the default posi-
tion, their movement will be temporarily
suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters
will move to the default position after a cer-
tain amount of time.)
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2Check that the shift position is in P.
3Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
wheel, outside rear view mirrors
and head-up display (if equipped)
to the desired positions.
4While pressing the “SET” button, or
within 3 seconds after the “SET”
button is pressed, press button “1”,
“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already been
preset, the previously recorded position
will be overwritten.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(P.167), the position of the driver’s seat
cannot be registered.
To record the position of the front pas-
senger’s seat, adjust the front passen-
ger’s seat to the desired position and
perform step 4 using the buttons on
the front passenger’s side.
In order to correctly use the driving
position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest
possible position and the seat is operated in
the same direction, the recorded position
may be slightly different when it is recalled.
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Recording a driving position into
memory
WARNING
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that
the seat does not strike the rear passen-
ger or squeeze your body against the
steering wheel.
Recalling a driving position
179
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
2Check that the shift position is in P.
3Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
When the driver’s seat adjustment
switches are in front passenger mode
(P.167), a driving position cannot be
recalled.
To stop the position recall operation
part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
Press the “SET” button.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
Press the mode change button.
Operate any of the seat adjustment
switches (only cancels seat position
recall).
Operate the tilt and telescopic steering
control switch (only cancels steering
wheel position recall).
Recalling a driving position
If a driving position is recalled, the move-
ment of the front seat may be stopped part-
way if the seat moves close to the rear seat.
If a rear passenger is determined to be in
the vehicle, the rearward movement of the
front seat may be stopped partway to
ensure sufficient space for the rear passen-
ger.
Recalling the front passenger’s seat
position (vehicles with a rear seat with
an ottoman)
If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended,
the front passenger’s seat position cannot
be recalled.
Operating the driving position memory
after turning the engine switch off
Driver’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be activated
up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again.
Front passenger’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be recalled up
to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened.
When the recorded seat position can-
not be recalled
The seat position may not be recalled in
some situations when the seat position is
recorded in a certain range. For details,
contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button
“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register,
and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the
driving position cannot be recorded
properly.
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2Check that the shift position is in P.
3Recall the driving position that you
want to record.
Registering/canceling/recall a
driving position to an electronic
key (including a card key) (mem-
ory recall function)
180
3-3. Adjusting the seats
4While pressing the recalled button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered, the
buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel
and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the
driving position cannot be canceled
properly.
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2Check that the shift position is in P.
3While pressing the “SET” button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the
buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
Recall procedure
1Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the driving
position. Carry the electronic key
that has been registered to the driv-
ing position, and then unlock and
open the driver’s door using the
smart entry & start system or wire-
less remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position (not including the steer-
ing wheel and head-up display [if
equipped]). However, the seat will move to
a position slightly behind the recorded
position in order to make entering the vehi-
cle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that
has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.
2Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or IGNITION ON
mode, or fasten a seat belt.
The seat, steering wheel and head-up dis-
play (if equipped) will move to the
recorded position.
Recalling the driving position using the
memory recall function
Different driving positions can be regis-
tered for each electronic key. Therefore,
the driving position that is recalled may
be different depending on the key being
carried.
If a door other than the driver’s door is
unlocked with the smart entry & start sys-
tem, the driving position cannot be
recalled. In this case, press the driving
position button which has been set.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
181
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
*
:If equipped
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
3Touch “Left” or “Right”.
4Adjust the rear seat to the desired
position and then touch “SET”.
5Touch “1” or “2”.
If the preset is being used, the previously
recorded seat position will be overwritten.
In order to correctly use the position
memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest
possible position and the seat is operated in
the same direction, the recorded position
may be slightly different when it is recalled.
1Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
3Touch “Left” or “Right”.
4Touch “1” or “2”.
When the operating conditions are not
met, the buttons will be grayed out.
To stop the operation touch “STOP”.
If the seat is adjusted while a memorized
position is being recalled, the automatic
operation will stop. (The seat will change to
manual operation.)
Operating condition
The weight of an occupant is detected on
the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-
tened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the
seat will be judged as occupied until the
rear door is opened then closed or the
engine switch is turned off.
Recalling a rear seat position
If a memorized rear seat position is recalled,
the seat may stop part-way to ensure suffi-
cient space for the rear passenger.
Recalling the ottoman position (if
equipped)
When a seat position is recalled, the otto-
man will not raise or extend. The ottoman
position can only be recalled if the memo-
rized position is lower and shorter than the
current position.
Rear seat position memory*
The rear seat position can be mem-
orized and recalled with the touch
of a button.
Recording a position into mem-
ory
WARNING
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that
the rear passengers do not strike the
front seats.
Recalling the memorized posi-
tion
182
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats
Center Display
1Press the seat switch.
2Using the Remote Touch pad,
select “Driver seat adjustment” or
“Passenger seat adjustment”.
3Select then the desired adjust-
ment button , , , or to
adjust the head restraint.
Up
Backward
Down
Forward
The head restraint moves while the adjust-
ment button is selected.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all
seats.
Vehicles with power rear seat: The
head restraint for the rear center
seat is integrated into the seatback
and cannot be adjusted.
WARNING
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury.
Use the head restraints designed for
each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the cor-
rect position at all times.
Manual type: After adjusting the head
restraints, push down on them and
make sure they are locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints
removed.
Adjusting a head restraint verti-
cally and horizontally (power
head restraints)
A
B
C
D
E
B
C
D
E
183
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Before driving
Seat adjustment switches (on some
models)
1Up
2Down
Rear seats
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(P.398) and then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3Touch then the desired adjust-
ment button , , , or to
adjust the head restraint.
Up
Backward
Down
Forward
The head restraint moves while the adjust-
ment button is touched.
1Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2Down
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the lock release button .
Front seat head restraints (power head
restraints)
Depending on the position of the front seat,
the front head restraint may not be able to
be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceil-
ing.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Always raise the head restraint one level
from the stowed position when using.
A
B
C
D E
B
C
D
E
Adjusting a head restraint verti-
cally (manual head restraints)
A
184
3-3. Adjusting the seats
The position of the head restraint can
be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward from
the foremost position, it will return to the
rearmost position.
Push the sides of the head restraint.
Pull the head restraint up while press-
ing the lock release button .
Removing the head restraints (power
head restraints)
For removal and installation of the head
restraint, ask any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Align the head restraint with the instal-
lation holes and push it down to the
lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Adjusting a head restraint hori-
zontally (manual head restraints)
Adjusting the side supports (if
equipped)
Removing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
A
Installing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
A
185
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
3-4.Adjusting t he steering wheel an d mirrors
Operating the switch moves the steer-
ing wheel in the following directions:
1Up
2Down
3Toward the driver
4Away from the driver
The steering wheel can be adjusted
when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode
*
.
*
: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
steering wheel can be adjusted regard-
less of engine switch mode.
Automatic adjustment of the steering
position
A desired steering position can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system.
(P.177)
Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move
in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P.177)
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
Press on or close to the mark.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mis-
handle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
Sounding the horn
186
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
*
:If equipped
The height of the rear view mirror can
be adjusted to suit your driving pos-
ture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mir-
ror by moving it up and down.
Responding to the level of brightness
of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically
reduced.
Turn the automatic anti-glare function
mode on/off
When the automatic anti-glare function is
in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
Inside rear view mirror*
The rear view mirror’s position can
be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view
mirror
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror
while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the
vehicle and cause an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
Anti-glare function
A
A
187
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
*
:If equipped
Camera indicator
Indicates that the camera is operating nor-
mally.
Icon display area
Displays icons, adjusting gauge, etc.
(P.189)
Select button
Press to change the setting of the item you
want to adjust.
Menu button
Press to display the icon display area and
select the item you want to adjust.
Lever
Operate to change between digital mirror
mode and optical mirror mode.
Operate the lever to change between
digital mirror mode and optical mirror
mode.
Digital Rearview Mirror*
The Digital Rearview Mirror is a
system that uses the camera on the
rear of the vehicle and displays its
image on the display of the Digital
Rearview Mirror.
The Digital Rearview Mirror can be
changed between optical mirror
mode and digital mirror mode by
operating the lever.
The Digital Rearview Mirror allows
the driver to see the rear view
despite obstructions, such as the
head restraints, luggage or rear
sunshade ensuring rear visibility.
Also, the rear seats are not dis-
played and privacy of the passen-
gers is enhanced.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Before using the Digital Rearview
Mirror
Make sure to adjust the mirror before
driving. (P.188)
Change to optical mirror mode and
adjust the position of the Digital Rear-
view Mirror so that the area behind
your vehicle can be viewed properly.
Change to digital mirror mode and
adjust the display settings.
As the range of the image displayed by
the Digital Rearview Mirror is different
from that of the optical mirror, make
sure to check this difference before
driving.
System components
Changing modes
A
B
C
D
E
188
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
1Digital mirror mode
Displays an image of the area behind the
vehicle.
will illuminate in this mode.
2Optical mirror mode
Turns off the display of the Digital Rearview
Mirror allows it to be used as an optical
mirror.
Digital mirror mode operating condi-
tion
The engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
When the engine switch is changed from
IGNITION ON mode to off or ACCES-
SORY mode, the image will disappear after
several seconds.
When using the Digital Rearview Mir-
ror in digital mirror mode
If it is difficult to see the displayed image
due to light reflected off the Digital Rear-
view Mirror, the camera being dirty, or if
lights of a vehicle behind your vehicle or
the displayed image are bothering you,
change to optical mirror mode.
When the trunk is open, the Digital Rear-
view Mirror image may not display prop-
erly. Before driving, make sure the trunk
is closed.
If the display is difficult to see due to
reflected light, close the sunshade for the
moon roof or the electronic sunshade for
the panoramic moon roof.
Any of the following conditions may
occur when driving in the dark, such as at
night. None of them indicates that a mal-
function has occurred.
Colors of objects in the displayed image
may differ from their actual color.
Depending on the height of the lights of
the vehicle behind, the area around the
vehicle may appear white and blurry.
Automatic image adjustment for brighter
surrounding image may cause flickering.
If it is difficult to see the displayed image or
flickering bothers you, change to optical
mirror mode.
The Digital Rearview Mirror may
become hot while it is in digital mirror
mode.
This is not a malfunction.
Depending on your physical condition or
age, it may take longer than usual to focus
on the displayed image. In this case,
change to optical mirror mode.
Do not let passengers stare at the dis-
played image when the vehicle is being
driven, as doing so may cause motion
sickness.
When the system malfunctions
If the symbol shown in the illustration is dis-
played when using the Digital Rearview
Mirror in digital mirror mode, the system
may be malfunctioning. The symbol will dis-
appear in a few seconds. Operate the lever,
change to optical mirror mode and have the
vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Adjusting the mirror height
The height of the rear view mirror can
Adjusting the mirror
189
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
be adjusted to suit your driving pos-
ture.
Change to optical mirror mode, adjust-
ing the height of the rear view mirror by
moving it up and down.
Display settings (digital mirror
mode)
Settings of the display in the digital mir-
ror mode, on/off operation of the auto-
matic anti-glare function, etc. can be
changed.
1Press the menu button.
The icons will be displayed.
2Press the menu button repeatedly
and select the item you want to
adjust.
3Press or to change the set-
ting.
The icons will disappear if a button is not
operated for approximately 5 seconds or
more.
*
: This is a function for the optical mirror
mode, however, the setting can also be
changed while using the digital mirror
mode.
Enabling/disabling the automatic
anti-glare function (optical mirror
mode)
The automatic anti-glare function in the
optical mirror mode can be ena-
bled/disabled. The setting can be
changed in both the digital mirror
mode and the optical mirror mode.
When using the digital mirror mode
P.189
Icons Settings
Select to adjust the brightness of
the display.
Select to adjust the area dis-
played up/down.
Select to adjust the area dis-
played to the left/right.
Select to adjust the angle of the
displayed image.
Select to zoom in/out the dis-
played image.
Select to enable/disable the
automatic anti-glare function.
*
Responding to the brightness of
the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is
automatically adjusted.
The automatic anti-glare func-
tion is enabled each time the
engine switch is changed to
IGNITION ON mode.
190
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
When using the optical mirror mode
1Press the menu button.
The icons will be displayed.
2Press the menu button repeatedly
and select .
The setting display will be displayed.
3Press or to enable
(“ON”)/disable (“OFF”) the auto-
matic anti-glare function.
The icons will disappear if a button is not
operated for approximately 5 seconds or
more.
Adjusting the display (digital mirror
mode)
If the displayed image is adjusted, it may
appear distorted. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
If the brightness of the Digital Rearview
Mirror is set too high, it may cause eye
strain. Adjust the Digital Rearview Mirror
to an appropriate brightness. If your eyes
become tired, change to optical mirror
mode.
The brightness of the Digital Rearview
Mirror will change automatically accord-
ing to the brightness of the area in front of
your vehicle.
To prevent the light sensors from mal-
functioning
To prevent the light sensors from malfunc-
tioning, do not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
While driving
Do not adjust the position of the Digital
Rearview Mirror or adjust the display
settings while driving.
Stop the vehicle and operate the Digi-
tal Rearview Mirror control switches.
Failure to do so may cause a steering
wheel operation error, resulting in an
unexpected accident.
Always pay attention to the vehicle’s
surroundings.
The size of the vehicles and other objects
may look different when in digital mirror
mode and optical mirror mode.
When backing up, make sure to directly
check the safety of the area around your
vehicle, especially behind the vehicle.
Additionally, if a vehicle approaches from
the rear in the dark, such as at night, the
surrounding area may appear dim.
To prevent causes of fire
If the driver continues using the Digital
Rearview Mirror while smoke or odor
comes from the mirror, it may result in
fire. Stop using the system immediately
and contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
191
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
Cleaning the mirror surface
If the mirror surface is dirty, the image
on the display may be difficult to see.
Clean the mirror surface gently using a
soft dry cloth.
Cleaning the camera
If the camera lens is dirty or covered
with foreign matter, such as water
droplets, snow, mud, etc., the displayed
image may not be clear. In this case,
rinse the camera lens with a large
quantity of water and then wipe it clean
with a soft cloth dampened with water.
Dirt on the camera lens can be cleaned
by operating the dedicated camera
cleaning washer. (P.243)
The camera
The camera for the Digital Rearview Mirror
is located as shown.
Cleaning the Digital Rearview
Mirror
NOTICE
To prevent the Digital Rearview Mir-
ror from malfunctioning
Do not use detergents, such as thinner,
benzine, and alcohol to clean the mir-
ror. They may discolor, deteriorate or
damage the mirror surface.
Do not smoke, use matches, use ciga-
rette lighters or allow open flames
near the mirror. It may damage the
mirror or cause a fire.
Do not remove, disassemble or modify
the mirror.
To prevent the camera from malfunc-
tioning
Observe the following precautions,
otherwise the Digital Rearview Mirror
may not operate properly.
Do not strike or hit the camera or sub-
ject it to a strong impact, as the camera
installation position and angle may be
changed.
Do not remove, disassemble or modify
the camera.
When washing the camera, rinse it
with a large quantity of water and then
wipe it clean with a soft cloth damp-
ened with water.
Do not strongly rub the camera lens,
as it may be scratched and will not be
able to transmit a clear image.
Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or glass coat to
adhere to the camera cover. If this hap-
pens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
Do not apply hot water to the camera
in cold weather, as the sudden change
of temperature may cause the camera
to not operate properly.
When using a high pressure washer to
wash the vehicle, do not directly spray
the camera and its surrounding area,
as doing so may cause the camera to
not operate properly.
Do not subject the camera to a strong
impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-
sible.
192
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the following table for the likely
cause and the solution.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If you notice any symptoms
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to
see.
The mirror surface is dirty. Clean the mirror surface
gently, using a soft dry cloth.
Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the Digital Rearview
Mirror.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(If the light is coming through
the moon roof, close the sun-
shade.)
The vehicle is in a dark area.
The vehicle is near a TV tower,
broadcasting station, electric
power plant, or other location
where strong radio waves or
electrical noise may be pres-
ent.
The temperature around the
camera is extremely high/low.
The ambient temperature is
extremely low.
It is raining or humid.
Sunlight or headlights are shin-
ing directly into the camera
lens.
The vehicle is under fluores-
cent lights, sodium lights, mer-
cury lights, etc.
Exhaust gas is obstructing the
camera.
Change to optical mirror
mode.
(Change back to digital mir-
ror mode when the condi-
tions have improved.)
193
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
The image is difficult to
see.
Foreign matters (such as water
droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is on
the camera lens.
Operate the dedicated
camera cleaning washer
and clean the camera lens.
(P.243)
Change to optical mirror
mode.
Rinse the camera with a
large quantity of water,
wipe it clean with a soft
cloth dampened with water,
and then change back to
digital mirror mode.
The image is out of
alignment.
The trunk is not fully closed. Fully close the trunk.
The camera or its surrounding
area has received a strong
impact.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
The display is dim and
is displayed. The system may be malfunction-
ing.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
goes off.
Symptom Likely cause Solution
194
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
is displayed.
The Digital Rearview Mirror is
extremely hot.
(The display will gradually
become more dim. If the temper-
ature continues to increase, the
Digital Rearview Mirror will turn
off.)
Reducing the cabin tempera-
ture is recommended to
reduce the temperature of
the mirror.
( will disappear when the
mirror becomes cool.)
If does not disappear
even though the mirror is
cool, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
The lever cannot be
operated properly. The lever may be malfunctioning.
Change to optical mirror
mode and have the vehicle
inspected by your any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
(To change to optical mirror
mode, press and hold the
menu button for approxi-
mately 10 seconds.)
Symptom Likely cause Solution
195
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
1To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
The indicator comes on.
Left
Right
Pressing the same switch again will put the
switch in neutral.
2To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
Defogging the mirrors
The outside rear view mirrors can be
cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on
the rear window defogger to turn on the
outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(P.404)
Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror
is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with
the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P.186, 189)
Automatic adjustment of the mirror
angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory. (P.177)
Linked mirror function when reversing
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select
switch is selected, the outside rear view mir-
rors will automatically angle downwards
when the vehicle is reversing in order to
give a better view of the ground.
Outside rear view mirrors
The rear view mirror’s position can
be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
WARNING
Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while
driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
Both the driver and passenger side
mirrors must be extended and prop-
erly adjusted before driving.
Adjustment procedure
A
B
A
B
C
D
196
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
To disable this function, select neither “L”
nor “R”.
To set the mirror angle used when the vehi-
cle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a
desired position with the shift position in R.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and
the mirror will automatically tilt to the mem-
orized angle whenever the shift position is
shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of
the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift position in
other than R). Therefore, if the normal posi-
tion is changed after adjustment, the tilt
position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, read-
just the angle in reversing.
Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the original
position.
Setting automatic mode
Automatic mode allows the folding or
extending of the mirrors to be linked to
locking/unlocking of the doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set auto-
matic mode.
The indicator will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will return
to manual mode.
When disconnecting and reconnecting
battery terminals
The automatic folding/extending mirror
function will return to off as default. To turn
the function on, press the switch again to
select on.
Using automatic mode in cold weather
When automatic mode is used in cold
weather, the door mirror could freeze up
and automatic stowing and return may not
be possible. In this case, remove any ice and
snow from the door mirror, then either
operate the mirror using manual mode or
move the mirror by hand.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
WARNING
When the mirror defoggers are oper-
ating
Do not touch the rear view mirror sur-
faces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
Folding and extending the mir-
rors
A
197
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Before driving
WARNING
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror mal-
function, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
198
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3-5.Opening, clo sing the windows and mo on roof
The power windows can be opened
and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the win-
dows as follows:
1Closing
2One-touch closing
*
3Opening
4One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway, operate the
switch in the opposite direction.
The power windows can be operated
when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
When the driver’s power window switch
is used to open a rear power window
(vehicles with rear door sunshades)
If a rear door sunshade is extended or being
extended when the driver’s power window
switch is pushed, only the rear door sun-
shade will be retracted. To open the rear
power window from the driver’s seat, push
the driver’s power window switch again.
Operating the power windows after
turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or turned off. They cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is
opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the
window and the window frame while the
window is closing, window movement is
stopped and the window is opened slightly.
Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the
door and window while the window is open-
ing, window movement is stopped.
When the side window cannot be
opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch
protection function operates unusually and
the side window cannot be opened or
closed, perform the following operations
with the power window switch of that door.
Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch
in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 sec-
onds of the jam protection function or
catch protection function activating, con-
tinuously operate the power window
switch in the one-touch closing direction
or one-touch opening direction so that
the side window can be opened and
closed.
If the side window cannot be opened and
closed even when performing the above
operations, perform the following proce-
dure for function initialization.
1Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
2Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction and
completely close the side window.
3Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pulling the switch in
the one-touch closing direction, and
hold it there for approximately 6 sec-
onds or more.
Power windows
Opening and closing the power
windows
199
3
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
4Press and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch opening direc-
tion. After the side window is com-
pletely opened, continue holding the
switch for an additional 1 second or
more.
5Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pushing the switch in
the one-touch opening direction, and
hold it there for approximately 4 sec-
onds or more.
6Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction
again. After the side window is com-
pletely closed, continue holding the
switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is
moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully
closed or opened, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened and
closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P.522)
The power windows can be opened and
closed using the wireless remote con-
trol.
*
(P.114)
*
: These settings must be customized at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Power windows open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the engine switch
is turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the power windows open.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Closing the windows
The driver is responsible for all the
power window operations, including
the operation for the passengers. In
order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is possi-
ble for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the power
window. Also, when riding with a child,
it is recommended to use the window
lock switch. (
P.200)
Check to make sure that all passen-
gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when a window is being operated.
When using the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key and operating
the power windows, operate the
power window after checking to make
sure that there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their body
parts caught in the window. Also do
not let a child operate window by the
wireless remote control or mechanical
key. It is possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the power
window.
When exiting the vehicle, turn the
engine switch off, carry the key and
exit the vehicle along with the child.
There may be accidental operation,
due to mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
200
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
This function can be used to prevent
children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator will come on and the pas-
senger windows will be locked.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the driver’s
switch even if the lock switch is on.
The power windows can be operated
when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If nec-
essary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
WARNING
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
The jam protection function may not
work if something gets jammed just
before the window is fully closed. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
jammed in the window.
Catch protection function
Never use any part of your body or
clothing to intentionally activate the
catch protection function.
The catch protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the window is fully opened. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
or clothing caught in the window.
Preventing accidental operation
(window lock switch)
A
201
3
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
Opening and closing
1Opens the moon roof
*
The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.
2Closes the moon roof
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the moon roof
switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilting up and down
1Tilts the moon roof up
*
2Tilts the moon roof down
*
*
: Lightly press either side of the moon roof
switch to stop the moon roof partway.
The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Operating the moon roof after turning
the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approx-
imately 45 seconds after the engine switch
is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off. It cannot, however, be operated once
either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon
roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and
the moon roof opens slightly.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is
opened.
Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and
closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P.522)
The moon roof can be opened and
closed using the wireless remote con-
trol.
*
(P.114)
*
: These settings must be customized at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
When the moon roof does not close nor-
mally
Perform the following procedure:
1Stop the vehicle.
2Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause
for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will
close again and stop at the completely
closed position.
3Check to make sure that the moon roof
is completely closed and then release
the switch.
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open
and close the moon roof and tilt it
up and down.
Operating the moon roof
202
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
*
: If the switch is released at the incorrect
time, the procedure will have to be per-
formed again from the beginning.
If the moon roof does not fully close even
after performing the above procedure cor-
rectly, have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the moon roof does not move normally
If the moon roof does not open or close
normally or the automatic opening function
does not operate, perform the following ini-
tialization procedure.
1Stop the vehicle.
2Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.
*
The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up posi-
tion. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt
down, and stop at the fully closed position.
3Confirm that the moon roof has com-
pletely stopped and release the switch.
*
: If you release the switch while the moon
roof is moving, perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedures
correctly, the moon roof still does not open
or close normally or the automatic opening
function does not operate, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Moon roof open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the engine switch
is turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the moon roof open.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
Opening the moon roof
Do not allow any passengers to put
their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Opening and closing the moon roof
The driver is responsible for moon roof
opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental opera-
tion, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possi-
ble for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the moon
roof.
Check to make sure that all passen-
gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when the moon roof is being operated.
When using the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key and operating
the moon roof, operate the moon roof
after checking to make sure that there
is no possibility of any passenger hav-
ing any of their body parts caught in
the moon roof. Also, do not let a child
operate moon roof by the wireless
remote control or mechanical key. It is
possible for children and other passen-
gers to get caught in the moon roof.
203
3
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
WARNING
When exiting the vehicle, turn the
engine switch off, carry the key and
exit the vehicle along with the child.
There may be accidental operation,
due to mischief, etc., that may possibly
lead to an accident.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
The jam protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof is fully closed.
Also, the jam protection function is not
designed to operate while the moon
roof switch is being pressed. Take care
so that your fingers, etc. do not get
caught.
204
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
4
205
4
Driving
Driving
.
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle....................207
Cargo and luggage................... 214
Trailer towing............................... 215
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ........... 216
Automatic transmission........... 219
Turn signal lever ........................ 226
Parking brake ............................. 227
Brake Hold...................................230
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch........................ 232
AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem).............................................. 235
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
........................................................238
Multi Weather Lights ............... 241
Rear fog lights............................. 242
Windshield wipers and washer
........................................................ 243
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap..... 248
4-5. Using the driving support sys-
tems
Lexus Safety System + A........250
Lexus Safety System + ............ 262
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +
A) .................................................. 273
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +)
....................................................... 285
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
....................................................... 293
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) .....297
RSA (Road Sign Assist) .........307
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range ........................311
Cruise control............................ 323
Stop & Start system.................. 325
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 332
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
....................................................... 349
Lexus parking assist-sensor .. 351
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)
function ...................................... 355
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
function ...................................... 359
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
....................................................... 362
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)......................... 367
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) .......372
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians).................. 375
Driving mode select switch ..378
Electronically modulated air sus-
pension.......................................380
Driving assist systems ............. 384
206
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ....................390
207
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
4-1.Before driving
Starting the engine
P.216
Driving
1With the brake pedal depressed,
shift the shift position to D.
(P.219)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows D.
2If the parking brake is in manual
mode, release the parking brake.
(P.227)
3Gradually release the brake pedal
and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1With the shift position in D, depress
the brake pedal.
If the Stop & Start system is enabled,
depressing the brake pedal will stop the
engine.
2If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the shift posi-
tion to P. (P.222)
Parking the vehicle
1With the shift position in D, depress
the brake pedal to stop the vehicle
completely.
2If the parking brake is in manual
mode, set the parking brake.
(P.227)
3Shift the shift position to P.
(P.222)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P and the parking brake indicator is
illuminated.
4Press the engine switch to stop the
engine.
5Slowly release the brake pedal.
6Lock the door, making sure that you
have the electronic key on your
person.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1Make sure that the parking brake is
set and shift the shift position to D.
2Gently depress the accelerator
pedal.
3Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because
visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road
will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain,
because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on
an expressway in the rain, because there
may be a layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating prop-
erly.
Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine
speed may become high while driving. This
is due to automatic up-shifting control or
down-shifting implementation to meet driv-
ing conditions. It does not indicate sudden
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be
observed to ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
208
4-1. Before driving
acceleration.
The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill
or downhill
When the accelerator pedal is released
When the brake pedal is depressed
Restraining the engine output (Brake
Override System)
When the accelerator and brake pedals
are depressed at the same time, the
engine output may be restrained.
A warning message is displayed on the
multi-information display while the sys-
tem is operating.
Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing
the following precautions is recommended:
For the first 300 km (186 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
For the first 1000 km (621 miles):
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for
extended periods.
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type park-
ing brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes
periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer per-
form the bedding down operation.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign
country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registra-
tion laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P.538)
Idling time before engine stop (LS500)
To prevent damage to the turbocharger,
allow the engine to idle immediately after
high-speed driving or hill climbing.
To allow the engine to idle when the vehicle
is stopped, disable the Stop & Start cancel
switch. (P.331) (With the Stop & Strat
system enabled, the engine will be stopped
by the Stop & Start system when the vehicle
is stopped.)
Driving condition Idling time
Normal city driving Not neces-
sary
High-speed driving (Con-
stant speed of approx.
100km/h [62 mph])
Not neces-
sary
Steep hill driving or continu-
ous driving at 100 km/h (62
mph) or more (race track
driving etc.)
Approxi-
mately 1
minute
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with
the location of the brake and accelera-
tor pedals to avoid depressing the
wrong pedal.
Accidentally depressing the accelera-
tor pedal instead of the brake pedal
will result in sudden acceleration that
may lead to an accident.
When backing up, you may twist your
body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to
operate the pedals properly.
209
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
WARNING
Make sure to keep a correct driving
posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress
the brake and accelerator pedals
properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your
right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay
response in an emergency, resulting in
an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop
the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases
can be extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any flamma-
ble material nearby.
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System
+ A: During normal driving, do not turn
off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be
lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emer-
gency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way:
P.498
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:
During normal driving, do not turn off
the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, however,
power assist to the steering will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer
smoothly, so you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if
it becomes impossible to stop the vehi-
cle in the normal way:
P.498
Use engine braking (downshift) to
maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may
cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (
P.219)
Do not adjust the positions of the
steering wheel, the seat, or the inside
or outside rear view mirrors while driv-
ing.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Always check that all passengers’
arms, heads or other parts of their
body are not outside the vehicle.
When driving on slippery road sur-
faces
Sudden braking, acceleration and
steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehi-
cle.
Sudden acceleration, engine braking
due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
After driving through a puddle, lightly
depress the brake pedal to make sure
that the brakes are functioning prop-
erly. Wet brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning properly. If the
brakes on only one side are wet and
not functioning properly, steering con-
trol may be affected.
When shifting the shift position
Do not let the vehicle roll backward
while a forward driving position is
selected, or roll forward while the shift
position is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall
or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident
or damage to the vehicle.
210
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Do not shift the shift position to P while
the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Do not shift the shift position to R while
the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Do not shift the shift position to a driv-
ing position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Changing the shift position to N while
the vehicle is moving will disengage
the engine from the transmission.
Engine braking is not available when N
is selected.
Be careful not to change the shift posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed. Changing the shift posi-
tion to any positions other than P or N
may lead to unexpected rapid acceler-
ation of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious
injury.
After changing the shift position, make
sure to confirm the current shift posi-
tion displayed on the shift position indi-
cator inside the meter.
Brake pad wear
If any of the following situations occurs,
have the brake pads visually checked and
replaced by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer as soon as possible.
If the brake pad wear limit of a brake
pad is found to have been exceeded
when visually checking the brake pads
for each wheel (for the brake pad wear
limit, refer to P.542)
If a warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display (only the
right-side pads can be detected)
Rotor damage may result if the pads are
not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of the brake pad and
disc wear allow enhanced braking power.
As a result, the discs may wear more
quickly than conventional brake discs.
Therefore, when replacing the brake
pads, Lexus recommends that you also
have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when
the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P
or N, the vehicle may accelerate sud-
denly and unexpectedly, causing an
accident.
In order to prevent accidents due to
the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the
engine is running, and apply the park-
ing brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline,
in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or back-
ward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake
as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed
while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which
could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
211
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
WARNING
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters,
spray cans, or soft drink cans in the
vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter
or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle
may cause the plastic lenses and plas-
tic material of glasses to deform or
crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing
the contents to spray over the interior
of the vehicle, and may also cause a
short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the
vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the
floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is
adjusted, causing a fire.
Do not attach adhesive discs to the
windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on
the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act
as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
Do not leave a door or window open if
the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored
one. Reflected sunlight may cause the
glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
Always apply the parking brake, shift
the shift position to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift
position in P but the parking brake is
not set, the vehicle may start to move,
possibly leading to an accident.
Do not touch the exhaust pipes while
the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if
you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could
cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is
parked in a poorly ventilated area,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle, leading to death or a serious
health hazard.
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more
cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the
brakes are wet, and this may cause one
side of the vehicle to brake differently
than the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System
+ A: If the brake booster device does
not operate, do not follow other vehi-
cles closely and avoid hills or sharp
turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but
the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:
If the electronically controlled brake
system does not operate, do not follow
other vehicles closely and avoid hills or
sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but
the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
212
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System
+ A: Do not pump the brake pedal if
the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up
the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System
+ A: The brake system consists of 2
individual hydraulic systems; if one of
the systems fails, the other will still
operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A:
The brake system consists of 2 or more
individual hydraulic systems; if one of
the systems fails, the other(s) will still
operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when
a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehi-
cle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may
damage the driveline components or
propel the vehicle forward or backward,
causing an accident.
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle
Do not depress the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine
output.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or
depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the
vehicle on a hill.
When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift
the shift position to P. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the
accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in
either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power
steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road,
drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the
vehicle, etc.
LS500: Make sure to idle the engine
immediately after high-load driving.
Stop the engine only after the
turbocharger has cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the turbocharger.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the fol-
lowing situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the
brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehi-
cle.
The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat
tire (
P.518)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded
after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehi-
cle:
Engine stalling
213
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
When the following unusual operation
is performed with the accelerator
pedal depressed, the engine output
may be restrained.
When the shift lever is shifted to R
*
.
When the shift lever is shifted from P
or R to forward drive shift positon
such as D
*
.
When the system operates, a message
appears on the multi-information display.
Read the message and follow the instruc-
tion.
*
: Depending on the situation, the shift
position may not be changed.
Drive-Start Control (DSC)
When the TRC is turned off (P.385),
sudden start restraint control also does not
operate. If your vehicle have trouble escap-
ing from the mud or fresh snow by operat-
ing sudden start restraint control,
deactivate TRC (P.385) so that the vehi-
cle may become able to escape from the
mud or fresh snow.
NOTICE
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water
immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded
road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure
to have any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil
and fluid used for the engine, transmis-
sion, transfer (AWD models), differen-
tial, etc.
Lubricant condition for the propeller
shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of
all joints, bearings, etc.
If the shift control system is damaged by
flooding, it may not be possible to shift
the shift position to P, or from P to other
positions. In this case, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Sudden start restraint control
(Drive-Start Control [DSC])
214
4-1. Before driving
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following infor-
mation about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:
WARNING
Things that must not be carried in the
trunk
The following things may cause a fire if
loaded in the trunk:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals
from being depressed properly, may
block the driver’s vision, or may result in
items hitting the driver or passengers,
possibly causing an accident.
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk
whenever possible.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on
the following locations.
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats
(when stacking items)
On the package tray
On the instrument panel
•On the dashboard
In front of the Center Display
Secure all items in the occupant com-
partment.
Load and distribution
Do not overload your vehicle.
Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterio-
ration of steering or braking control
which may cause death or serious
injury.
215
4
4-1. Before driving
Driving
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the
installation of a tow hitch or the use
of a tow hitch carrier for a wheel-
chair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch
mounted carriers.
216
4-2. Driving procedures
4-2.Driving pro cedures
1Press the parking brake switch to
check that the parking brake is set.
(P.227)
The parking brake indicator will come on.
2Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be
started.
3Press the engine switch shortly and
firmly.
When operating the engine switch, one
short, firm press is enough. It is not neces-
sary to press and hold the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up
to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until
the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any engine
switch mode.
Engine switch illumination
According to the situation, the engine
switch illumination operates as follows.
When a door is opened, or the engine
switch mode is changed from ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode to off,
the engine switch illumination slowly
blinks.
When depressing the brake pedal with
carrying the electronic key on your per-
son, the engine switch illumination rapidly
blinks.
When the engine switch is in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, the
engine switch illumination illuminates.
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not
have been deactivated. (P.64)
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
If a message related to start-up is shown
on the multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
If the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started using the
smart entry & start system. Refer to P.524to
restart the engine.
Electronic key battery depletion
P.110
Conditions affecting operation
P.127
Notes for the entry function
P.128
Steering lock function
After turning the engine switch off and
opening and closing the doors, the steer-
ing wheel will be locked due to the steer-
ing lock function. Operating the engine
switch again automatically cancels the
steering lock.
When the steering lock cannot be
released, “Push Engine Switch While
Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direc-
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following opera-
tions when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the
engine or changes engine switch
modes.
Starting the engine
217
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
tion” will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Press the engine switch shortly and firmly
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
To prevent the steering lock motor from
overheating, operation of the motor may
be suspended if the engine is turned on
and off repeatedly in a short period of
time. In this case, refrain from operating
the engine switch. After about 10 sec-
onds, the steering lock motor will resume
functioning.
Electronic key battery
P.490
Operation of the engine switch
If the switch is not pressed shortly and
firmly, the engine switch mode may not
change or the engine may not start.
If attempting to restart the engine imme-
diately after turning the engine switch off,
the engine may not start in some cases.
After turning the engine switch off, please
wait a few seconds before restarting the
engine.
Customization
If the smart entry & start system has been
deactivated in a customized setting, refer to
P.521.
1Stop the vehicle completely.
2If the parking brake is in manual
mode, set the parking brake.
(P.227)
3Shift the shift position to P.
(P.222)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P and the parking brake indicator is
illuminated.
4Press the engine switch.
The engine will stop, and the meter display
will be extinguished (the shift position indi-
cator will be extinguished a few seconds
after the meter display).
WARNING
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in
the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the
engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle
is moving, do not lock or open the doors
until the vehicle reaches a safe and com-
plete stop. Activation of the steering lock
in this circumstance may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
When starting the engine
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start
or stalls frequently, have your vehicle
checked by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction
with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operat-
ing somewhat differently than usual, such
as the switch sticking slightly, there may
be a malfunction. Contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-
ately.
Stopping the engine
218
4-2. Driving procedures
5Release the brake pedal and check
that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNI-
TION ON” is not shown on the
meter.
Automatic P position selection function
P.222
Modes can be changed by pressing
the engine switch with the brake pedal
released. (The mode changes each
time the switch is pressed.)
1Off
The emergency flashers can be used.
2ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
meter.
3IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the
meter.
Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode
for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION
ON mode (with the engine not running) for
more than an hour with the shift position in
P, the engine switch will automatically turn
off. However, this function cannot entirely
prevent the battery discharge. Do not leave
the vehicle with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
for long periods of time when the engine is
not running.
WARNING
Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an
emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the engine switch for
more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession.
(P.498)
However, do not touch the engine
switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the engine off while
driving will not cause loss of steering
or braking control, however, power
assist to the steering will be lost. This
will make it more difficult to steer
smoothly, so you should pull over and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
If the engine switch is operated while
the vehicle is running, a warning mes-
sage will be shown on the multi-infor-
mation display and a buzzer sounds.
When restarting the engine after an
emergency shutdown, press the
engine switch.
Changing engine switch modes
219
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
When the shift control system malfunc-
tions
When attempting to turn the engine switch
off while there is a malfunction in the shift
control system, the engine switch mode
may change to ACCESSORY mode. In this
case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned
off by applying the parking brake and press-
ing the engine switch again. If there is a mal-
function in the system, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately.
*1
: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce
noise, set the shift position in D for nor-
mal driving. You can choose gear range
suitable for your driving situation by
operating the paddle shift switches.
*2
: Any gear range can be fixed when driv-
ing in M mode.
For the shift positions
When the engine switch is off or in
ACCESSORY mode, the shift position
cannot be changed.
When the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, the shift position can only be
changed to N.
When the engine is running, the shift
position can be changed from P to D, N
or R.
The shift position can only be changed to
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode for long periods of time without
the engine running.
If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the meter, the
engine switch is not off.
Exit the vehicle after turning the
engine switch off.
Automatic transmission
Select the shift position depending
on your purpose and situation.
Shift position purpose and func-
tions
Shift posi-
tion Objective or function
PParking the vehicle/starting
the engine
RReversing
N
Neutral
(Condition in which the
power is not transmitted)
DNormal driving
*1
MM mode driving
*2
(P.225)
220
4-2. Driving procedures
M directly from D.
In addition, if an attempt is made to change
the shift position by moving the shift lever or
by pressing the P position switch in any of
the following situations, the buzzer will
sound and the shifting operation will be dis-
abled or the shift position will automatically
change to N. When this happens, select an
appropriate shift position.
Situations where the shifting operation
will be disabled:
When an attempt is made to change the
shift position from P to another position
by moving the shift lever without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
When an attempt is made to change the
shift position from P or N to M by moving
the shift lever.
When the P position switch is pressed
while the vehicle is running.
*1
When the shift lever is moved to attempt
to change the shift position from P or N
with the accelerator pedal depressed and
the vehicle stopped
Situations where the shift position will
automatically change to N:
When an attempt is made to select the R
position by moving the shift lever when
the vehicle is moving forward.
*2
When an attempt is made to select the D
position by moving the shift lever when
the vehicle is moving in reverse.
*3
When the shift position is changed from
R to M
If N is selected while driving at a certain
speed, even if the shift lever is not held in
the N position, the shift position changes
to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds
and a confirmation message is displayed
on the multi-information display to inform
the driver that the shift position has
changed to N.
*1
: Shift position may be changed to P
when driving at extremely low speeds.
*2
: Shift position may be changed to R
when driving at low speeds.
*3
: Shift position may be changed to D
when driving at low speeds.
Reverse warning buzzer
When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to
inform the driver that the shift position is in
R.
To protect the automatic transmission
If the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture is high, “Transmission Fluid Temp High
See Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on
the multi-information display and the vehi-
cle will go into transmission protection
mode automatically. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
When driving with cruise control or
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range activated
Even when performing the following
actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not be acti-
vated because cruise control or dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed range
will not be canceled.
While driving in the D position,
downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.
When switching the driving mode to
sport mode while driving in the D position
(P.378)
Sudden start restraint control
(Drive-Start Control [DSC])
P.213
AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suit-
able gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when
the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift
position to the M position cancels the func-
tion.)
If a message about a shift operation is
shown
To prevent the shift position from being
selected incorrectly or the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly, the shift position may
be changed automatically or operating the
shift lever may be required. In this case,
change the shift position following the mes-
221
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
sages on the multi-information display.
After recharging/reconnecting the bat-
tery
P.463
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
Shift lever
Operate the shift lever gently and securely
in the direction of the arrow on the shift
position indicator.
To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the
direction of the arrow and hold it.
Release the shift lever after each shifting
operation to allow it to return to its regular
position ( ).
Shifting to M is only possible when the shift
position is in D.
When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N,
D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R
to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being
depressed and the vehicle is stationary.
Shift position indicator
Meter display:
The current shift position is highlighted.
When any shift position other than D or M
is selected, the arrow toward M and the M
WARNING
When driving on slippery road sur-
faces
Do not accelerate or shift the shift posi-
tion suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may
cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting
in an accident.
NOTICE
Situations where shift control system
malfunctions are possible
If any of the following situations occurs,
shift control system malfunctions are
possible.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and then contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the warning message indicating
the shift control system appears on the
multi-information display. (P.515)
The display indicates that no shift posi-
tion is selected for more than a few
seconds.
Shifting the shift lever
A
B
222
4-2. Driving procedures
position indicator are displayed in gray.
Shift lever display:
The current shift position is illuminated.
When selecting the shift position, make
sure that the shift position has been
changed to the desired position by check-
ing the shift position indicator provided on
the instrument cluster.
P position switch
When shifting the shift position to P
Fully stop the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake, and then press the P position
switch.
When the shift position is changed to P, the
switch illuminates.
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P.
Shifting the shift position from P to
other positions
While depressing the brake pedal
firmly, operate the shift lever. If the
shift lever is operated without
depressing the brake pedal, the
buzzer will sound and the shifting
operation will be disabled.
When selecting the shift position,
make sure that the shift position has
been changed to the desired posi-
tion by checking the shift position
indicator provided on the instru-
ment cluster.
The shift position cannot be
changed from P to M directly.
Automatic P position selection function
In the following situations, the shift position
is automatically changed to P.
When pressing the engine switch with the
vehicle stopped while the engine switch is
in IGNITION ON mode and the shift
position is in a position other than P (after
the shift position has changed to P, the
engine switch will turn off)
*
If the driver’s door is opened and all of the
following conditions are met, while the
shift position is in a position other than P
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
WARNING
For the shift lever
Do not remove the shift lever knob or
use anything but a genuine Lexus shift
lever knob. Also, do not hang anything
on the shift lever.
Doing so could prevent the shift lever
from returning to position, causing
unexpected accidents to occur when
the vehicle is in motion.
In order to prevent the shift position
from accidentally being changed, do
not touch the shift lever when not using
them.
P position switch
C
223
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
The brake pedal is not depressed.
To start off the vehicle after the shift posi-
tion is changed to P, operate the shift lever
again.
When the vehicle is stopped after the
engine has been stopped in an emer-
gency while driving
When voltage of the battery drops while
the shift position is in a position other than
P
*
: When the engine switch is pressed while
driving at extremely slow speeds, such
as immediately before stopping the vehi-
cle, the shift position may automatically
change to P. Make sure that the vehicle
is completely stopped before pressing
the engine switch.
If the shift position cannot be shifted
from P
There is a possibility that the battery is dis-
charged. Check the battery in this situation.
(P.524)
Driving mode
P.378
Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the
conditions when driving on slippery
road surfaces, such as on snow.
Turn the snow mode switch backward.
The snow mode indicator illuminates.
Turn the snow mode switch backward
again to return to normal mode.
WARNING
P position switch
Do not press the P position switch
while the vehicle is moving.
If the P position switch is pressed when
driving at very low speeds (for exam-
ple, directly before stopping the vehi-
cle), the vehicle may stop suddenly
when the shift position switches to P,
which could lead to an accident.
In order to prevent the shift position
from accidentally being changed, do
not touch the P position switch when
not using them.
After changing the shift position to P,
do not release the brake pedal until the
shift position indicator shows P and the
parking brake indicator is illuminated.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move,
possibly leading to an accident.
NOTICE
Notes regarding shift lever and P
position switch operation
Avoid repeatedly operating the shift
lever and P position switch in quick suc-
cession.
The system protection function may acti-
vate and it will not be temporarily possi-
ble to shift the shift position other than P.
If this happens, please wait for a while
before attempting to change the shift
position again.
When exiting the vehicle (driver’s
seat only)
Check that the shift position indicator
shows P and that the parking brake indi-
cator is illuminated before opening the
door and exiting the vehicle.
Selecting the driving mode
224
4-2. Driving procedures
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if
the engine switch is turned off after driving
in snow mode.
To drive using temporary shift range
selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle
shift switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is
operated, the shift range switches to a
range that enables engine braking
force that is suitable to driving condi-
tions. When the “+” paddle shift switch
is operated, the shift range switches to
a range that is one range higher than
the current range.
Changing the shift range allows
restriction of the highest gear, prevent-
ing unnecessary upshifting and ena-
bling the level of engine braking force
to be selected.
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
1Upshifting
2Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to D10,
will be displayed on the meter.
To return to normal D position driving, the
“+” paddle shift switch must be held down
for a period of time.
A lower shift range will provide greater
engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
Automatic deactivation of shift range
selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will
be deactivated in the following situations:
When the vehicle comes to a stop
If the accelerator pedal is depressed for
more than a certain period of time
When the shift position is shifted to a
position other than D.
When pressing and holding the “+” pad-
dle shift switch
Downshifting restriction warning
buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving perfor-
mance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances,
downshifting may not be possible even
when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)
Selecting shift ranges in the D
position
A
B
A
B
Meter dis-
play Function
D2 - D10
A gear in the range between
D1 and the selected shift
range is automatically cho-
sen depending on vehicle
speed and driving condi-
tions
D1 Setting the shift range at D1
225
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
To enter M mode, shift the shift position
to M. Gears can be selected by oper-
ating the paddle shift switches, allowing
you to drive in the gear of your choos-
ing.
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
1Upshifting
2Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the
paddle shift switch is operated.
The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be
fixed and displayed on the meter.
When in the M position, the gear will
not change unless the paddle shift
switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position,
the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
When vehicle speed drops
(downshift only).
When it is necessary to protect the
engine or automatic transmission
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is low, the automatic transmis-
sion fluid temperature is high or low,
or other reasons.
Also, the gear will not shift when the
vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift
operation is performed.
Downshifting restriction warning
buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving perfor-
mance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances,
downshifting may not be possible even
when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A
buzzer will sound twice.)
Performing the following opera-
tions allows the engine switch to be
set to ACCESSORY mode with the
shift position held in N.
1Operate the shift lever and change
the shift position to N when the
engine is running.
2Return the shift lever to its regular
position ( ).
3Operate the shift lever to N and
hold it there until the buzzer
sounds.
4Press the engine switch within 5
seconds after the buzzer sounds.
The engine switch will be set to ACCES-
SORY mode with the shift position in N.
*
Make sure to check that the buzzer
sounds and “Holding N Push P Switch
When Done” is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Selecting gears in the M position
A
B
When the engine switch is
changed to ACCESSORY mode
with the shift position held in N
226
4-2. Driving procedures
To change to a shift position other
than N, press the P position switch.
The shift position will be changed to
P.
Even if the engine is not running, by
operating the shift lever and the
engine switch, the engine switch
may be changed to ACCESSORY
mode with the shift position held in
N. Make sure that the engine is run-
ning before performing the opera-
tion.
*
: To keep this state, do not operate the
engine switch. If the engine switch is
operated repeatedly, the engine switch
will turn off after the shift position has
automatically changed to P.
1Right turn
2Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4Left turn
Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear
turn signal lights has not burned out.
If the turn signals stop flashing before a
lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
NOTICE
Keeping the shift position in N when
changing to ACCESSORY mode
When you wish to keep the shift position
in N when changing the engine switch to
ACCESSORY mode, make sure that the
engine is running before operating the
engine switch. If the engine switch mode
is changed without the engine running,
the shift position may change to P.
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
227
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set and
released manually.
1Push the switch to set the parking
brake
The parking brake indicator light will turn
on.
Press and hold the parking brake switch if
an emergency occurs and it is necessary to
operate the parking brake while driving.
2Pull the switch to release the park-
ing brake
Parking brake
The parking brake can be set or
released automatically or manually.
In automatic mode, the parking
brake can be set or released auto-
matically according to the shift
lever operation. Also, even in auto-
matic mode, the parking brake can
be set or released manually.
Operating instructions
228
4-2. Driving procedures
Operate the parking brake switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
Using the parking brake automatic
release function, the parking brake can
be released by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. When using this function,
slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator
light turn off.
Turns automatic mode on
While the vehicle is stopped, press and
hold the parking brake switch until a
message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
When the automatic mode is turned
on, the parking brake operates as fol-
lows.
When the shift position is shifted
from P, the parking brake will be
released, and the parking brake
indicator light will turn off.
When the shift position is shifted to
P, the parking brake will be set, and
the parking brake indicator light will
turn on.
Operate the shift lever and P position
switch with the vehicle stopped and the
brake pedal depressed.
Turns automatic mode off
While the vehicle is stopped, pull and
hold the parking brake switch until a
message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
Parking brake operation
When the engine switch is not in IGNI-
TION ON mode, the parking brake can-
not be released using the parking brake
switch.
When the engine switch is not in IGNI-
TION ON mode, automatic mode (auto-
matic brake setting and releasing) is not
available.
Parking brake automatic release func-
tion
When the shift position is shifted from P,
the parking brake will be released in
automatic mode.
When all of the following conditions are
met in manual mode, the parking brake
can be released by depressing the accel-
erator pedal.
The driver’s door is closed
The driver is wearing the seat belt
The shift position is in D, M or R
If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a
Minute” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
If the parking brake is operated repeatedly
over a short period of time, the system may
restrict operation to prevent overheating. If
this happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will return
after about 1 minute.
229
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
If “EPB Activation Stopped Incom-
pletely” or “EPB Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
Operate the parking brake switch. If the
message does not disappear after operat-
ing the switch several times, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor
sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
Parking brake operation
Depending on the engine switch mode,
the parking brake indicator light will turn
on and stay on as described below:
IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until
the parking brake is released.
Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on
for approximately 15 seconds.
When the engine switch is turned off with
the parking brake set, the parking brake
indicator light will stay on for about 15
seconds. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
When the parking brake switch mal-
functions
Automatic mode (automatic brake setting
and releasing) will be turned on automati-
cally.
Parking the vehicle
P.207
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven
with the parking brake engaged. “EPB
Applied” is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (with the vehicle reached a
speed of 5 km/h [3 mph])
If the brake system warning light comes
on
P.507
Usage in winter time
P.390
WARNING
When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.
The parking brake may be released unin-
tentionally and there is the danger of the
vehicle moving that may lead to an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the
parking brake, shift the shift position to P
and make sure that the vehicle does not
move.
When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
check the warning messages.
When the parking brake cannot be
released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking
performance and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately if this occurs.
230
4-2. Driving procedures
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator (green)
comes on. While the system is holding
the brake, the brake hold operated indica-
tor (yellow) comes on.
Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on
in the following conditions:
The driver’s door is not closed.
The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected
when the brake hold system is enabled, the
system will turn off and the brake hold
standby indicator light will go off. In addi-
tion, if any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the brake, a
warning buzzer will sound and a message
will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play. The parking brake will then be set
automatically.
Brake hold function
If the brake pedal is left released for a
period of about 3 minutes after the sys-
tem has started holding the brake, the
parking brake will be set automatically. In
this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a
message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
To turn the system off while the system is
holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the button again.
The brake hold function may not hold the
vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be neces-
sary for the driver to apply the brakes. A
warning buzzer will sound and the
multi-information display will inform the
driver of this situation. If a warning mes-
sage is shown on the multi-information
display, read the message and follow the
instructions.
When the parking brake is set automati-
cally while the system is holding the
brakes
Perform any of the following operations to
release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator pedal. (The
parking brake will not be released auto-
matically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
Operate the parking brake switch with
the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (P.227)
When an inspection at any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer is nec-
essary
When the brake hold standby indicator
(green) does not illuminate even when the
brake hold switch is pressed with the brake
hold system operating conditions met, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected at any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the
brake applied when the shift posi-
tion is in D, M or N with the system
on and the brake pedal has been
depressed to stop the vehicle. The
system releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is depressed with
the shift position in D or M to allow
smooth start off.
Enabling the system
A
B
231
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
reliable repairer.
If “Brake Hold Malfunction Press Brake
to Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or
“Brake Hold Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. If a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and follow
the instructions.
If the brake hold operated indicator
flashes
P.513
WARNING
When the vehicle is on a steep incline
When using the brake hold system on a
steep incline exercise caution. The brake
hold function may not hold the vehicle in
such a situation.
When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when
the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when
stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed
for use when parking the vehicle for a
long period of time. Turning the engine
switch off while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake, which
would cause the vehicle to move. When
operating the engine switch, depress the
brake pedal, shift the shift position to P
and set the parking brake.
232
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4-3.Operating the lights and wipers
Operating the switch turns on
the lights as follows:
1 The front position, tail, license
plate and instrument panel lights
turn on.
2 The headlights and all the
lights listed above turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime run-
ning lights (P.232) and all the
lights listed above turn on and off
automatically.
AUTO mode can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other
drivers during daytime driving, the daytime
running lights turn on automatically when-
ever the engine is started and the parking
brake is released with the headlight switch
in the position. (Illuminate brighter
than the front position lights.) Daytime run-
ning lights are not designed for use at night.
Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detect-
ing the level of ambient light and may cause
the automatic headlight system to malfunc-
tion.
Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in or :
The headlights turn off automatically if
the engine switch is turned to ACCES-
SORY mode or turned off, and the
driver’s door is opened.
When the light switch is in : The
headlights and all lights turn off automati-
cally if the engine switch is turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned off, and
the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine
switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated
manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
233
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
or .
Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is
turned off or turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are turned on.
Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically
adjusted according to the number of pas-
sengers and the loading condition of the
vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
Battery-saving function
In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle
from discharging, if the light switch is in the
or position when the engine
switch is turned off the battery saving func-
tion will operate and automatically turn off
all the lights after approximately 20 min-
utes. When the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the battery-saving
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed,
the battery-saving function is canceled
once and then reactivated. All the lights will
turn off automatically 20 minutes after the
battery-saving function has been reacti-
vated:
When the headlight switch is operated
When a door or the trunk is opened or
closed
Welcome light illumination control
The front position lights automatically turn
on at night when the doors are unlocked
using the entry function or wireless remote
control if the light switch is in the posi-
tion.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
1With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
2Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
This system allows the headlights to be
turned on for 30 seconds when the
engine switch is off.
Pull the lever toward you and release it
with the light switch in after turn-
ing the engine switch off.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
Turning on the high beam head-
lights
Extended Headlight Lighting
system
234
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The lights are turned off in the following
situations.
The engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
The light switch is turned on.
The light switch is pulled toward you
and then released.
When the steering wheel or turn
signal lever is operated while the
headlights are on (low beam), a cor-
nering light will turn on and light up
the direction of movement of the
vehicle. The cornering lights are
designed to ensure excellent visibil-
ity when making a turn at an inter-
section.
However, when vehicle speed is more than
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph), the cor-
nering lights will not turn on.
When the shift position is in R while
the headlights are on (low beam),
both cornering lights will turn on.
This is designed to enhance visibility
when parking.
Cornering lights
When the cornering lights are on for more
than 30 minutes, they will turn off automati-
cally.
Cornering lights
235
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
*
:If equipped
Adjusts the brightness and illumi-
nated area of the high beams
according to the vehicle speed.
Adjusts the intensity of the high
beams, while driving on a curve, so
that the area in the direction that the
vehicle is turning will be illuminated
more brightly than other areas.
Operates the shaded high beams so
that the area around vehicles ahead
is partially not illuminated while all
other areas continue to be illumi-
nated with the high beams.
The shaded high beams help optimize for-
ward visibility while reducing the dazzling
effect on the drivers of vehicles ahead.
Adjusts the distance that the low
beams are projected according to
the distance to a preceding vehicle.
1Press the Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem switch.
2Turn the headlight switch to the
or position.
When the headlight switch lever is in the
low beam position, the AHS system will be
enabled and the AHS indicator will illumi-
AHS (Adaptive High-beam
System)*
The Adaptive High-beam System
uses a camera sensor located
behind the upper portion of the
windshield to assess the brightness
of the lights of vehicles ahead,
streetlights, etc., and automatically
controls the headlight light distribu-
tion as necessary.
WARNING
Limitations of the Adaptive
High-beam System
Do not overly rely on the Adaptive
High-beam System. Always drive safely,
taking care to observe your surroundings
and turning the high beams on or off
manually if necessary.
To prevent incorrect operation of the
Adaptive High-beam System
Do not overload the vehicle.
System functions
Activating the Adaptive
High-beam System
236
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
nate.
Operating conditions of the Adaptive
High-beam System
When all of the following conditions are
met, the high beams will be turned on
automatically and the system will operate:
The vehicle speed is approximately 15
km/h (10 mph) or more.
*
The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
*
: When the vehicle speed is approxi-
mately 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, the
area in the direction that the vehicle is
turning will be illuminated more brightly
than other areas while driving on a
curve.
When all of the following conditions are
met, the shaded high beams will turn on
and the distance that the low beams are
projected will be adjusted automatically,
depending on the location of vehicles
ahead:
The vehicle speed is approximately 15
km/h (10 mph) or more.
The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
There are vehicles ahead with headlights
or tail lights turned on.
If any of the following conditions are met,
the high beams or shaded high beams will
be changed to the low beams automati-
cally:
The vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 15 km/h (10 mph).
The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
There are many vehicles ahead.
Vehicles ahead are moving quickly and
the high beams may blind the drivers of
the other vehicles.
When the vehicle speed is between
approximately 3 and 15 km/h (1.9 and 9.3
mph), the cornering lights will turn on.
Camera sensor detection information
The high beams may not be automatically
changed to the shaded high beams in the
following situations:
When vehicles ahead suddenly appear
from a curve
When the vehicle is cut in front of by
another vehicle
When vehicles ahead are hidden from
sight due to repeated curves, road divid-
ers or roadside trees
When vehicles ahead appear from the
faraway lane on wide road
When vehicles ahead have no lights
The high beams may be changed to the
shaded high beams if a vehicle ahead that
is using fog lights without its headlights
turned on is detected.
House lights, street lights, traffic signals,
and illuminated billboards or signs and
other reflective objects may cause the
high beams to change to the shaded high
beams, cause the high beams not to
change to the shaded high beams, or
change the area that is not illuminated.
The following factors may affect the
amount of time taken to turn the high
beam on or off, or the speed by which the
areas not illuminated change:
The brightness of headlights, fog lights,
and tail lights of vehicles ahead
The movement and direction of vehicles
ahead
When a vehicle ahead only has opera-
tional lights on one side
When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled
vehicle
The condition of the road (gradient,
curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
The number of passengers and amount of
luggage
The light distribution control of the head-
lights may change unexpectedly.
Bicycles or similar objects may not be
detected.
In the following situations the system may
237
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
not be able to correctly detect the sur-
rounding brightness level. This may cause
the low beams to remain on or the high
beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or
vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is neces-
sary to manually switch between the high
and low beams.
When driving in inclement weather
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
When the windshield is obscured by fog,
mist, ice, dirt, etc.
When the windshield is cracked or dam-
aged
When the camera sensor is deformed or
dirty
When the temperature of the camera
sensor is extremely high
When the surrounding brightness level is
equal to that of headlights, tail lights or
fog lights
When headlights or tail lights of vehicles
ahead are turned off, dirty, changing
color, or not aimed properly
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
When driving through an area of inter-
mittently changing brightness and dark-
ness
When frequently and repeatedly driving
ascending/descending roads, or roads
with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces
(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
When frequently and repeatedly taking
curves or driving on a winding road
When there is a highly reflective object
ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or
mirror
When the back of a preceding vehicle is
highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck
When the vehicle’s headlights are dam-
aged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
When the vehicle is listing or tilting due to
a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
When the headlights are changed
between the high beams and low beams
repeatedly in an abnormal manner
When the driver believes that the high
beams may be flashing or dazzling
pedestrians or other drivers
When the vehicle is used in an area in
which vehicles travel on the opposite side
of the road of the country for which the
vehicle was designed, for example using
a vehicle designed for right-hand traffic in
a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
Switching to the high beams
Push the lever away from you.
The AHS indicator will turn off and the high
beam indicator will turn on.
Pull the lever to its original position to acti-
vate the Adaptive High-beam System
again.
Switching to the low beams
Press the Adaptive High-beam System
switch.
The AHS indicator will turn off.
Press the switch to activate the Adaptive
High-beam System again.
Turning the high beams on/off
manually
238
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Temporarily switching to the low
beams
Pull the lever toward you and then
return it to its original position.
The high beams are on while the lever is
pulled toward you. However, after the lever
is returned to its original position, the low
beams remain on for a certain period of
time. Afterwards, the Adaptive High-beam
System will be activated again.
Temporarily switching to the low beams
It is recommended to switch to the low
beams when the high beam may cause
problems or distress to other drivers or
pedestrians nearby.
*
: If equipped
1Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)*
The Automatic High Beam uses a
camera sensor located behind the
upper portion of the windshield to
assess the brightness of the lights of
vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc.,
and automatically turns the high
beams on or off as necessary.
WARNING
Limitations of the Automatic High
Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High
Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning
the high beams on or off manually if nec-
essary.
To prevent incorrect operation of the
Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic High
Beam
239
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
2Turn the headlight switch to the
or position.
When the headlight switch lever is in the
low beam position, the AHB system will be
enabled and the AHB indicator will illumi-
nate.
Conditions to turn the high beams on/off
automatically
When all of the following conditions are
met, the high beams will be turned on
automatically (after approximately 1 sec-
ond):
The vehicle speed is approximately 30
km/h (19 mph) or more.
The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
There are no vehicles ahead with head-
lights or tail lights turned on.
There are few streetlights on the road
ahead.
If any of the following conditions are met,
the high beams will turn off automatically:
The vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 25 km/h (16 mph).
The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
Vehicles ahead have their headlights or
tail lights turned on.
There are many streetlights on the road
ahead.
Camera sensor detection information
The high beams may not be automatically
turned off in the following situations:
When a vehicle suddenly appears from
around a curve
When the vehicle is cut in front of by
another vehicle
When vehicles ahead cannot be
detected due to repeated curves, road
dividers or roadside trees
When vehicles ahead appear in a fara-
way lane on a wide road
When the lights of vehicles ahead are not
on
The high beams may be turned off if a
vehicle ahead that is using fog lights with-
out its headlights turned on is detected.
House lights, street lights, traffic signals,
and illuminated billboards or signs and
other reflective objects may cause the
high beams to change to the low beams,
or the low beams to remain on.
The following factors may affect the
amount of time taken for the high beams
to turn on or off:
The brightness of the headlights, fog
lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
The movement and direction of vehicles
ahead
When a vehicle ahead only has opera-
tional lights on one side
When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled
vehicle
The condition of the road (gradient,
curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
The number of passengers and amount of
luggage in the vehicle
The high beams may turn on or off unex-
pectedly.
Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be
detected.
In the following situations the system may
not be able to correctly detect the sur-
rounding brightness level. This may cause
the low beams to remain on or the high
beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or
vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is neces-
sary to manually switch between the high
and low beams.
When driving in inclement weather
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
When the windshield is obscured by fog,
mist, ice, dirt, etc.
When the windshield is cracked or dam-
aged
When the camera sensor is deformed or
dirty
When the temperature of the camera
240
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
sensor is extremely high
When the surrounding brightness level is
equal to that of headlights, tail lights or
fog lights
When headlights or tail lights of vehicles
ahead are turned off, dirty, changing
color, or not aimed properly
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,
dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
When driving through an area of inter-
mittently changing brightness and dark-
ness
When frequently and repeatedly driving
ascending/descending roads, or roads
with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces
(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,
etc.)
When frequently and repeatedly taking
curves or driving on a winding road
When there is a highly reflective object
ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or
mirror
When the back of a preceding vehicle is
highly reflective, such as a container on a
truck
When the vehicle’s headlights are dam-
aged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
When the vehicle is listing or titling due to
a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
When the headlights are changed
between the high beams and low beams
repeatedly in an abnormal manner
When the driver believes that the high
beams may be flashing or dazzling
pedestrians or other drivers
When the vehicle is used in an area in
which vehicles travel on the opposite side
of the road of the country for which the
vehicle was designed, for example using
a vehicle designed for right-hand traffic in
a left-hand traffic area, or vice versa
Switching to the high beams
Push the lever away from you.
The AHB indicator will turn off and the
high beam indicator will turn on.
Pull the lever to its original position to acti-
vate the Automatic High Beam system.
Switching to the low beams
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The AHB indicator will turn off.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic
High Beam system again.
Temporarily switching to the low
beams
Pull the lever toward you and then
return it to its original position.
The high beams are on while the lever is
pulled toward you. However, after the lever
is returned to its original position, the low
beams remain on for a certain period of
time. Afterwards, the Automatic High
Beam will be activated again.
Turning the high beams on/off
manually
241
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
Temporarily switching to the low beams
It is recommended to switch to the low
beams when the high beam may cause
problems or distress to other drivers or
pedestrians nearby.
1Turn the headlight switch to the
or position.
2Turn the switch ring to the
position.
When the switch is released, it returns to
.
When the Multi Weather Lights system is
enabled, the Multi Weather Lights indica-
tor on the meter will illuminate.
Turn the switch ring to the position
again to disable the system.
Operating conditions
The cornering lights will illuminate when the
Multi Weather Lights are enabled and both
of the following conditions are met:
The headlights are on
Multi Weather Lights
The Multi Weather Lights is a sys-
tem that illuminates the cornering
lights to ensure visibility when driv-
ing in inclement weather, such as
rain or fog.
Enabling/disabling the Multi
Weather Lights
242
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The vehicle speed is lower than approxi-
mately 45 km/h (28 mph).
When the vehicle speed increases to
approximately 45 km/h (28 mph) or
higher, the lights will be temporarily turned
off. The lights will turn on again when the
vehicle speed becomes lower than
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph).
Rear fog lights
When the Multi Weather Lights system is
enabled, the rear fog lights may also be illu-
minated. (P.242)
Customization
Enabling of the Multi Weather Lights sys-
tem when the rear fog lights are enabled
can be turned on/off. (P.546)
1Turn the headlight switch to the
or position.
2Turn the switch ring to the
position.
When the switch is released, it returns to
.
When the rear fog lights are enabled, the
rear fog light indicator on the meter will
illuminate.
Turn the switch ring to the position
again to disable the rear fog lights.
Illumination conditions
When enabled, the rear fog lights oper-
ate when the headlights are illuminated.
When illuminated, the rear fog lights will
remain on until the tail lights are turned
off.
Rear fog lights
When driving in inclement weather,
such as rain or fog, the rear fog
lights can be used to make your
vehicle more visible to following
vehicles.
Operating instructions
243
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
Using the rear fog lights
Use the rear fog lights only when necessary.
If the rear fog lights are used when visibility
is not poor, they may impede the visibility of
drivers in following vehicles.
Multi Weather Lights system-linked
operation
When the rear fog lights are illuminated, the
Multi Weather Lights system may also
operate. (P.241)
Customization
Enabling of the Multi Weather Lights sys-
tem when the rear fog lights are enabled
can be turned on/off. (P.546)
Operating the lever operates
the wipers or washer as follows. When
is selected, the wipers will operate
automatically when the sensor detects
falling rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accordance
with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can switch
between automatic operation and
manual operation, or can use the
washer.
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may dam-
age the windshield.
Operating the wiper lever
244
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
1 Off
2 Rain-sensing operation
The wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system
automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle
speed.
3 Low speed operation
4 High speed operation
5 Temporary operation
When is selected, the sensor sen-
sitivity can be adjusted by turning the
switch ring.
6Increases the sensitivity
7Decreases the sensitivity
8 Windshield washer/wiper
dual operation
Pulling the lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer.
(After operating several times, the wipers
operate once more time after a short delay
to prevent dripping. However, the dripping
prevention does not operate while the
vehicle is moving.)
When the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode and the headlights are on, if the
lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will
operate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
9
*
Rear camera washer opera-
tion
Pushing the lever operates the rear cam-
era washer and cleans the rear camera and
the camera for the Digital Rearview Mirror.
245
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
*
: Vehicles with Digital Rearview Mirror
The windshield wiper and washer can be
operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera-
tion
Even when the wipers are not in AUTO
mode, vehicle speed affects the time until
the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs.
With low speed windshield wiper operation
selected, wiper operation will be switched
from low speed to intermittent wiper opera-
tion only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is
adjusted to the highest level, the mode can-
not be switched.)
Raindrop sensor
The raindrop sensor judges the amount
of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode
while the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, the wipers will operate once
to show that AUTO mode is activated.
If the temperature of the raindrop sensor
is 85°C (185°F) or higher, or -15°C
(5°F) or lower, automatic operation may
not occur. In this case, operate the wipers
in any mode other than AUTO mode.
If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not
blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer
fluid reservoir.
Front door opening linked windshield
wiper stop function
When is selected and the windshield
wipers are operating, if a front door is
opened while the vehicle is stopped and the
P shift position is selected, operation of the
windshield wipers will be stopped to pre-
vent anyone near the vehicle from being
sprayed by water from the wipers. When
the front door is closed, wiper operation will
resume.
When stopping the engine in an emer-
gency while driving
If the windshield wipers are operating when
the engine is stopped, the windshield wipers
will operate in high speed operation. After
the vehicle is stopped, operation will return
to normal when the engine switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode, or operation will
stop when the driver’s door is opened.
Outside rear view mirror defogger acti-
vation linked to windshield wiper opera-
tion
The outside rear view mirror defoggers
automatically turn on when you operate the
windshield wipers.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers
automatically turn off approximately 15
minutes after the wipers stop.
For details about the outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers: P.404
246
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
When the windshield wipers are not
being used, they retract to below the
hood. To enable the windshield wipers
to be lifted when parking in cold condi-
tions or when replacing a windshield
wiper insert, change the rest position of
the windshield wipers to the service
position using the wiper lever.
Raising the wipers to the service
position
Within approximately 45 seconds of
turning the engine switch off, move the
wiper lever to the position and
hold it for approximately 2 seconds or
more.
The wipers will move to the service posi-
tion.
Lifting the windshield wipers
While holding the hook portion of
the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper
from the windshield.
WARNING
Caution regarding the use of wind-
shield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate
unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or
the windshield is subject to vibration in
AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers
or anything else do not become caught
in the windshield wipers.
Caution regarding the use of washer
fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer
fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield
and cause low visibility. This may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
When there is no washer fluid spray
from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may
be caused if the lever is pulled toward
you and held continually.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Changing the windshield wiper
rest position/Lifting the wind-
shield wipers
A
247
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
Lowering the windshield wipers to the
retracted position
With the windshield wipers placed on the
windshield, turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode and then move the wiper
lever to an operating position. When the
wiper switch is turned off, the windshield
wipers will stop at the retracted position.
Even if the wipers deviate while the engine
switch is off, the wipers will return to the
normal position.
NOTICE
When lifting the windshield wipers
Do not lift the windshield wipers when
they are in the retracted position
below the hood. Otherwise, they may
contact the hood, possibly resulting in
damage to a windshield wiper and/or
the hood.
Do not lift a windshield wiper by the
wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper
blade may be deformed.
Do not operate the wiper lever when
the windshield wipers are lifted. Oth-
erwise, the windshield wipers may
contact the hood, possibly resulting in
damage to the windshield wipers
and/or hood.
248
4-4. Refueling
4-4.Refueling
Close all the doors and windows,
and turn the engine switch off.
Confirm the type of fuel.
Fuel types
P.545
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehi-
cle has a fuel tank opening that only accom-
modates the special nozzle on unleaded
fuel pumps.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open
the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
WARNING
When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while
refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
After exiting the vehicle and before
opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge
any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before
refueling because sparks resulting
from static electricity can cause fuel
vapors to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank
cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard
when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard
before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray
out the filler neck and cause injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not dis-
charged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel
tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are
harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehi-
cle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite
and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch
any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to
build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
When refueling
Observe the following precautions to
prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the
fuel filler neck.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz-
zle automatically clicks off.
Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such
as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel
system components or the vehicle’s
painted surface.
249
4
4-4. Refueling
Driving
1Press the opener switch.
2Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and
remove it, then put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
P.521
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap is
released, it will turn slightly in the oppo-
site direction.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Closing the fuel tank cap
WARNING
When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus
fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other inci-
dent which may result in death or serious
injury.
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4-5.Using the driving su pport systems
*
:If equipped
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System + A)
P.273
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
P.293
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.297
AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem)
P.235
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
P.307
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
P.311
Four types of sensors, located behind
the front grille, front bumper, rear
bumper and windshield, detect infor-
mation necessary to operate the drive
assist systems.
Front
Front radar sensor
Front side radar sensors
Front camera
Rear
Rear side radar sensors (P.332)
Lexus Safety System + A*
The Lexus Safety System + A con-
sists of the following drive assist sys-
tems and contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experience:
Drive assist system
WARNING
Lexus Safety System + A
The Lexus Safety System + A is designed
to operate under the assumption that the
driver will drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the occupants
and the vehicle in the case of a collision
or assist the driver in normal driving con-
ditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recog-
nition accuracy and control performance
that this system can provide, do not
overly rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.
Sensors
A
B
C
251
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
To avoid malfunction of the front
radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Keep the radar sensor and the radar
sensor cover clean at all times.
Radar sensor
Radar sensor cover
If the front of the radar sensor or the front
or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty
or covered with water droplets, snow,
etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor
cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging
them.
Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, radar
sensor cover or surrounding area.
A
B
Do not subject the radar sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor is moved even
slightly off position, the system may
malfunction and objects may not be
detected correctly.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front
bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
Do not modify or paint the radar sen-
sor or radar sensor cover.
In the following cases, the radar sensor
must be recalibrated. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
When the radar sensor or front grille
are removed and installed, or replaced
When the front bumper is replaced
To avoid malfunction of the front side
radar sensors
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
Keep the radar sensors and their sur-
rounding areas on the front bumper
clean at all times.
If a radar sensor or its surrounding area
on the front bumper is dirty or covered
with snow, the system may not operate
and a warning message (
P.516) will be
displayed.
If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow
and drive the vehicle for approximately
10 minutes.
If the warning message does not disap-
pear, have your vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), alumi-
num tape or other items to the radar
sensors or their surrounding area.
Do not subject a radar sensor or its
surrounding area on the front bumper
to a strong impact.
If a radar sensor is moved even slightly
off position, the system may malfunction
and vehicles may not be detected cor-
rectly.
In the following situations, have your
vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If a radar sensor or its surrounding
area is subject to a strong impact
If the area on the front bumper around
a radar sensor is scratched or dented,
or the front bumper has become par-
tially disengaged
Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
Do not modify the radar sensors or
their surrounding area on the front
bumper.
In the following cases, the radar sensor
must be recalibrated. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
When the radar sensor is removed and
installed, or replaced
When the front bumper is replaced
Do not paint the front bumper any
color other than an official Lexus color.
To avoid malfunction of the front cam-
era
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the front camera may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Keep the windshield clean at all times.
If the windshield is dirty or covered
with an oily film, water droplets, snow,
etc., clean the windshield.
As some glass coating agents may
affect the detection performance of
the front camera, consult any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer. when
using a glass coating agent.
If a glass coating agent is applied to the
windshield, it will still be necessary to
use the windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the area of
the windshield in front of the front
camera.
253
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
If the inner side of the windshield
where the front camera is installed is
dirty, contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, and so forth, to
the outer side of the windshield in front
of the front camera (shaded area in the
illustration).
From the top of the windshield to
approximately 1 cm (0.4 in.) below
the bottom of the front camera
Approximately 36 cm (14.2 in.)
(Approximately 18 cm [7.1 in.] to the
right and left from the center of the
front camera)
If the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera is fogged up or cov-
ered with condensation or ice, use the
windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation or ice. (
P.404)
If water droplets cannot be properly
removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the front camera by
the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
Do not attach window tint to the wind-
shield.
A
B
Replace the windshield if it is damaged
or cracked.
After replacing the windshield, the
front camera must be recalibrated.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer for details.
Do not allow liquids to contact the
front camera.
Do not allow bright lights to shine into
the front camera.
Do not dirty or damage the front cam-
era.
When cleaning the inside of the wind-
shield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens of the front camera.
Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Do not subject the front camera to a
strong impact.
Do not change the installation position
or direction of the front camera or
remove it.
Do not disassemble the front camera.
Do not modify any components of the
vehicle around the front camera
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
Do not attach any accessories to the
hood, front grille or front bumper that
may obstruct the front camera. Con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer for details.
If a surfboard or other long object is to
be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the front cam-
era.
Do not modify the headlights or other
lights.
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Certification
255
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
257
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
259
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal
operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will
become operational.
261
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for
some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such
as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving
in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is covered
with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with
condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign
matter
To clean the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera , use the windshield wipers
or the windshield defogger of the air condi-
tioning system (P.404).
When the temperature around the front
camera is outside of the operational range,
such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an
extremely cold environment
If the front camera is hot, such as after the
vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the
air conditioning system to decrease the tem-
perature around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the vehicle
was parked, depending on its type, the sun-
light reflected from the surface of the sun-
shade may cause the temperature of the
front camera to become excessively high.
If the front camera is cold, such after the
vehicle is parked in an extremely cold envi-
ronment, use the air conditioning system to
increase the temperature around the front
camera.
The area in front of the front camera is
obstructed, such as when the hood is open
or a sticker is attached to the part of the
windshield in front of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to
clear the obstruction.
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
*
:If equipped
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-
cles with Lexus Safety System +)
P.285
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
P.297
AHS (Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem)
*
P.235
*
:If equipped
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
*
P.238
*
:If equipped
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
P.307
*
:If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
P.311
Two types of sensors, located behind
the front grille and windshield, detect
information necessary to operate the
drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Front camera
Lexus Safety System +*
The Lexus Safety System + consists
of the following drive assist systems
and contributes to a safe and com-
fortable driving experience:
Driving assist system
WARNING
Lexus Safety System +
The Lexus Safety System + is designed to
operate under the assumption that the
driver will drive safely, and is designed to
help reduce the impact to the occupants
and the vehicle in the case of a collision
or assist the driver in normal driving con-
ditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recog-
nition accuracy and control performance
that this system can provide, do not
overly rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.
Sensors
A
B
263
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
To avoid malfunction of the radar sen-
sor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Keep the radar sensor and the radar
sensor cover clean at all times.
Radar sensor
Radar sensor cover
If the front of the radar sensor or the front
or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty
or covered with water droplets, snow,
etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor
cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging
them.
Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, radar
sensor cover or surrounding area.
Do not subject the radar sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front
bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
A
B
Do not modify or paint the radar sen-
sor or radar sensor cover.
In the following cases, the radar sensor
must be recalibrated. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
When the radar sensor or front grille
are removed and installed, or replaced
When the front bumper is replaced
To avoid malfunction of the front cam-
era
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the front camera may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Keep the windshield clean at all times.
If the windshield is dirty or covered
with an oily film, water droplets, snow,
etc., clean the windshield.
If a glass coating agent is applied to the
windshield, it will still be necessary to
use the windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the area of
the windshield in front of the front
camera.
If the inner side of the windshield
where the front camera is installed is
dirty, contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, etc., to the outer
side of the windshield in front of the
front camera (shaded area in the illus-
tration).
From the top of the windshield to
approximately 1 cm (0.4 in.) below
the bottom of the front camera
Approximately 20 cm (7.9 in.)
(Approximately 10 cm [4.0 in.] to the
right and left from the center of the
front camera)
If the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera is fogged up or cov-
ered with condensation, or ice, use the
windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation, or ice. (
P.404)
If water droplets cannot be properly
removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the front camera by
the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
Do not attach window tint to the wind-
shield.
Replace the windshield if it is damaged
or cracked.
After replacing the windshield, the
front camera must be recalibrated.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer for details.
Do not allow liquids to contact the
front camera.
A
B
Do not allow bright lights to shine into
the front camera.
Do not dirty or damage the front cam-
era.
When cleaning the inside of the wind-
shield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens of the front camera.
Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Do not subject the front camera to a
strong impact.
Do not change the installation position
or direction of the front camera or
remove it.
Do not disassemble the front camera.
Do not modify any components of the
vehicle around the front camera
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
Do not attach any accessories to the
hood, front grille or front bumper that
may obstruct the front camera. Con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer for details.
If a surfboard or other long object is to
be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the front cam-
era.
Do not modify the headlights or other
lights.
265
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Certification
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
269
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
271
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal
operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will
become operational.
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for
some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such
as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving
in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is covered
with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with
condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign
matter
To clean the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera , use the windshield wipers
or the windshield defogger of the air condi-
tioning system (P.404).
When the temperature around the front
camera is outside of the operational range,
such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an
extremely cold environment
If the front camera is hot, such as after the
vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the
air conditioning system to decrease the tem-
perature around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the vehicle
was parked, depending on its type, the sun-
light reflected from the surface of the sun-
shade may cause the temperature of the
front camera to become excessively high.
If the front camera is cold, such after the
vehicle is parked in an extremely cold envi-
ronment, use the air conditioning system to
increase the temperature around the front
camera.
The area in front of the front camera is
obstructed, such as when the hood is open
or a sticker is attached to the part of the
windshield in front of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to
clear the obstruction.
273
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Pedestrian alert
When the system determines that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision
with a stationary or moving pedestrian
in front of your vehicle, a message will
be displayed on the head-up display to
warn the driver.
Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high, a
buzzer will sound and a warning mes-
sage will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking
force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the collision.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A)
The pre-collision system uses a
front radar sensor and front camera
to detect vehicles and pedestri-
ans/bicyclists in front of your vehi-
cle and front side radar sensors to
detect vehicles approaching from
the front left or right side. When the
system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision with a
vehicle or pedestrian/bicyclist is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action
and the potential brake pressure is
increased to help the driver avoid
the collision. If the system deter-
mines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a vehicle or pedes-
trian/bicyclist is extremely high, the
brakes are automatically applied to
help avoid the collision or help
reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disa-
bled/enabled and the warning timing
can be changed. (P.277)
System functions
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intersection right/left turn assis-
tance
If the system determines that there is a
high possibility of a collision in the fol-
lowing situations, it will assist with
Pre-collision warning and, if necessary
Pre-collision braking. Depending on
the configuration of the intersection, it
may not be possible to support.
When you turn right/left at an inter-
section and cross the path of an
oncoming vehicle
When you turn right/left, pedestrian
is detected in the forward direction
and estimated to enter your vehi-
cle’s path (bicyclists are not
detected.)
Active steering assist
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a collision with an object, such
as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high,
even though the brakes are applied,
and that the collision may be avoidable
through steering control, the system
will steer the vehicle automatically to
help avoid the collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision.
Active Assist for seat belts (front
seats only)
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is high, the
system will retract the seat belts. Addi-
tionally, the system may retract the seat
belts if the brakes are applied suddenly
or control of the vehicle is lost.
Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-
senger’s seat / power rear seat [if
equipped])
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is high, it may
move the seatbacks of the front pas-
senger’s seat and power rear seats to
the upright position automatically, if
reclined.
If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be
moved by the pre-collision seat function.
Suspension control
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-
tem (P.384) will control the damp-
ing force of the shock absorbers to
help maintain an appropriate vehicle
posture.
275
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
Limitations of the pre-collision system
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system
instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system
will not prevent collisions or lessen col-
lision damage or injury in every situa-
tion. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Although this system is designed to
help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effective-
ness may change according to various
conditions, therefore the system may
not always be able to achieve the same
level of performance.
Read the following conditions care-
fully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
Conditions under which the system
may operate even if there is no possi-
bility of a collision:
P.280
Conditions under which the system
may not operate properly:
P.282
Do not attempt to test the operation of
the pre-collision system yourself.
Depending on the objects used for
testing (dummies, cardboard objects
imitating detectable objects, etc.), the
system may not operate properly, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
Pre-collision braking
When the pre-collision braking func-
tion is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-
tion of the pre-collision braking func-
tion, the pre-collision braking function
operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
The pre-collision braking function may
not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the acceler-
ator pedal is being depressed strongly
or the steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly prevent the pre-collision braking
function from operating.
In some situations, while the pre-colli-
sion braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be
canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
If the brake pedal is being depressed,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
Active steering assist
The steering wheel may turn automati-
cally when active steering assist is
operating.
As active steering assist operation will
be canceled when the system deter-
mines that a collision has been
avoided, operate the steering wheel as
necessary.
In the following situations, the system
may determine that the driver is taking
evasive action. In this case, the active
steering assist may not operate or may
be canceled.
If the accelerator pedal is being
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is being operated. In this case
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and the
pre-collision braking may not operate.
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-
sion system
The pre-collision system can be ena-
bled/disabled on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
WARNING
In some situations, while the active
steering assist is operating, operation
of the function may be canceled if the
accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is turned
and the system determines that the
driver is taking evasive action.
When the active steering assist is
operating, if the steering wheel is held
firmly or is operated in the opposite
direction to that which the system is
generating torque, the function may be
canceled.
If the brake pedal is depressed, the sys-
tem may determine that the driver is
taking evasive action and the active
steering assist operation may be
delayed.
Active Asssit for seat belts
If the Active Assist has operated and the
seat belts are locked in a retracted posi-
tion, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place, release and retract the seat
belts to unlock them and then fasten
them again.
Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can
be unlocked by slightly retracting it with-
out releasing it.
When to disable the pre-collision sys-
tem
In the following situations, disable the
system, as it may not operate properly,
possibly leading to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury:
When the vehicle is being towed
When your vehicle is towing another
vehicle
When transporting the vehicle via
truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
When the vehicle is raised on a lift with
the engine running and the tires are
allowed to rotate freely
When inspecting the vehicle using a
drum tester such as a chassis
dynamometer or speedometer tester,
or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
When a strong impact has been
applied to the front bumper, rear
bumper or front grille, due to an acci-
dent or other reasons
If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-
ble manner, such as when the vehicle
has been in an accident or is malfunc-
tioning
When the vehicle is driven in a sporty
manner or off-road
When the tires are not properly
inflated
When the tires are very worn
When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed
When tire chains are installed
When a compact spare tire or an
emergency tire puncture repair kit is
used
If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may
obstruct a radar sensor or the front
camera is temporarily installed to the
vehicle
Changing settings of the pre-col-
lision system
277
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
The system is automatically enabled each
time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-
ing light will turn on and a message will
be displayed on the multi-information
display.
If the pre-collision system is disabled,
the pedestrian alert system will also be
disabled.
Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian
alert system
The pedestrian alert can be ena-
bled/disabled on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
Changing the pre-collision warn-
ing timing
The pre-collision warning timing can
be changed on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
The warning timing setting is retained
when the engine switch is turned off. How-
ever, if the pre-collision system is disabled
and re-enabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (middle).
1Early
2Middle
This is the default setting.
3Late
Changing the pedestrian alert tim-
ing
If the pre-collision warning timing is
changed, the pedestrian alert timing
will also be changed accordingly.
Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a vehicle, pedestrian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side collision with a
vehicle is high. Each function is operational at the following speeds:
Pedestrian alert
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Pedestrians Approx. 30 to 65 km/h (20 to 40 mph)
278
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Pre-collision warning
Pre-collision brake assist
Pre-collision braking
Active steering assist
Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision warning)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to
110 mph)
Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to
110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to
50 mph)
Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to
50 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Approaching vehicle speed
Vehicles approaching from
the front left or right side
Approx. 10 to 60 km/h (7 to
37 mph)
Approx. 15 to 60 km/h (10 to
37 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20
to 110 mph)
Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20
to 110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20
to 50 mph)
Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20
to 50 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Approaching vehicle speed
Vehicles approaching from
the front left or right side
Approx. 30 to 60 km/h (19
to 37 mph)
Approx. 15 to 60 km/h (10 to
37 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Preceding vehicles Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to
110 mph)
Approx. 5 to 180 km/h (3 to
110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to
50 mph)
Approx. 5 to 80 km/h (3 to
50 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Pedestrians Approx. 40 to 65 km/h (25 to 40 mph)
Guardrail Approx. 60 to 80 km/h (37 to 50 mph)
279
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersec-
tion which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.
Intersection right/left turn assistance (pre-collision braking)
When the turn signal lights are not flashing, support for turning left or right at an intersec-
tion which targets oncoming vehicles does not work.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not
been driven for a certain amount of time
If the shift position is in R
When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pedestrian alert and pre-collision
warning function will be operational)
When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into
When an object is approaching the area the vehicle is to be steered into
Vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist detec-
tion function
The pre-collision system detects vehicles,
pedestrians and bicyclists based on the size,
profile, and motion of the person. However,
a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist may not be
detected depending on the surrounding
brightness and the motion, posture, and
angle of the person, preventing the system
from operating properly. (P.282)
The illustration shows an image of vehicles,
pedestrians and bicyclists.
Cancelation of pre-collision braking
and active steering assist
If either of the following occur while the
pre-collision braking function is operating, it
will be canceled:
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Oncoming vehicle
speed
Relative speed
between your vehicle
and object
Oncoming vehicles Approx. 10 to 25
km/h (7 to 15 mph)
Approx. 30 to 55
km/h (20 to 35 mph)
Approx. 40 to 80
km/h (25 to 50 mph)
Pedestrians Approx. 10 to 25
km/h (7 to 15 mph) Approx. 10 to 25
km/h (7 to 15 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Oncoming vehicle
speed
Relative speed
between your vehicle
and object
Oncoming vehicles Approx. 15 to 25 km/h
(10 to 15 mph)
Approx. 30 to 45
km/h (20 to 28 mph)
Approx. 45 to 70
km/h (28 to 43 mph)
Pedestrians Approx. 10 to 25
km/h (7 to 15 mph) Approx. 10 to 25
km/h (7 to 15 mph)
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly.
The steering wheel is turned sharply or
abruptly.
Conditions under which the system may
operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
In some situations such as the following,
the system may determine that there is a
possibility of a frontal collision and oper-
ate.
When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist
When changing lanes while overtaking a
vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist
When approaching a vehicle, pedestrian
or bicyclist in an adjacent lane or on the
roadside, such as when changing the
course of travel or driving on a winding
road
When rapidly closing on a vehicle,
pedestrian, bicyclist, etc.
When approaching objects on the road-
side, such as vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist,
guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street
lights, trees, walls, etc.
When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicy-
clist or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve
When there are patterns or paint in front
of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a
vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist
When the front of your vehicle is hit by
water, snow, dust, etc.
When overtaking a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist that is changing lanes or making
a right/left turn
When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist in an oncoming lane that is
stopped to make a right/left turn
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist
approaches very close and then stops
before entering the path of your vehicle
If the front of your vehicle is raised or low-
ered, such as when on an uneven or
undulating road surface
When driving on a road surrounded by a
structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron
bridge
When there is a metal object (manhole
cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a
protrusion on the road surface or road-
side
When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist
approaches very close to the vehicle
When passing through a place with a low
281
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
structure above the road such as a low
ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic
sign, etc.
When passing under an object (road
sign, billboard, etc.)
When approaching an electric toll gate
barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
When using an automatic car wash
When driving through or under objects
that may contact the vehicle, such as thick
grass, tree branches, or a banner
When driving through steam or smoke
When driving near an object that reflects
radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
When driving near a TV tower, broad-
casting station, electric power plant,
radar equipped vehicles, etc., or other
location where strong radio waves or
electrical noise may be present
When there are many things which can
reflect the radio waves of the radar in the
vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel
roads, snow covered road that have
tracks, etc.)
While making a right/left turn, when an
oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedes-
trian has already exited the path of your
vehicle
While making a right/left turn, closely in
front of an oncoming vehicle or a cross-
ing pedestrian.
While making a right/left turn, when an
oncoming vehicle or a crossing pedes-
trian stops before entering the path of
your vehicle
While making a right/left turn, when an
oncoming vehicle turns right/left in front
of your vehicle
While steering into the direction of
oncoming traffic
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a
narrow road
When driving close to objects such as
walls or poles on a median
When passing an oncoming vehicle
around a sharp curve
When passing a vehicle which is making
a left/right turn
When being passed by a vehicle
approaching from the left or right side in
front of your vehicle
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When making a left/right turn while a
vehicle is approaching from the left or
right side in front of your vehicle
When passing an object on the side of the
road, such as a parked vehicle
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a
S curve
When there is an object that may be mis-
taken for a pedestrian, such as a utility
pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at
the entrance of a curve
When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on
the roadside at the entrance of a curve
If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or
motorcycle
The system may operate the pedestrian
alert unnecessarily if it detects the follow-
ing:
Pedestrians on a sidewalk
Bicycles and motorcycles
Patterns or paint on the road, a wall,
median, billboard, etc. that may be mis-
taken for a pedestrian or bicyclist
Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
In some situations, such as the following,
a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist may not
be detected by the sensors, preventing
the system from operating properly:
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is
approaching your vehicle
When your vehicle or a vehicle, pedes-
trian or bicyclist is wobbling
If a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist makes
an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden
swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
When your vehicle approaches a vehicle,
pedestrian or bicyclist rapidly
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is
not directly in front of your vehicle
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is
near a wall, fence, guardrail, manhole
cover, vehicle, steel plate on the road, etc.
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is
under a structure
When part of a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist is hidden by an object, such as
large baggage, an umbrella, or guardrail
When there are many things which can
reflect the radio waves of the radar in the
vicinity (tunnels, truss bridges, gravel
roads, snow covered road that have
tracks, etc.)
When there is an effect on the radio
waves to the radar that is installed on
another vehicle
When multiple vehicles, pedestrians or
bicyclists are close together
If the sun or other light is shining directly
on a vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist or
guardrail ahead
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist is
a shade of white and looks extremely
bright
When a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist
appears to be nearly the same color or
283
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
brightness as its surroundings
If a vehicles, pedestrians or bicyclists cuts
or suddenly emerges in front of your
vehicle
When the front of your vehicle is hit by
water, snow, dust, etc.
When a very bright light ahead, such as
the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the front cam-
era
When approaching the side or front of a
vehicle ahead
If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a per-
sonal mobility vehicle
If a preceding vehicle has a small rear
end, such as an unloaded truck
If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer
If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which
protrudes past its rear bumper
If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,
such as a tractor or side car
If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle,
a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a
bicycle ridden by more than one person,
or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with
a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)
If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a
bicyclist ahead is shorter than approxi-
mately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approxi-
mately 2 m (6.5 ft.)
If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing over-
sized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt,
etc.), making their silhouette obscure
If a pedestrian is bending forward or
squatting or bicyclist is bending forward
If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast
If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheel-
chair, bicycle or other vehicle
When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
When driving through steam or smoke
When the surrounding area is dim, such
as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in
a tunnel, making a vehicle, pedestrian or
bicyclist appear to be nearly the same
color as its surroundings
When driving in a place where the sur-
rounding brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
When driving in a location where there
are many objects which reflect radar,
such as a tunnel or parking garage
After the engine has started the vehicle
has not been driven for a certain amount
of time
While making a left/right turn and for a
few seconds after making a left/right turn
While driving on a curve and for a few
seconds after driving on a curve
If your vehicle is skidding
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered
If the wheels are misaligned
If a wiper blade is blocking the front cam-
era
The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds.
When driving on a hill
If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-
aligned
If the headlights are misaligned
When approaching a guardrail at a wide
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems
or narrow angle
When a vehicle approaches your vehicle
from the front left or right side while your
vehicle is entering an intersection with
poor visibility
When a vehicle approaches your vehicle
from the rear left or right side
When a vehicle approaches the side of
your vehicle at a shallow angle
When driving on a road with a grade that
changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not
illuminated by the headlights at night, in a
tunnel, etc.
Pedestrians and bicyclists which change
speed or direction abruptly
Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly
emerge from behind a vehicle or large
object
Pedestrians and bicyclists which are
extremely close to the side of the vehicle
(outside rear view mirror, etc.)
When driving in a traffic lane separated
by more than one lane where oncoming
vehicles are driving while making a
right/left turn
When largely out of place with the oppo-
site facing targeted oncoming vehicle
during a right/left turn
While making a right/left turn, when a
pedestrian approaches from behind or
side of your vehicle
In some situations, such as the following,
the sensors may not detect the lane lines
or a safe space the vehicle can be steered
into, preventing the active steering assist
from operating properly:
When the white (yellow) lane lines are
difficult to see, such as when they are
faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is
cast upon them
When the lane is more wide or narrow
than normal
When there is a light and dark pattern on
the road surface, such as due to road
repairs
If the system determines that a collision
can be avoided by only using the brakes
When a pedestrian is detected near the
centerline of the vehicle
In some situations such as the following,
sufficient braking force or steering force
may not be obtained, preventing the sys-
tem from performing properly:
If the braking functions cannot operate to
their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,
or wet
If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
When the vehicle is being driven on a
gravel road or other slippery surface
If there are deep ruts in the road
When driving on a slope
When driving on a horizontally slanted
road
Some guardrails, such as the following,
may not be detected by the sensors, pre-
venting the system from operating prop-
erly:
Guardrails which are less than approxi-
mately 60 cm (1.9 ft.) tall
Short guardrails
Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable
guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles,
etc.)
Guardrails which are not illuminated by
the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.
Guardrails which appear to be nearly the
same color or brightness as their
surroundings
Guardrails which appear to be nearly the
same shape as their surroundings (walls,
etc.)
285
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Guardrails which are over a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
Guardrails which are hidden behind thick
grass
Guardrails which are extremely close to
the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)
Curved guardrails or guardrails at the
entrance of a curve
In some situations such as the following,
the system may detect a pedestrian and
display a warning on the head-up display,
even though no pedestrian exists:
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.)
When driving on a slope
When driving on a horizontally slanted
road
If the driver’s posture (driver seat posi-
tion) is extreme, such as excessively
reclined
If the head-up display position is set
extremely high
If VSC is disabled
If VSC is disabled (P.384), the
pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-
sion braking functions are also disabled.
The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System +)
The pre-collision system uses a
radar sensor and front camera to
detect objects (P.286) in front of
the vehicle. When the system
determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with an object is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action
and the potential brake pressure is
increased to help the driver avoid
the collision. If the system deter-
mines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with an object is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
help reduce the impact of the colli-
sion.
The pre-collision system can be disa-
bled/enabled and the warning timing
can be changed. (P.288)
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The countries and areas for each region listed in the table are current as of Novem-
ber 2020. However, depending on when the vehicle was sold, the countries and
areas of each region may be different. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high, a
buzzer will sound and a warning mes-
sage will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking
force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the collision.
Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-
senger’s seat / power rear seat [if
equipped])
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is high, it may
move the seatbacks of the front pas-
senger’s seat and power rear seats to
the upright position automatically, if
reclined.
If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be
moved by the pre-collision seat function.
Suspension control
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-
tem (P.384) will control the damp-
ing force of the shock absorbers to
help maintain an appropriate vehicle
posture.
Detectable objects
Regions Detectable objects Countries/areas
A
Vehicles
Bicyclists
Pedestrians
Ukraine, Kazakhstan, Russia
BVehicles Azerbaijan, Georgia
System functions
287
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
Limitations of the pre-collision system
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system
instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system
will not prevent collisions or lessen col-
lision damage or injury in every situa-
tion. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Although this system is designed to
help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effective-
ness may change according to various
conditions, therefore the system may
not always be able to achieve the same
level of performance.
Read the following conditions care-
fully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
Conditions under which the system
may operate even if there is no possi-
bility of a collision:
P.290
Conditions under which the system
may not operate properly:
P.291
Do not attempt to test the operation of
the pre-collision system yourself.
Depending on the objects used for
testing (dummies, cardboard objects
imitating detectable objects, etc.), the
system may not operate properly, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
Pre-collision braking
When the pre-collision braking func-
tion is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-
tion of the pre-collision braking func-
tion, the pre-collision braking function
operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
The pre-collision braking function may
not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the acceler-
ator pedal is being depressed strongly
or the steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly prevent the pre-collision braking
function from operating.
In some situations, while the pre-colli-
sion braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be
canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
If the brake pedal is being depressed,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
When to disable the pre-collision sys-
tem
In the following situations, disable the
system, as it may not operate properly,
possibly leading to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury:
When the vehicle is being towed
When your vehicle is towing another
vehicle
When transporting the vehicle via
truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
When the vehicle is raised on a lift with
the engine running and the tires are
allowed to rotate freely
When inspecting the vehicle using a
drum tester such as a chassis
dynamometer or speedometer tester,
or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-
sion system
The pre-collision system can be ena-
bled/disabled on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each
time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-
ing light will turn on and a message will
be displayed on the multi-information
display.
Changing the pre-collision warn-
ing timing
The pre-collision warning timing can
be changed on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
The warning timing setting is retained
when the engine switch is turned off. How-
ever, if the pre-collision system is disabled
and re-enabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (middle).
1Early
2Middle
This is the default setting.
3Late
WARNING
When a strong impact is applied to the
front bumper or front grille, due to an
accident or other reasons
If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-
ble manner, such as when the vehicle
has been in an accident or is malfunc-
tioning
When the vehicle is driven in a sporty
manner or off-road
When the tires are not properly
inflated
When the tires are very worn
When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed
When tire chains are installed
When a compact spare tire or an
emergency tire puncture repair kit is
used
If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may
obstruct the radar sensor or front cam-
era is temporarily installed to the vehi-
cle
Changing settings of the pre-col-
lision system
289
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a detected object is high.
Each function is operational at the following speed
Pre-collision warning
Pre-collision brake assist
Pre-collision braking
*
: Applicable to vehicles designed for regions that detection of pedestrians and/or bicy-
clists is possible (P.286)
The system may not operate in the following situations:
If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not
been driven for a certain amount of time
If the shift position is in R
When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will
be operational)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to
110 mph)
Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to
110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
*
Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to
50 mph)
Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to
50 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20
to 110 mph)
Approx. 30 to 180 km/h (20
to 110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
*
Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20
to 50 mph)
Approx. 30 to 80 km/h (20
to 50 mph)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to
110 mph)
Approx. 10 to 180 km/h (7 to
110 mph)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
*
Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to
50 mph)
Approx. 10 to 80 km/h (7 to
50 mph)
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Object detection function
The system detects objects based on their
size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object
may not be detected depending on the sur-
rounding brightness and the motion, pos-
ture, and angle of the detected object,
preventing the system from operating prop-
erly. (P.291)
The illustration shows an image of detecta-
ble objects.
Region A
Region B
Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the
pre-collision braking function is operating, it
will be canceled:
The accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly.
The steering wheel is turned sharply or
abruptly.
Conditions under which the system may
operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
In some situations such as the following,
the system may determine that there is a
possibility of a frontal collision and oper-
ate.
When passing a detectable object, etc.
When changing lanes while overtaking a
detectable object, etc.
When approaching a detectable object
in an adjacent lane or on the roadside,
such as when changing the course of
travel or driving on a winding road
When rapidly closing on a detectable
object, etc.
When approaching objects on the road-
side, such as detectable objects, guard-
rails, utility poles, trees, or walls
When there is detectable object or other
object by the roadside at the entrance of
a curve
When there are patterns or paint in front
of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a
detectable object
When the front of your vehicle is hit by
water, snow, dust, etc.
When overtaking a detectable object
that is changing lanes or making a
right/left turn
When passing a detectable object in an
oncoming lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn
291
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When a detectable object approaches
very close and then stops before entering
the path of your vehicle
If the front of your vehicle is raised or low-
ered, such as when on an uneven or
undulating road surface
When driving on a road surrounded by a
structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron
bridge
When there is a metal object (manhole
cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protru-
sion in front of your vehicle
When passing under an object (road
sign, billboard, etc.)
When approaching an electric toll gate
barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
When using an automatic car wash
When driving through or under objects
that may contact your vehicle, such as
thick grass, tree branches, or a banner
When driving through steam or smoke
When driving near an object that reflects
radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
When driving near a TV tower, broad-
casting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present
Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
In some situations such as the following,
an object may not be detected by the
radar sensor and front camera, prevent-
ing the system from operating properly:
When a detectable object is approaching
your vehicle
When your vehicle or a detectable object
is wobbling
If a detectable object makes an abrupt
maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
When your vehicle approaches a detect-
able object rapidly
When a detectable object is not directly
in front of your vehicle
When a detectable object is near a wall,
fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle,
steel plate on the road, etc.
When a detectable object is under a
structure
When part of a detectable object is hid-
den by an object, such as large baggage,
an umbrella, or guardrail
When multiple detectable objects are
close together
If the sun or other light is shining directly
on a detectable object
When a detectable object is a shade of
white and looks extremely bright
When a detectable object appears to be
nearly the same color or brightness as its
surroundings
If a detectable object cuts or suddenly
emerges in front of your vehicle
When the front of your vehicle is hit by
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
water, snow, dust, etc.
When a very bright light ahead, such as
the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the front cam-
era
When approaching the side or front of a
vehicle ahead
If a vehicle ahead is a bicycle
*1
or motor-
cycle
If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a per-
sonal mobility vehicle
If a preceding vehicle has a small rear
end, such as an unloaded truck
If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer
If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which
protrudes past its rear bumper
If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,
such as a tractor or side car
If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle,
a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a
bicycle ridden by more than one person,
or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with
a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)
*2
If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a
bicyclist ahead is shorter than approxi-
mately 1 m (3.2 ft.) or taller than approxi-
mately 2 m (6.5 ft.)
*2
If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing over-
sized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt,
etc.), making their silhouette obscure
*2
If a pedestrian is bending forward or
squatting or bicyclist is bending for-
ward
*2
If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast
*2
If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheel-
chair, bicycle or other vehicle
*2
When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
When driving through steam or smoke
When the surrounding area is dim, such
as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in
a tunnel, making a detectable object
appear to be nearly the same color as its
surroundings
When driving in a place where the sur-
rounding brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
After the engine has started the vehicle
has not been driven for a certain amount
of time
While making a left/right turn and for a
few seconds after making a left/right turn
While driving on a curve and for a few
seconds after driving on a curve
If your vehicle is skidding
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered
If the wheels are misaligned
If a wiper blade is blocking the front cam-
era
The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds
When driving on a hill
If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-
aligned
In some situations such as the following,
sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from
performing properly:
If the braking functions cannot operate to
293
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,
or wet
If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
When the vehicle is being driven on a
gravel road or other slippery surface
*1
: Applicable to vehicles designed for
countries/areas that detection of bicy-
clists is not possible (P.286)
*2
: Applicable to vehicles designed for
countries/areas that detection of
pedestrians and/or bicyclists is possible
(P.286)
If VSC is disabled
If VSC is disabled (P.385), the
pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-
sion braking functions are also disabled.
The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*
: If equipped
When the system detects a vehicle
approaching from the left or right in
front of your vehicle when approaching
an intersection, a notification will be
displayed on the head-up display and
panoramic view monitor
*
.
*
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
When the system determines that your
vehicle may be about to enter an inter-
section even though a vehicle is
approaching from the left or right in
front of your vehicle, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display to
urge you to depress the brake pedal.
Head-up display
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert)*
When approaching an intersection
at low speed, the radar sensors on
the front side of the vehicle can
detect approaching vehicles to the
left and right of the front of the vehi-
cle. In this case, the head-up display
is used to inform the driver of
detected vehicles.
FCTA system functions
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Multi-information display
Enabling/disabling the FCTA sys-
tem
The FCTA system can be enabled/dis-
abled on (P.93) of the
multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each
time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Changing the alert timing
The FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
timing can be changed on
(P.93) of the multi-information dis-
play.
The set alert timing is retained when the
engine switch is turned off. However, if the
FCTA system is disabled and re-enabled,
the alert timing will return to the default
setting (middle).
1Early
2Middle
This is the default setting.
3Late
WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the
function
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The FCTA system is a supplementary
system that informs the driver of vehicles
approaching from the left and right of the
front of the vehicle.
Do not overly rely on the FCTA system.
Over reliance on the system may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
The details of the warning display may
differ from the actual traffic conditions.
Although the warning display will stop
being displayed after a certain amount of
time, this does not indicate that vehicles
or pedestrians are no longer around your
vehicle.
Changing settings of the FCTA
system
295
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
The FCTA function is operational when
The system operates when all of the follow-
ing conditions are met.
A shift position other than P or R is
selected.
Vehicle speed is approximately 15 km/h
(9 mph) or lower.
A vehicle is approaching from the left or
right in front of your vehicle at a speed
between approximately 10 km/h (6 mph)
and 60 km/h (37 mph).
There are no preceding vehicles ahead of
your vehicle.
The accelerator pedal is not strongly
depressed.
The brake pedal is not being strongly
depressed.
Situations in which the system may
operate even though no vehicles are
approaching
In certain situations, such as the following,
the system may operate even though no
vehicles are approaching:
When approaching objects on the road-
side, such as guardrails, traffic signs, util-
ity poles, street lights, trees, or walls
When driving near a TV tower, broad-
casting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present
When passing an object on the side of the
road, such as a parked vehicle
When a vehicle or pedestrian is
approaching from the left or right in front
of your vehicle from far away
When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving
within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane
your vehicle is driving in
When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving
on a sidewalk
When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving
away from your vehicle
When a vehicle approaching from the left
or right in front of your vehicle is deceler-
ating or stops
When a vehicle approaching from the left
or right in front of your vehicle makes a
left/right turn immediately in front of your
vehicle
When a pedestrian is approaching your
vehicle
When an oncoming vehicle makes a
left/right turn
When your vehicle enters an intersection
before a vehicle approaching from the
left or right in front of your vehicle
When stopped at traffic light and a vehi-
cle approaches from the left or right in
front of your vehicle
When driving in a location where there
are objects which reflect radar, such as
vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs,
etc.
When making a left/right turn in front of
an approaching vehicle
When passing an oncoming vehicle
When being overtaken by another vehi-
cle
When driving next to another vehicle or a
pedestrian
When a vehicle or pedestrian
approaches the side of your vehicle
Some objects, such as the following, may be
detected and cause the FCTA system to
operate:
Pedestrians
Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, a
vehicle may not be detected by a front side
radar sensor, preventing the system from
operating properly:
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If the front end or side of an approaching
vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.)
If the front end of an approaching vehicle
is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.)
If the ground clearance of an approach-
ing vehicle is extremely high
If the shape of an approaching vehicle is
unusual (tractors, motorcycles with side-
cars, etc.)
If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection
area on the left or right in front of your
vehicle from a parking lot, etc.
If an approaching vehicle moves sud-
denly (sudden steering, acceleration,
deceleration, etc.)
When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
After the engine has been started and the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
When driving on a road with a grade that
changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
When driving around a sharp curve or on
an undulating road
If a vehicle is approaching from the left or
right of the front of your vehicle diago-
nally
When a vehicle is approaching from the
left or right in front of your vehicle from
far away
When there is an object between your
vehicle and an approaching vehicle
When driving in a location where there
are objects which reflect radar, such as
guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc.
When a group of vehicles which are close
together approach
Immediately after the FCTA system has
been enabled
If the PCS warning light illuminates and
a message is displayed on the
multi-information display
The system may be temporarily unavailable
or may be malfunctioning.
297
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
:If equipped
While driving on a road with clear
white (yellow) lane lines, the LTA sys-
tem warns the driver if the vehicle may
deviate from the current lane or
course
*
, and also can slightly operate
the steering wheel to help avoid devia-
tion from the lane or course
*
. Also,
while the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range is operating, this
system will operate the steering wheel
to maintain the vehicle’s lane position.
The LTA system recognizes white (yel-
low) lane lines or a course
*
using the
front camera. Additionally, it detects
preceding vehicles using the front
camera and radar.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*
Summary of function
WARNING
Before using LTA system
Do not rely solely upon the LTA sys-
tem. The LTA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce
the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by pay-
ing careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the
steering wheel to correct the path of
the vehicle. Also, the driver must take
adequate breaks when fatigued, such
as from driving for a long period of
time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving
operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
When not using the LTA system, use
the LTA switch to turn the system off.
Situations unsuitable for LTA system
In the following situations, use the LTA
switch to turn the system off. Failure to do
so may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Vehicle is driven on a road surface
which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.
Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered
road.
White (yellow) lines are difficult to see
due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or
restricted lane due to construction
work.
Vehicle is driven in a construction
zone.
A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are
equipped.
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
When the tires have been excessively
worn, or when the tire inflation pres-
sure is low.
During emergency towing.
Preventing LTA system malfunctions
and operations performed by mistake
Do not modify the headlights or place
stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
Do not modify the suspension etc. If
the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not install or place anything on the
hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.).
If your windshield needs repairs, con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer.
Conditions in which functions may
not operate properly
In the following situations, the functions
may not operate properly and the vehicle
may depart from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to your
surroundings and operate the steering
wheel to correct the path of the vehicle
without relying solely on the functions.
When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (
P.302) and the preced-
ing vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehi-
cle may follow the preceding vehicle
and also change lanes.)
When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (
P.302) and the preced-
ing vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle
may sway accordingly and depart from
the lane.)
When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (
P.302) and the preced-
ing vehicle departs from its lane. (Your
vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (
P.302) and the preced-
ing vehicle is being driven extremely
close to the left/right lane line. (Your
vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
Vehicle is being driven around a sharp
curve.
Objects or patterns that could be mis-
taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-
ent on the side of the road (guardrails,
reflective poles, etc.).
299
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow)
lines, etc. are present due to road
repair.
There are shadows on the road that
run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
The vehicle is driven in an area without
white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a
tollgate or checkpoint, or at an inter-
section, etc.
The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Raised pavement marker” or stones
are present.
The white (yellow) lines cannot be
seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
The vehicle is driven on a road surface
that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
The traffic lines are yellow (which may
be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
The white (yellow) lines cross over a
curb, etc.
The vehicle is driven on a bright sur-
face, such as concrete.
If the edge of the road is not clear or
straight.
The vehicle is driven on a surface that
is bright due to reflected light, etc.
The vehicle is driven in an area where
the brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
Light from the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the
camera.
The vehicle is driven on a slope.
The vehicle is driven on a road which
tilts left or right, or a winding road.
The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or
rough road.
The traffic lane is excessively narrow
or wide.
The vehicle is extremely tilted due to
carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
The distance to the preceding vehicle
is extremely short.
The vehicle is moving up and down a
large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road
seams).
When driving in a tunnel or at night
with the headlights off or when a head-
light is dim due to its lens being dirty or
it being misaligned.
300
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either a
warning buzzer will sound or the steer-
ing wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates, check the area
around your vehicle and carefully operate
the steering wheel to move the vehicle
back to the center of the lane.
Vehicle with BSM: When the system deter-
mines that the vehicle might depart from its
lane and that the possibility of a collision
with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the lane departure alert will
operate even if the turn signals are operat-
ing.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
Steering assist function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, the system provides assis-
tance as necessary by operating the
steering wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the vehicle
in its lane.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a fixed
amount of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
Vehicle with BSM: When the system deter-
mines that the vehicle might depart from its
lane and that the possibility of a collision
with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent
lane is high, the steering assist function will
operate even if the turn signals are operat-
ing.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
WARNING
The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
The vehicle is affected by wind from a
vehicle driven in a nearby lane.
The vehicle has just changed lanes or
crossed an intersection.
Tires which differ by structure, manu-
facturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.
When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed.
Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds.
Functions included in LTA system
301
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying within a
lane, the warning buzzer will sound and
a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert the
driver.
Lane centering function
This function is linked with dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed
range and provides the required assis-
tance by operating the steering wheel
to keep the vehicle in its current lane.
When dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is not operating, the lane
centering function does not operate.
In situations where the white (yellow) lane
lines are difficult to see or are not visible,
such as when in a traffic jam, this function
will operate to help follow a preceding
vehicle by monitoring the position of the
preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a fixed
amount of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
302
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA
system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA
system off.
When the LTA system is turned on or off,
operation of the LTA system continues in
the same condition the next time the
engine is started.
LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator
informs the driver of the system operation
status.
Illuminated in white: LTA system is operat-
ing.
Illuminated in green: Steering wheel assis-
tance of the steering assist function or lane
centering function is operating.
Flashing in orange: Lane departure alert
function is operating.
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving support sys-
tem information display.
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of
the steering assist function or lane center-
ing function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are displayed:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
lane centering function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is displayed:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
steering assist function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are flashing:
Alerts the driver that their input is neces-
sary to stay in the center of the lane (lane
centering function).
Lane departure alert function dis-
play
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving support sys-
tem information display.
Inside of displayed lines is white
Indicates that the system is recognizing
Turning LTA system on
Indications on multi-information
display
A
B
C
303
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
white (yellow) lines or a course
*
. When
the vehicle departs from its lane, the
white line displayed on the side the
vehicle departs from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed lines is black
Indicates that the system is not able to
recognize white (yellow) lines or a
course
*
or is temporarily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
Follow-up cruising display
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving support sys-
tem information display.
Indicates that steering assist of the lane
centering function is operating by monitor-
ing the position of a preceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display is dis-
played, if the preceding vehicle moves,
your vehicle may move in the same way.
Always pay careful attention to your
surroundings and operate the steering
wheel as necessary to correct the path of
the vehicle and ensure safety.
Warning display (vehicles with
Lexus Safety System + A)
When the lane centering function is oper-
ating and the system determines that the
vehicle may depart from its lane due to a
sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging
the driver to operate the steering wheel,
will be displayed.
In some situations a warning display may
not be displayed.
Some displays, which are the same as
those displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display, will be displayed.
LTA system curve display on the
head-up display
The curve display on the head-up display
changes according to the direction and
D
Indications on head-up display
(vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A)
304
4-5. Using the driving support systems
curvature of the curve.
Operation conditions of each function
Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
LTA is turned on.
Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h
(32 mph) or more.
*1
System recognizes white (yellow) lane
lines or a course
*2
. (When a white [yel-
low] line or course
*2
is recognized on
only one side, the system will operate
only for the recognized side.)
Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m
(9.8 ft.) or more.
Turn signal lever is not operated. (Vehicle
with BSM: Except when another vehicle
is in the lane on the side where the turn
signal was operated)
Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.306)
*1
: The function operates even if the vehi-
cle speed is less than approximately 50
km/h (32 mph) when the lane center-
ing function is operating.
*2
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane depar-
ture alert function.
•Setting forSteering Assist” in of the
multi-information display is set to “ON”.
(P.93)
Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated
by a fixed amount or more.
Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
ABS, VSC, TRC and PCS are not oper-
ating.
TRC or VSC is not turned off.
Hands off steering wheel warning is not
displayed. (P.305)
Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the
multi-information display is set to “ON”.
(P.93)
Vehicle speed is approximately 50 km/h
(32 mph) or more.
Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 m
(9.8 ft.) or more.
No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.306)
Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
LTA is turned on.
Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Centre” in of the multi-information
display are set to “ON”. (P.93)
This function recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines or the position of a preceding
vehicle (except when the preceding vehi-
cle is small, such as a motorcycle).
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operating in vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
Width of traffic lane is approximately 3 to
4 m (10 to 13 ft.).
•Turn signal lever is not operated.
Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.306)
Vehicle does not accelerate or
decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
ABS, VSC, TRC and PCS are not oper-
ating.
TRC or VSC is not turned off.
Hands off steering wheel warning is not
displayed. (P.305)
The driver has one or both hands on the
steering wheel. (vehicles with Lexus
Safety System + A)
The vehicle is being driven in the center
of a lane.
Steering assist function is not operating.
305
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Temporary cancelation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer
met, a function may be temporarily
canceled. However, when the operation
conditions are met again, operation of the
function is automatically restored.
(P.304)
If the operation conditions (P.304) are
no longer met while the lane centering
function is operating, the steering wheel
may vibrate and the buzzer may sound to
indicate that the function has been tem-
porarily canceled. However, if the “Alert”
customization setting is set to ,
the system will notify the driver by vibrat-
ing the steering wheel instead of sound-
ing the buzzer.
Steering assist function/lane centering
function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane
departure situation, road conditions, etc.,
the driver may not feel the function is
operating or the function may not oper-
ate at all.
Even if the curve speed reduction func-
tion (P.318) operates, the lane center-
ing function may not be able to drive the
vehicle around a curve successfully.
(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A)
The steering control of the function is
overridden by the driver’s steering wheel
operation.
Do not attempt to test the operation of
the steering assist function.
Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to
hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel
steering wheel vibrations due to the road
conditions, etc.
If the edge of the course
*
is not clear or
straight, the lane departure alert function
may not operate.
Vehicle with BSM: It may not be possible
for the system to determine if there is a
danger of a collision with a vehicle in an
adjacent lane.
Do not attempt to test the operation of
the lane departure alert function.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
Hands off steering wheel warning
In the following situations, a warning mes-
sage urging the driver to hold the steering
wheel and the symbol shown in the illustra-
tion are displayed on the multi-information
display to warn the driver. The warning
stops when the system determines that the
driver holds the steering wheel. Always
keep your hands on the steering wheel
when using this system, regardless of warn-
ings.
Depending on the vehicle condition and
road conditions, the warning may not oper-
ate. Also, if the system determines that the
vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings
will occur earlier than during straight-lane
driving.
When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel, the buzzer
sounds, the driver is warned and the func-
tion is temporarily canceled. This warning
also operates in the same way when the
driver continuously operates the steering
wheel only a small amount.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System +:
When the system determines that the
vehicle may deviate from the lane while
driving around a curve while the lane
306
4-5. Using the driving support systems
centering function is operating.
When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the steering wheel assist
of the steering assist function is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel and the steering
wheel assist is operating, the buzzer
sounds and the driver is warned. Each time
the buzzer sounds, the continuing time of
the buzzer becomes longer.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
In situations such as the following, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect when the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel
(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A):
If a steering wheel cover is installed.
If the driver is wearing gloves.
If something is attached to the steering
wheel.
If the driver is gripping the wood trim,
stitched area, spokes, or other part of the
steering wheel that does not have sen-
sors.
In situations such as the following, the hands
off steering wheel alert may not operate
and the steering assist function and lane
centering function may operate even if the
driver’s hands are off the steering wheel
(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A):
If an object contacts the steering wheel.
If a wide object or arms are held in front
of the steering wheel.
Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that the vehi-
cle is swaying while the vehicle sway warn-
ing function is operating, a buzzer sounds
and a warning message urging the driver to
rest and the symbol shown in the illustration
are simultaneously displayed on the
multi-information display.
Depending on the vehicle and road condi-
tions, the warning may not operate.
Warning message
If the following warning message is dis-
played on the multi-information display and
the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-
low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-
dure. Also, if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
“LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
The system may not be operating properly.
Have the vehicle inspected by any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
“LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled due to
a malfunction in a sensor other than the
front camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait
for a little while, and then turn the LTA sys-
tem back on.
“LTA Unavailable at Current Speed”
The function cannot be used as the vehicle
speed exceeds the LTA operation range.
Drive slower.
Customization
Function settings can be changed.
(Customizable features:P.546)
307
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
:If equipped
The RSA system recognizes specific
road signs using the front camera
and/or navigation system (when speed
limit information is available) to provide
information to the driver via the display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is
being driven over the speed limit, per-
forming prohibited actions, etc.
according to the recognized road
signs, it notifies the driver through a
visual notification and notification
buzzer or steering wheel vibration.
When the front camera recognizes a
sign and/or information of a sign is
available from the navigation system,
the sign will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
When the Driving support system
information display is selected, a
maximum of 3 signs can be dis-
played. (P.93)
When a tab other than the Driving
support system information display
is selected, the following types of
road signs will be displayed.
(P.93)
Speed limit begins/ends sign
Speed limit related information sign
(Expressway, Highway, Urban area, Res-
idential area)
End of prohibition sign
•No-entry sign
*
(when notification is nec-
essary)
Speed limit with supplemental sign
(Ramp way only)
*
: For vehicles with navigation system
RSA (Road Sign Assist)*
Summary of function
WARNING
Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.
RSA is a system which supports the
driver by providing information, but it is
not a replacement for a driver’s own
vision and awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to the
traffic rules.
Indication on the multi-informa-
tion display
308
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If signs other than speed limit signs are rec-
ognized, they will be displayed in an over-
lapping stack under the current speed limit
sign.
The following types of road signs,
including electronic signs and blinking
signs, are recognized.
A non-official (not meeting the Vienna
Convention) or a recently introduced traf-
fic sign may not be recognized.
Speed limit road signs
Speed limit related information
*
*
: Displayed when a sign is recognized but
speed limit information for the road is
not available from the navigation system
No-overtaking road signs
Other road signs
Supported types of road signs
Speed limit begins/Maximum
speed zone begins
Speed limit ends/Maximum
speed zone ends
Motorway entrance
Motorway exit
Expressway entrance
Expressway exit
Urban area beginning
Urban area ending
Urban area beginning
Urban area ending
Residential area beginning
Residential area ending
No overtaking begins
No overtaking ends
No-entry
*
309
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
: For vehicles with navigation system
Speed limit with supplemental
mark
*1
*1
: Displayed simultaneously with speed
limit.
*2
: Contents not recognized.
*3
: If the turn signal indicator is not oper-
ated when changing lanes, the mark
does not display.
In the following situations, the RSA sys-
tem will notify the driver.
When the vehicle speed exceeds
the speed notification threshold of
the speed limit sign displayed, the
sign display will be emphasized and
a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recognizes a
no-entry sign and detects that the
vehicle has entered a no-entry area
based on the map information of the
navigation system, the no-entry sign
flashes and a buzzer will sound. (For
vehicles with navigation system)
If it is detected that your vehicle is
overtaking when a no overtaking
sign is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display, the displayed sign
will flash and a steering wheel will
vibrate.
Depending on the situation, traffic
environment (traffic direction, speed
unit) may be detected incorrectly and a
notification function may not operate
properly.
Setting procedure
1Press or of the meter control
switches and select .
2Press or of the meter control
switches and select “Vehicle Settings”,
then press .
3Press or of the meter control
switches and select , then press
.
4Press or of the meter control
switches and select “RSA”, then press
.
Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display
One or more signs automatically turn off in
the following situations.
No sign has been recognized for a cer-
tain distance.
End of prohibition
Stop
Wet
Rain
Ice
Supplemental mark exists
*2
Exit ramp on right
*3
Exit ramp on left
*3
Time
Notification function
310
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The road changes due to a left or right
turn, etc.
Conditions in which the function may
not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not
operate normally and may not recognize
signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunction.
The front camera is misaligned due to a
strong impact being applied to the sen-
sor, etc.
Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the wind-
shield near the front camera.
In inclement weather such as heavy rain,
fog, snow or sand storms.
Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun,
etc. enters the front camera.
The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.
The contrast of electronic sign is low.
All or part of the sign is hidden by the
leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
The sign is only visible to the front camera
for a short amount of time.
The driving scene (turning, lane change,
etc.) is judged incorrectly.
If a sign not appropriate for the currently
traveled lane, but the sign exists directly
after a freeway branches, or in an adja-
cent lane just before merging.
Stickers are attached to the rear of the
preceding vehicle.
A sign resembling a system compatible
sign is recognized.
Side road speed signs may be detected
and displayed (if positioned in sight of the
front camera) while the vehicle is
traveling on the main road.
Roundabout exit road speed signs may
be detected and displayed (if positioned
in sight of the front camera) while
traveling on a roundabout.
The front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load.
The surrounding brightness is not suffi-
cient or changes suddenly.
When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is
recognized.
The vehicle is driven in a country with a
different direction of traffic.
The navigation system map data is out-
dated.
The navigation system is not operating.
The speed information displayed on the
meter and on the navigation system may
be different due to the navigation system
using map data.
Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch was last turned off while
a speed limit sign was displayed on the
multi-information display, the same sign dis-
plays again when the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If “RSA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
is shown
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features:P.546)
311
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
:If equipped
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the vehicle automatically accel-
erates, decelerates and stops to match
the speed changes of the preceding
vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is
not depressed. In constant speed con-
trol mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed
speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range on freeways and
highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode (P.313)
Constant speed control mode
(P.318)
Meter display
Multi-information display
Set speed
Indicators
Operation switches
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
Cancel switch
“-SET” switch
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range*
Summary of function
System Components
A
B
WARNING
Before using dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
Driving safely is the sole responsibility
of the driver. Do not rely solely on the
system, and drive safely by always pay-
ing careful attention to your
surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range provides driving
assistance to reduce the driver’s bur-
den. However, there are limitations to
the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions care-
fully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
When the sensor may not be correctly
detecting the vehicle ahead:
P.321
Conditions under which the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly:
P.322
C
A
B
C
D
E
312
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
Set the speed appropriately depend-
ing on the speed limit, traffic flow, road
conditions, weather conditions, etc.
The driver is responsible for checking
the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning
normally, the condition of the preced-
ing vehicle as detected by the system
may differ from the condition
observed by the driver. Therefore, the
driver must always remain alert, assess
the danger of each situation and drive
safely. Relying solely on this system or
assuming the system ensures safety
while driving can lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Switch the dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range setting to off,
using the cruise control main switch
when not in use.
Cautions regarding the driving assist
systems
Observe the following precautions, as
there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system. Failure to do so
may cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
Assisting the driver to measure follow-
ing distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is only intended to help
the driver in determining the following
distance between the driver’s own vehi-
cle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows
careless or inattentive driving, and it is
not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions.
It is still necessary for driver to pay close
attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
Assisting the driver to judge proper
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range determines whether the
following distance between the driver’s
own vehicle and a designated vehicle
traveling ahead is within a set range. It is
not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely
necessary for the driver to remain vigi-
lant and to determine whether or not
there is a possibility of danger in any
given situation.
Assisting the driver to operate the
vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range does not include func-
tions which will prevent or avoid colli-
sions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
Therefore, if there is ever any possibility
of danger, the driver must take immedi-
ate and direct control of the vehicle and
act appropriately in order to ensure the
safety of all involved.
Situations unsuitable for dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed
range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range in any of the follow-
ing situations. Doing so may result in
inappropriate speed control and could
cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
Roads where there are pedestrians,
cyclists, etc.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those cov-
ered with rain, ice or snow
313
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately
100 m (328 ft.) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following dis-
tance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle
ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.
WARNING
On steep downhills, or where there
are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set
speed when driving down a steep hill.
At entrances to freeways and highways
When weather conditions are bad
enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from detecting correctly (fog,
snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
When there is rain, snow, etc. on the
front surface of the radar or front cam-
era
In traffic conditions that require fre-
quent repeated acceleration and
deceleration
During emergency towing
When an approach warning buzzer is
heard often
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
314
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates
your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies
the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in
the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by
the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to
prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by sys-
tem control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing
the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the start-off
operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle stopped.
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an overtaking lane while
driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a
passing vehicle.
The system’s identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on
the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side
driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different
side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn
signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver
normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then
drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when
the right turn signal is activated).
Example of acceleration
A
B
C
315
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant
speed cruising.
1Press the cruise control main switch
to activate the cruise control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will
come on and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display. Press the
switch again to deactivate the cruise con-
trol.
If the cruise control main switch is pressed
and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the sys-
tem turns on in constant speed control
mode. (P.318)
2Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 km/h [20 mph])
and press the “-SET” switch to set
the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
switch is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the set speed by the
switch
To change the set speed, press the
“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the
desired set speed is displayed.
1Increases the speed (Except when
the vehicle has been stopped by
system control in vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control mode)
2Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold the
switch to change the speed, and release
Setting the vehicle speed (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Adjusting the set speed
316
4-5. Using the driving support systems
when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*1
or 1
mph (1.6 km/h)
*2
each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases
in 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*1
or 5 mph (8
km/h)
*2
increments for as long as the
switch is held
In the constant speed control mode
(P.318), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*1
or 1
mph (1.6 km/h)
*2
each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: The speed will continue
to change while the switch is held.
*1
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
*2
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Increasing the set speed by the
accelerator pedal
1Accelerate with accelerator pedal
operation to the desired vehicle
speed
2Press the “-SET” switch
Pressing the switch changes the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1Long
2Medium
3Short
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the
preceding vehicle mark will also be dis-
played.
Select a distance from the table below.
Note that the distances shown corre-
spond to a vehicle speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance
with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is
stopped by system control, the vehicle
stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle
distance depending on the situation.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance set-
tings (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Distance
options
Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance
Long Approximately 50 m (160
ft.)
Medium Approximately 40 m (130
ft.)
Short Approximately 30 m (100
ft.)
A
317
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
After the vehicle ahead of you starts
off, press the “+RES” switch.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up
cruising if the accelerator pedal is
depressed after the vehicle ahead of
you starts off.
1Pressing the cancel switch cancels
the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed. (When the
vehicle has been stopped by system con-
trol, depressing the brake pedal does not
cancel the setting.)
2Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the cruise control and
returns vehicle speed to the set
speed.
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance.
Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings
may not occur even when the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance is small.
When the speed of the preceding
vehicle matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is
traveling at an extremely slow speed
Resuming follow-up cruising
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Canceling and resuming the
speed control
Approach warning (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
318
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Immediately after the cruise control
speed was set
When depressing the accelerator
pedal
While driving in vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, this function will
reduce the vehicle speed, if it is deter-
mined to be necessary.
Function operation
When the steering wheel begins to be
turned, the vehicle speed will begin
being reduced. When the steering
wheel is returned to the center posi-
tion, the vehicle speed reduction will
end.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle
speed will then return to the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
set speed.
In situations where vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control needs to operate,
such as when a preceding vehicle cuts
in front of your vehicle, the curve speed
reduction function will be canceled.
Operation display
Displayed when the vehicle speed is
being reduced.
When the vehicle speed reduction ends,
the display will disappear.
Changing the settings of the curve
speed reduction function
The curve speed reduction function
can be enabled/disabled and the vehi-
cle speed reduction strength can be
adjusted.
Press the or meter control
switch to select . Press or
to select “Curve Spd. Reduction” and
then press .
The setting will change each time the
meter control switch is pressed.
When constant speed control mode is
selected, your vehicle will maintain a
set speed without controlling the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode does not function
correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.
Curve speed reduction function
(vehicles with Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A)
Selecting constant speed con-
trol mode
319
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
1With the cruise control off, press
and hold the cruise control main
switch for 1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the switch is pressed, the
dynamic radar cruise control indicator will
come on. Afterwards, it switches to the
cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control mode
is only possible when operating the switch
with the cruise control off.
2Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 km/h [20 mph])
and press the “-SET” switch to set
the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
switch is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: P.315
Canceling and resuming the speed setting:
P.317
When this function is enabled and the
system is operating in vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control mode (P.313),
when a speed limit sign is detected, the
recognized speed limit will be dis-
played with an up/down arrow. The set
speed can be increased/reduced to
the recognized speed limit by pressing
and holding the “+RES”/“-SET” switch.
When the current set speed is lower
than the recognized speed limit
Press and hold the “+RES” switch.
When the current set speed is
higher than the recognized speed
limit
Press and hold the “-SET” switch.
Dynamic Radar Cruise Control
with Road Sign Assist
320
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with
Road Sign Assist can be enabled/disa-
bled in on the multi-information
display. (P.93)
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range can be set when
The shift position is in D.
The desired set speed can be set when
the vehicle speed is approximately 30
km/h (20 mph) or more.
(However, when the vehicle speed is set
while driving at below approximately 30
km/h [20 mph], the set speed will be set
to approximately 30 km/h [20 mph].)
Accelerating after setting the vehicle
speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the
accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the
vehicle speed may decrease below the set
speed in order to maintain the distance to
the preceding vehicle.
Excessive speed warning
While driving down a hill, the vehicle speed
may exceed the set speed. In this case, the
displayed set vehicle speed will be high-
lighted and a buzzer will sound to alert the
driver.
When the vehicle stops while follow-up
cruising
Pressing the “+RES” switch while the
vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up
cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off
within approximately 3 seconds after the
switch is pressed.
If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 sec-
onds after your vehicle stops, follow-up
cruising will be resumed.
Automatic cancelation of vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is
automatically canceled in the following situ-
ations.
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned
off.
When snow mode is set.
The sensor cannot detect correctly
because it is covered in some way.
When the brake control or output restric-
tion control of a driving support system
operates. (For example: Pre-Collision
System, Drive-Start Control)
The parking brake is operated.
The vehicle is stopped by system control
on a steep incline.
The following are detected when the
vehicle has been stopped by system con-
trol:
The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
The driver’s door is opened.
The vehicle has been stopped for about 3
minutes.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
is automatically canceled for any reasons
other than the above, there may be a mal-
function in the system. Contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Automatic cancelation of constant
speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automati-
cally canceled in the following situations:
Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below
the set vehicle speed.
Actual vehicle speed falls below approxi-
mately 30 km/h (20 mph).
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned
off.
Enabling/Disabling the Dynamic
Radar Cruise Control with Road
Sign Assist
321
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When the brake control or output restric-
tion control of a driving support system
operates. (For example: Pre-Collision
System, Drive-Start Control)
The parking brake is operated.
If constant speed control mode is automati-
cally canceled for any reasons other than
the above, there may be a malfunction in the
system. Contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Situations in which the curve speed
reduction function may not operate
(vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A)
In situations such as the following, the curve
speed reduction function may not operate:
When the vehicle is being driven around
a gentle curve
When the accelerator pedal is being
depressed
When the vehicle is being driven around
an extremely short curve
The Dynamic Radar Cruise Control
with Road Sign Assist may not operate
properly when
As the Dynamic Radar Cruise Control with
Road Sign Assist may not operate properly
in conditions in which RSA may not operate
or detect correctly (P.310), when using
this function, make sure to check the speed
limit sign displayed.
In the following situations, the set speed
may not be changed to the recognized
speed limit by pressing and holding the
“+RES”/“-SET” switch.
If speed limit information is not available
When the recognized speed limit is the
same as the set speed
When the recognized speed limit is out-
side of the speed range that the dynamic
radar cruise control system can operate
Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be heard and
the brake pedal response may change, but
these are not malfunctions.
Warning messages and buzzers for
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driv-
ing. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message
and follow the instructions.(P.260, 271,
515)
When the sensor may not be correctly
detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending
on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insuffi-
cient or operate the accelerator pedal
when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (P.317) may not be activated.
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
Vehicles traveling at low speeds
Vehicles that are not moving in the same
lane
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers
with no load on board, etc.)
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
When water or snow thrown up by the
surrounding vehicles hinders the detect-
ing of the sensor
When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
322
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance
Conditions under which the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions,
operate the brake pedal (or accelerator
pedal, depending on the situation) as nec-
essary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
When the road curves or when the lanes
are narrow
When steering wheel operation or your
position in the lane is unstable
When the vehicle ahead of you deceler-
ates suddenly
When driving on a road surrounded by a
structure, such as in a tunnel or on a
bridge
While the vehicle speed is decreasing to
the set speed after the vehicle acceler-
ates by depressing the accelerator pedal
Situations in which the curve speed
reduction function may not operate
properly (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A)
In situations such as the following, the curve
speed reduction function may not operate
properly:
When the vehicle is being driven around
a curve on an incline/decline
When the course of the vehicle differs
from the shape of the curve
When the vehicle speed is excessively
high when entering a curve
When the steering wheel is suddenly
operated
323
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
:If equipped
Meter display
Set speed
Indicators
Operation switches
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
“-SET” switch
Cancel switch
1Press the cruise control main switch
to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the switch again to deactivate the
cruise control.
2Accelerate or decelerate the vehi-
cle to the desired speed, and press
the “-SET” switch to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
switch is released becomes the set speed.
To change the set speed, press the
“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the
desired set speed is obtained.
Cruise control*
Use the cruise control to maintain a
set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
System components
A
B
A
B
C
D
Setting the vehicle speed
Adjusting the set speed
324
4-5. Using the driving support systems
1Increases the speed
2Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch in the
desired direction.
Large adjustment: Press and hold switch.
The set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*1
or 1
mph (1.6 km/h)
*2
each time the switch is
pressed
Large adjustment: The set speed can be
increased or decreased continually until
the switch is released.
*1
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
*2
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
1Pressing the cancel switch cancels
the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brakes are applied.
2Pressing the “+RES” switch
resumes the constant speed con-
trol.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 30km/h
(20 mph).
Cruise control can be set when
The shift position is in D.
Range 4 or higher of D has been selected
by using the paddle shift.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 30
km/h (20 mph).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle
speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
Even without canceling the cruise con-
trol, the set speed can be increased by
first accelerating the vehicle to the
desired speed and then pressing the
“-SET” switch to set the new speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the
vehicle speed in any of the following situa-
tions.
Actual vehicle speed falls more than
approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is
not retained.
Actual vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 30 km/h (20 mph).
VSC is activated.
TRC is activated for a period of time.
When the VSC or TRC system is turned
off.
Canceling and resuming the
constant speed control
325
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
If the warning message for the cruise
control is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display
Press the cruise control main switch once to
deactivate the system, and then press the
switch again to reactivate the system. If the
cruise control speed cannot be set or if the
cruise control cancels immediately after
being activated, there may be a malfunction
in the cruise control system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
When the brake hold system is not
operating with the shift position in
D
Stopping the engine
While driving with the shift position in
D, depress the brake pedal and stop
the vehicle.
The Stop & Start indicator will come on.
Restarting the engine
Release the brake pedal.
The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.
When the brake hold system is
operating with the shift position in
D
The Stop & Start system is operational
when the brake hold system is operat-
ing. (P.230)
WARNING
To avoid operating the cruise control
by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the
cruise control main switch when not in
use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise con-
trol
Do not use cruise control in any of the
following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and
could cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those cov-
ered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed
when driving down a steep hill.
Duning emergency towing
Stop & Start system
The Stop & Start system stops and
restarts the engine according to
the brake pedal or shift lever opera-
tion when the vehicle is stopped.
Stop & Start system operation
326
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Stopping the engine
While driving with the shift position in
D, depress the brake pedal and stop
the vehicle.
The Stop & Start indicator will come on.
While the brake hold system is operating,
the brake hold operated indicator will
come on. If the brake pedal is released, the
engine will remain stopped by the Stop &
Start system.
Restarting the engine
Depress the accelerator pedal.
(Releasing the brake pedal will not
restart the engine.)
The Stop & Start indicator and brake hold
operated indicator will turn off.
When the dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range is
operating with the shift position in
D (if equipped)
The Stop & Start system is operational
during a controlled stop by the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range. (P.313)
Stopping the engine
While driving with the dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed range in
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the engine will stop automati-
cally if the vehicle comes to a complete
stop through a controlled stop. (The
engine will stop automatically even
though the brake pedal is not
depressed.)
The Stop & Start indicator will come on.
Restarting the engine
When the preceding vehicle starts off,
the engine will restart automatically.
The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.
When the shift position is shifted to
P
Stopping the engine
1While driving with the shift position
in D, depress the brake pedal and
stop the vehicle.
The engine will be stopped by the Stop &
Start system and the Stop & Start indicator
will come on.
327
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
2Shift the shift position to P.
(P.222)
The engine will remain stopped.
The engine may restart if the shift position
is shifted from D to P immediately after the
engine is stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem. Additionally, if the engine is not
stopped by the Stop & Start system when
vehicle is stopped with the shift position in
D, it may be stopped by the Stop & Start
system when the shift position is shifted to
P.
Restarting the engine
With the brake pedal depressed, shift
the shift position to any position other
than P. (P.222)
If the brake pedal was released after the
engine was stopped by the Stop & Start
system, the engine will restart when the
brake pedal is depressed again. If the brake
pedal was not released after the engine
was stopped by the Stop & Start system,
the engine will restart when the shift posi-
tion is shifted to any position other than P.
The Stop & Start indicator will turn off.
Operating conditions
The Stop & Start system is operational
when all of the following conditions are
met:
The brake pedal is being depressed
firmly. (Except when the vehicle comes to
a controlled stop while driving with the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range in vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
The engine is adequately warmed up.
The outside temperature is -5°C (23°F)
or higher.
The shift position is in D or P.
The windshield defogger is off.
The hood is closed.
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
The driver’s door is closed.
The accelerator pedal is not being
depressed.
In the following situations the engine may
not be stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem. This is not a malfunction of the Stop
& Start system.
The air conditioning system is being used
when the ambient temperature is high or
low.
The battery is not sufficiently charged,
such as if the vehicle has been parked for
a long time and the battery charge has
decreased, the electric load is large, the
battery fluid temperature is excessively
low or the battery has deteriorated, or is
undergoing a periodic recharge.
The brake booster vacuum is low.
The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline.
The steering wheel is being operated.
Due to traffic or other circumstances the
vehicle is stopped repeatedly.
The vehicle is being driven in a high alti-
tude area.
Engine coolant temperature or transmis-
sion fluid temperature is extremely low or
high.
The battery fluid temperature is
extremely low or high.
For a while after the battery terminals
have been disconnected and recon-
nected.
For a while after the battery has been
replaced.
In the following situations, the engine will
restart automatically if the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system. (To
enable stopping of the engine by the Stop
& Start system, drive the vehicle.)
The air conditioning system is turned on.
The pollen removal mode is turned on.
The windshield defogger is turned on.
The steering wheel is operated.
The shift position is shifted to M, N or R
from D.
The shift position is shifted from P.
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
The driver’s door is opened.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
The Stop & Start cancel switch is pressed.
The vehicle starts to roll on an incline.
In the following situations, the engine may
restart automatically if the engine is
328
4-5. Using the driving support systems
stopped by the Stop & Start system. (To
enable stopping of the engine by the Stop
& Start system, drive the vehicle.)
The brake pedal is pumped or strongly
depressed.
The air conditioning system is being used.
The battery is not sufficiently charged.
Stop & Start system operation when the
brake hold system is operating
If the engine is restarted automatically by
the Stop & Start system when the brake
hold system is operating, the brake hold
system will continue to apply the brakes.
If the operation conditions of the brake
hold system are no longer met (P.230)
while the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system, the brake hold system will
stop operating.
At this time, the parking brake will be
applied automatically and the engine will
be restarted automatically.
Stop & Start system operation during a
controlled stop by the dynamic radar
cruise control with full-speed range (if
equipped)
If the engine is restarted automatically by
the Stop & Start system during a controlled
stop by the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range, the controlled stop
will continue. (Resuming follow-up cruising
after a controlled stop:P.317)
Hood
If the hood is opened while the engine is
stopped by the Stop & Start system, the
engine will stall and will not be able to be
restarted by the automatic engine start
function. In this case, restart the engine
using the normal engine starting proce-
dure. (P.216)
Even if the hood is closed after the engine
is started with the hood open, the Stop &
Start system will not operate. Close the
hood, turn the engine switch off, wait 30
seconds or more, and then start the
engine.
When to use the Stop & Start system
When stopping the vehicle for a longer
period of time, turn the engine switch off
and stop the engine completely.
When the system does not operate, is
canceled, or is malfunctioning, warning
messages and a warning buzzer are used
to inform the driver. (P.329)
If the engine switch is pressed when the
engine is stopped by the Stop & Start sys-
tem, the engine will stall and will not be
able to be restarted by the automatic
engine start function. In this case, restart
the engine using the normal engine start-
ing procedure. (P.216)
When the engine is restarted by the Stop
& Start system, the power outlet may be
temporarily unusable, but this is not a
malfunction.
Installation and removal of electrical
components and wireless devices may
affect the Stop & Start system. Contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
If the windshield is fogged up while the
engine is stopped by the Stop & Start
system
Turn the windshield defogger on. (The
engine will start due to the automatic
engine start function.): P.403
If the windshield fogs up frequently, press
the Stop & Start cancel switch to disable the
system.
Air conditioning system operation while
the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system
If the air conditioning system is being
used in automatic mode, the fan speed
may be reduced or the fan may be
stopped while the engine is stopped by
the Stop & Start system in order to
reduce changes in the cabin tempera-
ture.
To ensure air conditioning system perfor-
mance when the vehicle is stopped, disa-
ble the Stop & Start system by pressing
the Stop & Start cancel switch.
329
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
If an odor comes from the air condition-
ing system while the engine is stopped
by the Stop & Start system
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch to
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
Changing the idling stop time with the
air conditioning system on
The length of time the Stop & Start system
will operate when the air conditioning sys-
tem is on can be changed by performing
the following operation. (The length of time
the Stop & Start system will operate when
the air conditioning system is off cannot be
changed.)
Setting by pressing and holding the Stop
& Start cancel switch
Each time the Stop & Start cancel switch
is pressed and held for 3 seconds or
more, the system changes between
standard and extended. The system sta-
tus can be confirmed on the multi-infor-
mation display screen. (P.96)
Settings using the multi-information dis-
play
(P.96) or (P.94).
The Stop & Start system protection
function
When the volume of the audio system is
excessively high, sound output from the
audio system may suddenly be cut off in
order to reduce battery consumption. To
prevent the audio system from being cut
off, keep the volume of audio system at a
moderate level.
If the audio system has been cut off, turn
the engine switch off, wait for 3 seconds
or more and then turn it to ACCES-
SORY mode or IGNITION ON mode to
re-enable the audio system.
The audio system may not be activated if
the battery terminals are disconnected
and then reconnected. If this occurs, turn
the engine switch off and then repeat the
following operation twice to activate the
audio system normally.
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode and then to off.
Replacing the battery
P.528
Displaying the Stop & Start system sta-
tus
P.96
Multi-information display messages
If the following situations, and a mes-
sage may be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
When the engine cannot be stopped by
the Stop & Start system
“Depress Brake Firmly to Activate”
The brake pedal is not depressed
enough.
If the brake pedal is depressed further,
the system will operate.
“For Climate Control”
The air conditioning system is being used
when the ambient temperature is high or
low.
If the difference between the set tem-
perature and cabin temperature is small,
the system will be enabled.
The windshield defogger is ON.
“Battery Charging”
The battery charge amount may be low.
Engine stop is temporarily prohibited to
prioritize charging of the battery, but if the
engine is operated for a short while, engine
stop is allowed.
A refresh charge may be occurring, such
as when the battery is undergoing a peri-
odic recharge, for a while after the bat-
tery terminals have been disconnected
and reconnected, for a while after the
battery has been replaced, etc.
After a refresh charge of approximately
5 to 60 minutes completes, the system can
be operated.
Continuously displayed for a long term
330
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The battery may be deteriorated. Con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
“In Preparation”
The vehicle is being driven in a high alti-
tude area.
The brake booster vacuum is low.
When the brake booster vacuum
reaches a predetermined level, the system
will be enabled.
“Steering Wheel Turned”
The steering wheel was operated.
“Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled”
The driver seat belt is not fastened.
“Stop & Start Unavailable”
The Stop & Start system is temporarily
disabled.
Operate the engine for a short while.
The engine may have been started with
the hood open.
Close the hood, turn the engine switch
off, wait for 30 seconds or more, and then
start the engine.
“System Temperature Low”
The battery may be cold.
Operate the engine for a short while
allows the system to recover due to the
temperature increase in the trunk.
“System Temperature High”
The battery may be extremely hot.
If the engine compartment is allowed to
cool sufficiently, the system recovers.
“Non-Dedicated Battery.”
A non-dedicated battery for the Stop &
Start system may have been installed.
The Stop & Start system does not oper-
ate. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus autho-
rized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the engine automatically restarts
while stopped by the Stop & Start system
“For Climate Control”
The air conditioning system has been
turned on or is being used.
The windshield defogger has been
turned on.
“In Preparation”
The brake pedal has been depressed fur-
ther or pumped.
The system will be enabled after the
engine runs and the brake booster vacuum
reaches a predetermined level.
“Battery Charging”
The battery charge amount may be low.
The engine is restarted to prioritize bat-
tery charging. Operating the engine for a
short while allows the system to recover.
“Steering Wheel Turned”
The steering wheel was operated.
“Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled”
The driver seat belt has been unfastened.
Stop & Start system warning messages
If a system malfunction occurs, a warning
message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to inform the
driver of the need for caution. (P.515)
If the Stop & Start cancel indicator con-
tinues to flash
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
331
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Press the Stop & Start cancel switch to
disable the Stop & Start system.
The Stop & Start cancel indicator will
come on.
Pressing the switch again will enable the
Stop & Start system and the Stop & Start
cancel indicator will turn off.
Automatic reactivation of the Stop &
Start system
Even if the Stop & Start system is disabled
by the Stop & Start cancel switch, it will be
automatically re-enabled once the engine
switch is turned off and then the engine is
started.
If the Stop & Start cancel switch is
pressed while the vehicle is stopped
When the engine is stopped by the Stop
& Start system, pressing the Stop & Start
cancel switch will restart the engine.
WARNING
When the Stop & Start system is
operating
Depress the brake pedal and apply the
parking brake when necessary while
the engine is stopped by the Stop &
Start system (while the Stop & Start
indicator is on). (Except when the
brake hold system is operating or
when the vehicle comes to a con-
trolled stop while driving with the
dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range in vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode)
Do not allow anyone to leave the vehi-
cle while the engine is stopped by the
Stop & Start system (while the Stop &
Start indicator is on).
An accident may occur due to the
automatic engine start function.
Ensure that the engine is not stopped
by the Stop & Start system while the
vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area.
The engine may restart due to the
automatic engine start function, caus-
ing exhaust gases to collect and enter
the vehicle, possibly resulting in death
or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates cor-
rectly
If any of the following situations occur,
the Stop & Start system may not operate
correctly. Have your vehicle checked by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
While the driver’s seat belt is fastened,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light flashes.
Even though the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat belt reminder light does not
illuminate.
Even though the driver’s door is
closed, the open door warning light is
illuminated or the interior light is illumi-
nated when the interior light switch is
in the door position.
Even though the driver’s door is open,
the open door warning light does not
illuminate or the interior light does not
illuminate when the interior light switch
is in the door position.
Disabling the Stop & Start sys-
tem
332
4-5. Using the driving support systems
With the Stop & Start system disabled,
pressing the Stop & Start cancel switch
will re-enable the system but not stop the
engine.
From the next time the vehicle is stopped
(after Stop & Start system has been ena-
bled), the engine will be stopped.
After the engine is stopped by the Stop
& Start system when the vehicle is on
an incline, brake force is temporarily
maintained to prevent rolling back-
wards until the engine is restarted and
drive force is generated.
When drive force is generated, the
maintained brake force is automatically
canceled.
This function operates on flat sur-
faces as well as steep inclines.
Sound may be generated from the
brakes, but this is not a malfunction.
Brake pedal response may change
and vibration may occur, but these
are not malfunctions.
*
: If equipped
Meter control switches
Hill-start assist control (when the
shift position is in D)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)*
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system
that uses rear side radar sensors
installed on the inner side of the
rear bumper on the left and right
side to assist the driver in confirm-
ing safety when changing lanes.
WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the sys-
tem
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplemen-
tary function which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside
rear view mirrors or is approaching rap-
idly from behind into a blind spot. Do not
overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As
the function cannot judge if it is safe to
change lanes, over reliance could lead to
an accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
As the system may not function correctly
under certain conditions, the driver’s own
visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
System components
A
333
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot
of the outside rear view mirrors or
approaching rapidly from behind into a
blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator on the detected side will illumi-
nate. If the turn signal lever is operated
toward the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator flashes.
Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-
bility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-
ror indicator may be difficult to see.
When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable”
is shown on the multi-information dis-
play
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the
rear bumper around the sensors. (P.346)
The system should return to normal opera-
tion after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc.
from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sen-
sors may not operate normally when driving
in extremely hot or cold environments.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
B
334
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Certification
335
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
336
4-5. Using the driving support systems
337
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
338
4-5. Using the driving support systems
339
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
340
4-5. Using the driving support systems
341
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
342
4-5. Using the driving support systems
343
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
344
4-5. Using the driving support systems
345
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
346
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Use the meter control switches to turn
on/off the function.
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select and
then press .
When the BSM function is disabled, the
BSM OFF indicator illuminates. (Each time
the engine switch is turned off then
changed to IGNITION ON mode, the
Blind Spot Monitor will be enabled auto-
matically.)
WARNING
Handling the rear side radar sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed
behind the left and right sides of the rear
bumper respectively. Observe the fol-
lowing to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor
can operate correctly.
Keep the sensors and the surrounding
areas on the rear bumper clean at all
times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the
rear bumper is dirty or covered with
snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not
operate and a warning message
(P.333) will be displayed. In this situa-
tion, clear off the dirt or snow and drive
the vehicle with the operation conditions
of the BSM function (P.348) satisfied
for approximately 10 minutes. If the
warning message does not disappear,
have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), alumi-
num tape, etc. to a sensor or its sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper.
Do not subject a sensor or its sur-
rounding area on the rear bumper to a
strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off
position, the system may malfunction
and vehicles may not be detected cor-
rectly.In the following situations, have
your vehicle inspected by any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
A sensor or its surrounding area is
subject to a strong impact.
If the surrounding area of a sensor is
scratched or dented, or part of them
has become disconnected.
Do not disassemble the sensor.
Do not modify the sensor or surround-
ing area on the rear bumper.
If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to
be removed/installed or replaced,
contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Do not paint the rear bumper any
color other than an official Lexus color.
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor
on/off
347
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehi-
cles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehi-
cles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear
view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible
using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
Approximately 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) to 3.5 m (11.5 ft.) from either side of the vehicle
*1
Approximately 1 m (3.3 ft.) forward of the rear bumper
Approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) from the rear bumper
Approximately 3 m (9.8 ft.) to 60 m (197 ft.) from the rear bumper
*2
*1
: The area between the side of the vehicle and 0.5 m (1.6 ft.) from the side of the vehicle
cannot be detected.
Blind Spot Monitor operation
A
B
A
B
C
D
348
4-5. Using the driving support systems
*2
: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,
the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indi-
cator to illuminate or flash.
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational
when
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
all of the following conditions are met:
The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
The shift position is in a position other
than R.
The vehicle speed is greater than approx-
imately 16 km/h (10 mph).
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a
vehicle when
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle
present in the detection area in the follow-
ing situations:
A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes
your vehicle.
You overtake a vehicle in an adjacent lane
slowly.
Another vehicle enters the detection
area when it changes lanes.
Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.
*
Vehicles traveling in the opposite direc-
tion
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects
*
Following vehicles that are in the same
lane
*
Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your
vehicle
*
Vehicles which are being overtaken rap-
idly by your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection
of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor may not function correctly
The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect
vehicles correctly in the following situa-
tions:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering the sensor or surrounding area
on the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehi-
cle
When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
When there is a significant difference in
speed between your vehicle and the vehi-
cle that enters the detection area
When the difference in speed between
your vehicle and another vehicle is
changing
When a vehicle enters a detection area
traveling at about the same speed as your
vehicle
As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehi-
cle remains in the detection area
When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
When vehicle lanes are wide, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and the
vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away
from your vehicle
When an accessory (such as a bicycle
carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-
cle
When there is a significant difference in
height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor
is turned on
Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor
349
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase in the following situ-
ations:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
When the distance between your vehicle
and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the
detection area is short
When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehi-
cle traveling in a lane other than the adja-
cent lanes enters the detection area
When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
When the tires are slipping or spinning
When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
When an accessory (such as a bicycle
carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-
cle
Lexus parking assist-sensor
Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect
static objects in the detection area
when driving at a low speed or backing
up. (P.351)
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)
function (if equipped)
Radar sensors are used to detect
approaching vehicles in the detection
areas behind the vehicle when backing
up. (P.355)
RCD (Rear camera detection)
function (if equipped)
A rear camera sensor is used to detect
pedestrians in the detection area
behind the vehicle when backing up.
(P.359)
PKSA (Parking Support
Alert)
The Parking Support Alert system
consists of the following functions
that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such as when
parking. When the system deter-
mines that a collision with a
detected object, such as a wall, or
pedestrian is high, a warning oper-
ates to urge the driver to take eva-
sive action.
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
system
350
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Adjusting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on
the multi-information display. The vol-
ume of buzzers for the Lexus parking
assist-sensor, RCTA function and RCD
function will be adjusted simultane-
ously.
Use the meter control switches to
change settings. (P.94)
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select “PKSA”
and then press .
3Press or to select and
then press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the volume
level will change between 1, 2, and 3.
Muting a buzzer
A mute button will be displayed on the
multi-information display when an
object or pedestrian is detected. To
mute the buzzer, press .
The buzzers for the Lexus parking
assist-sensor, RCTA function and RCD
function will be muted simultaneously.
Mute will be canceled automatically in
the following situations:
When the shift position is changed.
When the vehicle speed exceeds a
certain speed.
When the operating function is tem-
porarily canceled.
When the operating function is disa-
bled manually.
When the engine switch is turned
off.
Setting the buzzer volume
351
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
Display
When an object, such as a wall, is
detected by a sensor, the approximate
distance to the object will be displayed
on the multi-information display,
head-up display (if equipped) and
Center Display. (As the distance to the
object becomes short, the distance
segmentsmay blink.)
Multi-information display and
head-up display
Front corner sensor detection
Front center sensor detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Rear center sensor detection
Center Display
Front corner sensor detection
Front center sensor detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Rear center sensor detection
Use the meter control switches to ena-
ble/disable the Lexus parking
assist-sensor. (P.94)
Lexus parking assist-sensor
The distance from your vehicle to
objects, such as a wall, when paral-
lel parking or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the sensors
and communicated via the
multi-information display, head-up
display (if equipped), Center Dis-
play and a buzzer. Always check the
surrounding area when using this
system.
System components
A
B
C
D
Turning Lexus parking assist-sen-
sor on/off
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
352
4-5. Using the driving support systems
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select “PKSA”
and then press .
3Press or to select and
then press .
When the Lexus parking assist-sensor
function is disabled, the Lexus parking
assist-sensor OFF indicator (P.82)
illuminates.
To re-enable the system when it was
disabled, select on the multi-infor-
mation display, select and then On.
If disabled using this method, the sys-
tem will not be re-enabled by turning
the engine switch off and then to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
WARNING
When using the Lexus parking
assist-sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely and pos-
sibly cause an accident.
Do not use the sensor at speeds in
excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).
The sensors’ detection areas and reac-
tion times are limited. When moving
forward or reversing, check the areas
surrounding the vehicle (especially the
sides of the vehicle) for safety, and
drive slowly, using the brake to control
the vehicle’s speed.
Do not install accessories within the
sensors’ detection areas.
The area directly under the bumpers is
not detected. Thin posts or objects
lower than the sensor may not be
detected when approached, even if
they have been detected once.
When to disable the function
In the following situations, disable the
function as it may operate even though
there is no possibility of a collision.
The vehicle is equipped with a fender
pole, wireless antenna or fog lights.
The front or rear bumper or a sensor
receives a strong impact.
A non-genuine Lexus suspension
(lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
Towing eyelets are installed.
A backlit licence plate is installed.
When using Lexus parking assist-sen-
sor
In the following situations, the system
may not function correctly due to a sen-
sor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle
checked by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
The Lexus parking assist-sensor oper-
ation display flashes or shows continu-
ously, and a beep sounds when no
objects are detected.
If the area around a sensor collides
with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.
If the bumper or grille collides with
something.
If the display flashes or is displayed
continuously and a buzzer does not
sound, except when the mute function
has been turned on.
353
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
The system can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Lexus parking assist-sensor function is
on.
The vehicle speed is less than about 10
km/h (6 mph).
A shift position other than P is selected.
Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (P.350)
If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
A sensor may be covered with water drops,
ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the water drops,
ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return
the system to normal.
If a sensor is dirty, the position of the dirty
sensor will be shown on the display.
Due to ice forming on a sensor at low tem-
peratures, a warning message may be dis-
played or the sensor may not be able to
detect an object. Once the ice melts, the
system will return to normal.
If “Parking Assist Unavailable” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
Water may be continuously flowing over the
sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain.
When the system determines that it is nor-
mal, the system will return to normal.
If a battery terminal has been discon-
nected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized. To initial-
ize the system, drive the vehicle straight
ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph) or more.
Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking
Support Brake function, turn the steering
wheel fully to the left and right with the vehi-
cle stopped.
Sensor detection information
The following situations may occur dur-
ing use.
The sensors may be able to only detect
objects near the front and rear bumpers.
Depending on the shape of the object
and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impos-
sible.
There will be a short delay between
object detection and display. Even at low
speeds, there is a possibility that the
object will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is
shown and the warning beep sounds.
It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due
to the volume of the audio system or air
flow noise of the air conditioning system.
It may be difficult to hear the buzzer if
buzzers for other systems are sounding.
Conditions under which the function
may not function correctly
Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-
rounding environment may affect the ability
of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Par-
ticular instances where this may occur are
listed below.
There is dirt, snow, water drops or ice on
a sensor. (Cleaning the sensors will
resolve this problem.)
A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will
WARNING
If a display error occurs, first check the
sensor.
If the error occurs even when there is
no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor mal-
functioning.
When using a high pressure washer to
wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-
sors directly, as doing so may cause a
sensor to malfunction.
When using steam to clean the vehicle,
do not direct steam too close to the
sensors as doing so may cause a sen-
sor to malfunction.
354
4-5. Using the driving support systems
resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is
frozen the sensor display may be dis-
played abnormally, or objects, such as a
wall, may not be detected.
A sensor is covered in any way.
When a sensor or the area around a sen-
sor is extremely hot or cold.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass.
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to
vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud
noises producing ultrasonic waves.
There is another vehicle equipped with
parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray
or heavy rain.
If a sensor is hit by a large amount of
water, such as when driving on a flooded
road.
If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
The vehicle is approaching a tall or
curved curb.
If objects draw too close to the sensor.
Objects which may not be properly
detected
The shape of the object may prevent the
sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following objects:
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that
absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low objects
Tall objects with upper sections project-
ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-
cle
People may not be detected if they are
wearing certain types of clothing.
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 100 cm (3.3 ft.)
Approximately 150 cm (4.9 ft.)
Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.)
The diagram shows the detection range of
the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot
detect objects that are extremely close to
the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object, etc.
Buzzer operation and approximate
distance to object
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are
operating. When 2 or more objects are
detected simultaneously, the buzzer
sounds for the nearest object.
Buzzer: Sounds intermittently
*
Front center sensor: Approximately 100
cm (3.3 ft.) to 60 cm (2.0 ft.)
Rear center sensor: Approximately 150
cm (4.9 ft.) to 60 cm (2.0 ft.)
System detection range
A
B
C
355
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Buzzer: Sounds in short intervals
*
Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.) to 45 cm
(1.5 ft.)
Buzzer: Sounds in extremely short
intervals
*
Approximately 45 cm (1.5 ft.) to 30 cm
(1.0 ft.)
Buzzer: Sounds continuously
Less than approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
*
: The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle
approaches an object.
Automatic buzzer mute function: After a
buzzer begins sounding, if the distance
between the vehicle and the detected
object does not become shorter, the
buzzer will be muted automatically.
*
: If equipped
Meter control switches
Turning the RCTA function on/off.
When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.
Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle approaching from the right
or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
both outside rear view mirror indicators
will flash.
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic
alert) function*
The RCTA function uses the BSM
rear side radar sensors installed
behind the rear bumper. This func-
tion is intended to assist the driver
in checking areas that are not easily
visible when backing up.
System components
A
B
356
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Center Display
If a vehicle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
the RCTA icon (P.357) for the detected
side will be displayed on the Center Dis-
play. This illustration shows an example of a
vehicle approaching from both sides of the
vehicle.
RCTA buzzer
If a vehicle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds
for approximately 1 second immediately
after the RCTA function is turned on.
Use the meter control switches to ena-
ble/disable the RCTA function.
(P.94)
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select “PKSA”
and then press .
3Press or to select “RCTA”
and then press .
When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator (P.82) illuminates.
(Each time the engine switch is turned off
then changed to IGNITION ON mode,
the RCTA function will be enabled auto-
matically.)
Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-
bility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-
ror indicator may be difficult to see.
Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear
over loud noises, such as if the audio system
volume is high.
When “RCTA Not Available” is shown
on the multi-information display
Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to
the rear bumper around the sensors.
(P.346) Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the attached to the rear bumper
around the sensors to normal.
Additionally, the function may not function
normally when used in extremely hot or
cold environments.
Rear side radar sensors
P.346
Turning the RCTA function
on/off
C
D
WARNING
Cautions regarding the use of the
function
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplemen-
tary function which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle. As the
RCTA function may not function cor-
rectly under certain conditions, the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary. Over reliance on this func-
tion may lead to an accident resulting
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Before using the RCTA function
Do not place obstacles near the sensors.
357
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Operation of the RCTA function
The RCTA function uses rear side
radar sensors to detect vehicles
approaching from the right or left at
the rear of the vehicle and alerts the
driver of the presence of such vehicles
by flashing the outside rear view mirror
indicators and sounding a buzzer.
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas of approaching
vehicles
RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, the following will be dis-
played on the Center Display.
Example (Panoramic view monitor):
Vehicles are approaching from both
sides of the vehicle
RCTA function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be
detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert the driver of
faster vehicles approaching from far-
ther away.
Example:
The RCTA function is operational when
The RCTA function operates when all of the
following conditions are met:
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The RCTA function is on.
RCTA function
A
B
Approaching vehi-
cle speed
Approximate
alert distance
28 km/h (18 mph)
(fast) 20 m (65 ft.)
8 km/h (5 mph)
(slow) 5.5 m (18 ft.)
A
358
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The shift position is in R.
The vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 8 km/h (5 mph).
The approaching vehicle speed is
between approximately 8 km/h (5 mph)
and 28 km/h (18 mph).
Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (P.350)
Conditions under which the RCTA func-
tion will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
Vehicles backing up in a parking space
next to your vehicle
Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
due to obstructions
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects
*
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.
*
Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
Vehicles approaching from the parking
spaces next to your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on the conditions, detection
of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
Conditions under which the RCTA func-
tion may not function correctly
The RCTA function may not detect vehi-
cles correctly in the following situations:
When a sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering a sensor or its surrounding area
on the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehi-
cle
If a vehicle is approaching the rear of
your vehicle rapidly
When a towing eyelet is installed to the
rear of the vehicle.
When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade
When backing out of a shallow angle
parking spot
Immediately after the RCTA function is
turned on
Immediately after the engine is started
with the RCTA function on
When the sensors cannot detect a vehi-
cle due to obstructions
359
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Instances of the RCTA function unneces-
sarily detecting a vehicle and/or object
may increase in the following situations:
When a vehicle passes by the side of your
vehicle
When the parking space faces a street
and vehicles are being driven on the
street
When the distance between your vehicle
and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may
reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short
When a towing eyelet is installed to the
rear of the vehicle
*
: If equipped
Pedestrian detection icon
Displayed automatically when a pedestrian
is detected.
RCD OFF icon
When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the
engine switch is turned off then changed to
IGNITION ON mode, the RCD function
will be enabled automatically.)
Use the meter control switches to ena-
ble/disable the RCD function. (P.94)
RCD (Rear Camera Detec-
tion) function*
When the vehicle is backing up, the
rear camera detection function can
detect pedestrians in the detection
area behind the vehicle. If a pedes-
trian is detected, a buzzer will
sound and an icon will be displayed
on the Center Display to inform the
driver of the pedestrian.
Center Display
Turning the RCD function on/off
A
B
360
4-5. Using the driving support systems
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select “PKSA”
and then press .
3Press or to select “RCD”
and then press .
When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF indicator (P.82) illuminates.
If the rear camera detection function
detects a pedestrian in the detection
area, the buzzer and pedestrian detec-
tion will operate as follows:
If a pedestrian is detected in area
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on
If a pedestrian is detected in area
Buzzer (When the vehicle is sta-
tionary): Sounds 3 times
Buzzer (When the vehicle is back-
ing up, when a pedestrian
approaches the rear of the vehicle):
Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on
If the system determines that your
vehicle may collide with a pedes-
trian in area
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3
times and then stays on
The rear camera detection function is
operational when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
RCD function is on.
The shift position is in R.
Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (P.350)
If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable
Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered
with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is
removed from the rear camera lens, the sys-
tem should return to normal. (It may be nec-
essary to drive the vehicle for some time
before the system returns to normal.)
If “Rear Camera Detection Unavaila-
ble” is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display
If this message is displayed after the bat-
tery has been disconnected and recon-
nected, fully turn the steering wheel to
the left and then the right on level ground.
If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear cam-
era lens may be dirty. Clean the rear
camera lens.
When a pedestrian is detected
A
A
B
B
C
C
361
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
Some pedestrians, such as the following,
may not be detected by the rear camera
detection function, preventing the func-
tion from operating properly:
Pedestrians who are bending forward or
squatting
Pedestrians who are lying down
Pedestrians who are running
Pedestrians who suddenly enter the
detection area
People riding a bicycle, skateboard, or
other light vehicle
Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making
their silhouette obscure
Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-
den by an object, such as a cart or
umbrella
Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-
ness, such as at night
In some situations, such as the following,
pedestrians may not be detected by the
rear camera detection function, prevent-
ing the function from operating properly:
When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
When a very bright light, such as the sun,
or the headlights of another vehicle,
shines directly into the rear camera
When backing up in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes sud-
denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a
garage or underground parking lot
When backing up in a dim environment
such as during dusk or in an underground
parking lot
Even though there are no pedestrians in
the detection area, some objects, such as
the following, may be detected, possibly
causing the rear camera detection func-
tion to operate.
Three dimensional objects, such as a
pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-
cle
Moving objects, such as a car or motor-
cycle
Objects moving toward your vehicle
when backing up, such as flags or pud-
dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,
steam, rain, or snow)
Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,
road repairs, white lines, pedestrian
crossings or fallen leaves on the road
Metal covers (gratings), such as those
used for drainage ditches
Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet
road surface
The roadside or bumps on the road
Shadows on the road
In some situations, such as the following,
the rear camera detection function may
operate even though there are no pedes-
trians in the detection area.
When backing up toward the roadside or
a bump on the road
If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as
when carrying a heavy load
•When backing up toward an
incline/decline
If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load
If an electronic component, such as a
backlit license plate or rear fog light, is
installed near the rear camera
If a bumper protector, such as an addi-
tional trim strip, is installed to the rear
bumper
If the orientation of the rear camera has
been changed
If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of
the vehicle
When water is flowing over the rear cam-
era lens
When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
If there is a flashing light in the detection
area, such as the emergency flashers of
another vehicle
Situations in which the rear camera
detection function may be difficult to
notice
If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the
surrounding area is noisy, the volume of
the audio system volume is high, the air
conditioning system is being used, etc.
If the temperature in the cabin is
362
4-5. Using the driving support systems
extremely high or low, the audio system
screen may not operate correctly.
*
: If equipped
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects)
Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect
static objects, such as a wall, in the
detection area when driving at a low
speed or backing up. (P.367)
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) (if
equipped)
Rear radar sensors are used to detect
approaching vehicles in the detection
area behind the vehicle when backing
up. (P.372)
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)*
The Parking Support Brake system
consists of the following functions
that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such as when
parking. When the system deter-
mines that a collision with a
detected object or pedestrian is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action. If
the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a collision with a detected
object or pedestrian is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
help reduce the impact of the colli-
sion.
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
system
363
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) (if equipped)
A rear camera sensor is used to detect
pedestrians in the detection area
behind the vehicle when backing up.
(P.375)
The Parking Support Brake can be
enabled/disabled on the multi-informa-
tion display. All of the Parking Support
Brake functions (static objects,
rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedes-
trians) are enabled/disabled simultane-
ously.
Use the meter control switches to ena-
ble/disable the parking support brake.
(P.94)
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select
and then press .
When the Parking Support Brake is disa-
bled, the PKSB OFF indicator (P.82)
illuminates.
To re-enable the system when it was disa-
bled, select on the multi-information
display, select and then On. If disa-
bled using this method, the system will not
be re-enabled by turning the engine switch
off and then to IGNITION ON mode.
WARNING
Limitations of the Parking Support
Brake system
Do not overly rely on the system, as
doing so may lead to an accident. Always
drive while checking the safety of the
surroundings of the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle and road con-
ditions, weather, etc., the system may not
operate.
The detection capabilities of sensors,
radars and camera are limited. Always
drive while checking the safety of the
surroundings of the vehicle.
Do not attempt to test the operation of
this system by driving the vehicle
toward another vehicle, a person or
detected object, as it may not operate
properly, possibly leading to an acci-
dent.
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive carefully, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
The Parking Support Brake system is
designed to provide support to lessen
the severity of collisions. However, it
may not operate in some situations.
The Parking Support Brake system is
not designed to stop the vehicle com-
pletely. Additionally, even if the system
has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary
to depress the brake pedal immedi-
ately as brake control will be canceled
after approximately 2 seconds.
NOTICE
If “Parking Support Brake Unavaila-
ble” is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display
If this message is displayed immediately
after the engine switch is changed to
IGNITION ON mode, operate the vehi-
cle carefully, paying attention to your
surroundings. It may be necessary to
drive the vehicle for a certain amount of
time before the system returns to normal.
(If the system is not return to normal after
driving for a while, clean the rear camera
lens.)
Enabling/Disabling the Parking
Support Brake
364
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If the engine output restriction control
or brake control operates, a buzzer will
sound and a message will be displayed
on the Center Display and multi-infor-
mation display, to alert the driver.
Depending on the situation, engine output
restriction control will operate to either
limit acceleration or restrict output as
much as possible.
On vehicles with a head-up display, the
head-up display will display the same mes-
sage as the multi-information display.
Engine output restriction control is
operating (acceleration restriction)
Acceleration greater than a certain
amount is restricted by the system.
Center Display: No warning displayed
Multi-information display: “Object
Detected Acceleration Reduced”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Does not sound
Engine output restriction control is
operating (output restricted as
much as possible)
The system has determined that stron-
ger-than-normal brake operation is neces-
sary.
Center Display: “BRAKE!”
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Brake control is operating
The system determined that emergency
braking is necessary.
Center Display: “BRAKE!”
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Vehicle stopped by system opera-
tion
The vehicle has been stopped by brake
control operation.
Center Display: “Press Brake Pedal”
Multi-information display: “Switch to
Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not
depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be dis-
played.)
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
If the Parking Support Brake deter-
mines that a collision with a detected
object or pedestrian is possible, the
engine output will be restricted to
restrain any increase in the vehicle
speed. (Engine output restriction con-
trol: See figure 2.)
Additionally, if the accelerator pedal
continues to be depressed, the brakes
will be applied automatically to reduce
the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See
figure 3.)
Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking
Support Brake) is disabled
Displays and buzzers for engine
output restriction control and
brake control
System overview
365
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Figure 2 When engine output
restriction control operates
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control
begins operating
System determines that possibility
of collision with detected object is
high
Engine output reduced
Example: Multi-information display:
“BRAKE!”
Figure 3 When brake control oper-
ates
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control
begins operating
System determines that possibility
of collision with detected object is
high
Engine output reduced
System determines that possibility
of collision with detected object is
extremely high
Brake control begins operating
Brake control strength increased
Example: Multi-information display:
“BRAKE!”
Example: Multi-information display:
“Switch to Brake”
If the Parking Support Brake has oper-
ated
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of
the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the
Parking Support Brake operates unneces-
sarily, brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or waiting for
approximately 2 seconds for it to automati-
cally be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
366
4-5. Using the driving support systems
operated by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support Brake
when it has been disabled due to operation
of the Parking Support Brake, either enable
the system again (P.363), or turn the
engine switch off and then back to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Additionally, if any of the following condi-
tions are met, the system will be re-enabled
automatically and the PKSB OFF indicator
will turn off:
The P shift position is selected
The object is no longer detected in the
traveling direction of the vehicle
The traveling direction of the vehicle
changes
*
*
: Except when the Parking Support Brake
function (rear pedestrians) operated.
If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”
is displayed on the multi-information
display
If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear cam-
era lens may be dirty. Clean the camera
lens. If this message is displayed when the
shift position is any position other than R,
a sensor on the front or rear bumper may
be dirty. Clean the sensors and their sur-
rounding area on the bumpers.
Initialization may not have been per-
formed after a battery terminal was dis-
connected and reconnected. Initialize the
system. (P.366)
If this message continues to be displayed
even after initialization, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”
and “Parking Assist Unavailable” are
displayed on the multi-information dis-
play
Water may be continuously flowing over the
sensor surface, such as in a heavy rain.
When the system determines that it is nor-
mal, the system will return to normal.
If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”
and “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” are
displayed on the multi-information dis-
play
A sensor may be covered with water
drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the
water drops, ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the
sensor to return the system to normal. If
this message continues to be displayed
even after cleaning the sensor, or is dis-
played even though the sensor is clean,
have the vehicle inspected by any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
A sensor may be frozen. Once the ice
melts, the system will return to normal.
If a battery terminal has been discon-
nected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized. To initial-
ize the system, drive the vehicle straight
ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of
approximately 35 km/h (22 mph) or more.
Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking
Support Brake function, turn the steering
wheel fully to the left and right with the vehi-
cle stopped.
367
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
*
:If equipped
This function will operate in situations
such as the following if an object is
detected in the traveling direction of
the vehicle.
When traveling at a low speed and
the brake pedal is not depressed, or
is depressed late
When the accelerator pedal is
depressed excessively
When the vehicle moves in the unin-
tended direction due to the wrong
shift position being selected
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (static objects)*
If the sensors detect a static object,
such as a wall, in the travelling
direction of the vehicle and the sys-
tem determines that a collision may
occur due to the vehicle suddenly
moving forward due to an acciden-
tal accelerator pedal operation, the
vehicle moving the unintended
direction due to the wrong shift
position being selected, or while
parking or traveling at low speeds,
the system will operate to lessen
the impact with the detected static
object and reduce the resulting
damage.
Examples of function operation
368
4-5. Using the driving support systems
P.351
Types of sensors
WARNING
To ensure the Parking Support Brake
can operate properly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the sensors (
P.351). Failure
to do so may cause a sensor to not oper-
ate properly, and may cause an accident.
Do not modify, disassemble or paint
the sensors.
Do not replace a sensor with a part
other than a genuine part.
Do not subject a sensor or its sur-
rounding area to a strong impact.
Do not damage the sensors, and
always keep them clean.
Handling the suspension
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or inclination of the
vehicle may prevent the sensors from
detecting objects correctly or cause the
system to not operate or operate unnec-
essarily.
If the Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) operates unnecessar-
ily, such as at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) operates
unnecessarily, such as at a railroad cross-
ing, brake control will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds, allowing you
to proceed forward and leave the area,
brake control can also be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal. Depressing
the accelerator pedal after brake control
is canceled will allow you to proceed for-
ward and leave the area.
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor mal-
functioning.
When using a high pressure washer to
wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-
sors directly, as doing so may cause a
sensor to malfunction.
When using steam to clean the vehicle,
do not direct steam too close to the
sensors as doing so may cause a sen-
sor to malfunction.
When to disable the Parking Support
Brake
In the following situations, disable the
Parking Support Brake as the system
may operate even though there is no
possibility of a collision.
When inspecting the vehicle using a
chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free
roller
When loading the vehicle onto a boat,
truck or other transport vessel
If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
If the front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered due to the carried load
369
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
The Parking Support Brake function
(static object) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)
and all of the following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or
less.
There is a static object in the traveling
direction of the vehicle and 2 to 4 m (6 to
13 ft.) away.
The Parking Support Brake determines
that a stronger-than-normal brake opera-
tion is necessary to avoid a collision.
Brake control
•Engine output restriction control is oper-
ating.
The Parking Support Brake determines
that an immediate brake operation is nec-
essary to avoid a collision.
The Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
The system determines that the collision
has become avoidable with normal brake
operation.
The static object is no longer 2 to 4 m (6
to 13 ft.) away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
Brake control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake
control.
The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.
The static object is no longer 2 to 4 m (6
to 13 ft.) away from the vehicle or in the
traveling direction of the vehicle.
Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects)
P.366
Detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects)
The detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) differs from
the detection range of the Lexus parking
assist-sensor. (P.354) Therefore, even if
the Lexus parking assist-sensor detects an
object and provides a warning, the Parking
Support Brake function (static objects) may
not start operating.
Objects that the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) may not detect
The sensors may not be able to detect cer-
tain objects, such as the following:
Pedestrian
Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials
that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic
waves
Objects which are not perpendicular to
the ground, are not perpendicular to the
traveling direction of the vehicle, are une-
ven or are waving
Low objects
Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes
and signposts
Objects that are extremely close to the
bumper
Sharply-angled objects
Tall objects with upper sections project-
ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-
cle
Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may not
operate
When driving with the shift position in N
Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer
Regardless of whether the Lexus parking
WARNING
When equipment that may obstruct a
sensor is installed, such as a towing
eyelet, bumper protector (an addi-
tional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or
snow plow
When using an automatic car wash
370
4-5. Using the driving support systems
assist-sensor buzzer is enabled or not
(P.351), if the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) is enabled
(P.363), the front or rear sensors detect
an object and brake control is performed,
the Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer will
sound to notify the driver of the approxi-
mate distance to the object.
Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may
operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
In some situations, such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects) may operate even though there is
no possibility of a collision.
Vehicle surroundings
When driving on a narrow road
When driving on a gravel road or in an
area with tall grass
When driving toward a banner, flag,
low-hanging branch or boom barrier
(such as those used at railroad crossings,
toll gates and parking lots)
When driving on a narrow path sur-
rounded by a structure, such as in a tun-
nel or on an iron bridge
When parallel parking
When there is a rut or hole in the surface
of the road
When driving on a metal cover (grating),
such as those used for drainage ditches
When driving on a steep slope
If a sensor is hit by a large amount of
water, such as when driving on a flooded
road
Weather
If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,
etc. (when cleared, the system will return
to normal)
If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
When driving in inclement weather such
as fog, snow or a sandstorm
When strong winds are blowing
Other ultrasonic wave sources
When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,
motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicles, the clearance sonar of other
vehicles or other devices which produce
ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
If a sticker or an electronic component,
such as a backlit license plate (especially
fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole
or wireless antenna is installed near a
sensor
Changes in the vehicle posture
If the vehicle is significantly tilted
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load
If the orientation of a sensor has been
changed due to a collision or other
impact
Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may not
operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, this
function may not operate properly.
Weather
When a sensor or the area around a sen-
sor is extremely hot or cold
When strong winds are blowing
371
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
If a sensor is covered with water drops,
ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the sys-
tem will return to normal)
If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
When driving in inclement weather such
as fog, snow or a sandstorm
When the sensor is frozen (Once the
sensor thaws, the system will return to
normal)
Vehicle surroundings
When an object that cannot be detected
is between the vehicle and a detected
object
If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle,
bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the
vehicle or runs out from the side of the
vehicle
The vehicle is approaching a tall or
curved curb.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass.
If objects draw too close to the sensor.
Other ultrasonic waves sources
When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,
motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicles, the clearance sonar of other
vehicles or other devices which produce
ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
If a sticker or an electronic component,
such as a backlit license plate (especially
fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole
or wireless antenna is installed near a
sensor
Changes in the vehicle posture
If the vehicle is significantly tilted
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load
If the orientation of a sensor has been
changed due to a collision or other
impact
When equipment that may obstruct a
sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-
let, bumper protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
If a sensor has been painted or covered
with a sticker, etc.
372
4-5. Using the driving support systems
*
:If equipped
This function will operate in situations
such as the following if a vehicle is
detected in the traveling direction of
the vehicle.
When reversing, a vehicle is
approaching and the brake pedal is
not depressed, or is depressed late
P.346
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) will operate
when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)
and all of the following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or
less.
Vehicles which are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of approximately 8 km/h
(5 mph) or more.
The shift position is in R.
The Parking Support Brake determines
that a stronger than normal brake opera-
tion is necessary to avoid a collision with
an approaching vehicle.
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear-crossing vehicles)*
If a rear radar sensor detects a vehi-
cle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle and the
system determines that the possi-
bility of a collision is high, this func-
tion will perform brake control to
reduce the likelihood of an impact
with the approaching vehicle.
Examples of function operation
Types of sensors
WARNING
To ensure the Parking Support Brake
(rear-crossing vehicles) can operate
properly
Observe the following precautions
regarding the rear side radar sensors
(P.346). Failure to do so may cause a
sensor to not operate properly, and may
cause an accident.
Do not modify, disassemble or paint
the sensors.
Do not replace a rear side radar sen-
sor with a part other than a genuine
part.
Do not damage the rear side radar
sensors, and always keep the radar
sensors and their surrounding area on
the bumper clean.
If the area around a rear side radar
sensor is subjected to an impact, the
system may not operate properly due
to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
373
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Brake control
•Engine output restriction control is oper-
ating.
The Parking Support Brake determines
that an emergency brake operation is
necessary to avoid a collision with an
approaching vehicle.
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operat-
ing when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
The collision becomes avoidable with
normal brake operation.
A vehicle is no longer approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
Brake control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake
control.
The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.
A vehicle is no longer approaching from
the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles)
P.366
Detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) dif-
fers from the detection area of the RCTA
function (P.357). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle and pro-
vides an alert, the Parking Support Brake
function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not
start operating.
Conditions under which the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-crossing
vehicles) will not detect a vehicle
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to
detect the following types of vehicles and/or
objects:
Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
Vehicles backing up in a parking space
next to your vehicle
Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
due to obstructions
Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or
decelerate near your vehicle
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.
Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
Vehicles approaching from the parking
spaces next to your vehicle
Objects which are extremely close to a
radar sensor
Vehicles which are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of less than approxi-
mately 8 km/h (5 mph)
Vehicles which are approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a
traveling speed of more than approxi-
mately 24 km/h (15 mph)
PKSB buzzer
If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and
brake control is performed, a buzzer will
sound to notify the driver.
Situations in which the system may
operate even though there is no possi-
bility of a collision
In some situations such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even
though there is no possibility of a collision.
When the parking space faces a street
and vehicles are being driven on the
374
4-5. Using the driving support systems
street
When a detected vehicle turns while
approaching the vehicle
When a vehicle passes by the side of your
vehicle
When the distance between your vehicle
and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may
reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short
When there are spinning objects near
your vehicle such as the fan of an air con-
ditioning unit
When water is splashed or sprayed
toward the rear bumper, such as from a
sprinkler
Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
may not operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, the
radar sensors may not detect an object and
this function may not operate properly
Stationary objects
When a sensor or the area around a sen-
sor is extremely hot or cold
If the rear bumper is covered with ice,
snow, dirt, etc.
When it is raining heavily or water strikes
the vehicle
If the vehicle is significantly tilted
When equipment that may obstruct a
sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-
let, bumper protector (an additional trim
strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load
If an electronic component, such as a
backlit license plate (especially fluores-
cent type), fog lights, fender pole or wire-
less antenna is installed near a radar
sensor
If the orientation of a radar sensor has
been changed
When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehi-
cle
If a vehicle is approaching the rear of
your vehicle rapidly
Situations in which the radar sensor may
not detect a vehicle
When a vehicle approaches from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle while
you are turning while backing up
When turning while backing up
375
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When backing out of a shallow angle
parking spot
When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade
When a vehicle turns into the detection
area
*
: If equipped
When a pedestrian is detected behind
the vehicle while backing up, the brake
pedal is not depressed or is depressed
late.
Displays a message to urge the driver
to take evasive action when a pedes-
trian is detected in the detection area
behind the vehicle. (A message will
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear pedestrians)*
If the rear camera sensor detects a
pedestrian behind the vehicle while
backing up and the system deter-
mines that the possibility of collid-
ing with the detected pedestrian is
high, a buzzer will sound. If the sys-
tem determines that the possibility
of colliding with the detected
pedestrian is extremely high, the
brakes will be applied automatically
to help reduce the impact of the
collision.
Examples of system operation
Center Display
376
4-5. Using the driving support systems
also be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display and head-up display [if
equipped].)
Pedestrian detection icon
Brake reminder
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated (P.84)
and all of the following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
The vehicle speed is 15 km/h (9 mph) or
less.
The shift position is in R.
The rear camera sensor detects a pedes-
trian behind the vehicle while backing up
and the system determines that the possi-
bility of colliding with the detected
pedestrian is high.
Brake control
Engine output restriction control is oper-
ating.
The Parking Support Brake determines
that an emergency brake operation is
necessary to avoid a collision with a
pedestrians.
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) will stop operating
when
The function will stop operating if any of the
following conditions are met:
Engine output restriction control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
The collision becomes avoidable with
normal brake operation.
The pedestrian is no longer detected
behind your vehicle.
Brake control
The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed
since the vehicle was stopped by brake
control.
The brake pedal is depressed after the
vehicle is stopped by brake control.
The pedestrian is no longer detected
behind your vehicle.
Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
function (rear pedestrians)
P.366
WARNING
If the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) operates unneces-
sarily
Depress the brake pedal immediately
after the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation
of the function is canceled by depressing
the brake pedal.)
Correct use of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians)
Do not overly rely on the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (rear pedestrians).
Depending on the road conditions, vehi-
cle conditions and weather, this function
may not operate correctly. As the detec-
tion performance of the rear camera is
limited, always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
Additionally, if a warning message is dis-
played on the center display indicating
that the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) is unavailable, the
function cannot be used. Even if these
warnings are not output, the driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.
A
B
377
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs
from the detection area of the RCD func-
tion (P.360). Therefore, even if the RCD
function detects a pedestrian and provides
an alert, the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) may not start operating.
Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
Some pedestrians, such as the following,
may not be detected by the Parking Sup-
port Brake function (rear pedestrians),
preventing the function from operating
properly:
Pedestrians who are bending forward or
squatting
Pedestrians who are lying down
Pedestrians who are running
Pedestrians who suddenly enter the
detection area
People riding a bicycle, skateboard, or
other light vehicle
Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making
their silhouette obscure
Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-
den by an object, such as a cart or
umbrella
Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-
ness, such as at night
In some situations, such as the following,
pedestrians may not be detected by the
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians), preventing the function
from operating properly:
When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
When a very bright light, such as the sun,
or the headlights of another vehicle,
shines directly into the rear camera
When backing up in a place where the
surrounding brightness changes sud-
denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a
garage or underground parking lot
When backing up in a dim environment
such as during dusk or in an underground
parking lot
Even though there are no pedestrians in
the detection area, some objects, such as
the following, may be detected, possibly
causing the Parking Support Brake func-
tion (rear pedestrians) to operate.
Three dimensional objects, such as a
pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-
cle
Moving objects, such as a car or motor-
cycle
Objects moving toward your vehicle
when backing up, such as flags or pud-
dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,
steam, rain, or snow)
Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,
road repairs, white lines, pedestrian
crossings, puddles or fallen leaves on the
road
Metal covers (gratings), such as those
used for drainage ditches
Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet
road surface
The roadside or bumps on the road
Shadows on the road
In some situations, such as the following,
the Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) may operate even though
there are no pedestrians in the detection
area.
When backing up toward the roadside or
a bump on the road
If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as
when carrying a heavy load
•When backing up toward an
incline/decline
If the suspension has been modified or
tires of a size other than specified are
installed
If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load
If an electronic component, such as a
backlit license plate or rear fog light, is
installed near the rear camera
If a bumper protector, such as an addi-
tional trim strip, is installed to the rear
bumper
If the orientation of the rear camera has
been changed
If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of
the vehicle
When water is flowing over the rear cam-
era lens
378
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,
snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
If there is a flashing light in the detection
area, such as the emergency flashers of
another vehicle
Vehicles without Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
1Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel econ-
omy, quietness, and dynamic performance.
Suitable for city driving.
Press the switch to change the driving
mode to normal mode when not in normal
mode.
2Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve fuel
economy through moderate throttle char-
acteristics and by controlling the operation
of the air conditioning system (heat-
ing/cooling).
When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving
mode select switch is turned backward, the
Eco drive mode indicator will come on.
3Sport mode
Controls the transmission and engine to
provide quick, powerful acceleration. This
mode also changes the steering feel, mak-
ing it suitable for when agile driving
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected
to suit driving condition.
Selecting a drive mode
379
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
response is desired, such as when driving
on roads with many curves.
When not in sport mode, if the driving
mode select switch is turned forward, the
sport mode indicator will comes on.
Vehicles with Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
1Normal mode/Custom mode
Normal mode and custom mode are
selected by pressing the driving mode
select switch. Each time the switch is
pressed, the driving mode changes
between normal mode and custom mode.
When normal mode is selected, the normal
mode indicator comes on.
When custom mode is selected, the cus-
tom mode indicator comes on.
Press the switch to change the driving
mode to normal mode when not in normal
mode.
•Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel econ-
omy, quietness, and dynamic performance.
Suitable for city driving.
When the shift position is in D, an appropri-
ate gear for sporty driving may automati-
cally be selected according to driver
performance and driving conditions.
Custom mode
Allows you to drive with the powertrain,
chassis and air conditioning system func-
tions set to your preferred settings. Cus-
tom mode settings can only be changed on
the drive mode customization display of
the Center Display. (P.396)
2Comfort mode
By controlling the suspension, riding com-
fort is further enhanced. Suitable for city
driving.
When not in comfort mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned backward, the
comfort mode indicator comes on.
3Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an
eco-friendly manner and improve fuel
economy through moderate throttle char-
acteristics and by controlling the operation
of the air conditioning system (heat-
ing/cooling).
When in comfort mode, if the driving mode
select switch is turned backward, the Eco
drive mode indicator comes on.
4Sport mode
Sport S mode
Controls the transmission and engine to
provide quick, powerful acceleration. This
mode is suitable for when agile driving
response is desired, such as when driving
on roads with many curves.
When not in Sport S mode, if the driving
mode select switch is turned forward, the
Sport S mode indicator comes on.
A
B
380
4-5. Using the driving support systems
•Sport S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and
driving stability by simultaneously con-
trolling the steering and suspension in
addition to the transmission and engine.
Suitable for sportier driving.
When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode
select switch is turned forward, the Sport
S+ mode indicator comes on.
If the driving mode select switch is oper-
ated while the opening screen is being
displayed
If the driving mode select switch is operated
while the opening screen is being displayed,
the driving mode will be changed and the
meter display will change accordingly after
the opening screen operation has com-
pleted.
Operation of the air conditioning sys-
tem in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cool-
ing operations and fan speed of the air con-
ditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency.
To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations:
Adjust the fan speed (P.403)
Turn off Eco drive mode
Automatic deactivation of sport mode
and custom mode
If the engine switch is turned off after driv-
ing in sport mode or custom mode, the
drive mode will be changed to normal
mode.
Driving mode pop-up display
When the driving mode is changed, the
selected driving mode will be temporarily
displayed on the side display. (P.397)
*
: If equipped
Situations in which the vehicle height
control may not operate properly
In the following situations, the vehicle
height may change slowly or may not
change to the correct height:
When the vehicle comes into contact
with snow, ice, stone, etc.
When the ambient temperature is low
When the accumulator tank pressure is
low
In the following situations, the vehicle
height may not change:
If the hood or trunk is not fully closed
If the brake pedal depressed and the
vehicle is stopped
When the vehicle is on a significantly
uneven or undulating road
When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a
slope
Operating sound of the air suspension
compressor and valves
In the following situations the air suspension
compressor and valves may operate and a
sound may be heard, but this does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
Electronically modulated air
suspension*
The height of the vehicle when driv-
ing can be selected using the vehi-
cle height adjustment switch. The
selected height level will be main-
tained regardless of the number of
passengers or weight of cargo.
Additionally, settings of the follow-
ing functions can be changed:
Enabling/Disabling controls of
access mode
Temporarily disabling vehicle
height control
381
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
When passengers enter or exit the vehi-
cle or cargo is loaded or unloaded, caus-
ing the vehicle height to change
When the height of the vehicle is
changed using the vehicle height adjust-
ment switch
When the doors are opened/closed
When the doors are locked/unlocked
When the accumulator tank pressure is
low
When the accumulator tank pressure is low,
the air suspension compressor and valves
may operate repeatedly even though the
vehicle height is not being changed. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
When “Air Suspension System Malfunc-
tion Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The system may not operate properly. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
To adjust the vehicle height to one
appropriate for road and driving con-
ditions, press the vehicle height adjust-
ment switch.
Turns high mode on/off.
When high mode is enabled, the high
mode indicator on the meter will illuminate.
The vehicle height will increase by approxi-
mately 20 mm (0.8 in.) from its normal
WARNING
Precautions for the electronically
modulated air suspension
Even if the engine is not running, the
vehicle height may change through
vehicle height control. Be sure to keep
your hands and feet away from the
area underneath the vehicle and
between the tires and vehicle body.
Otherwise part of your body may get
caught, possibly causing an injury.
In situations such as the following,
make sure to disable all functions of
the vehicle height control of the elec-
tronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change and part or your body may be
caught under the vehicle, possibly
causing injury.
When the vehicle is parked on a curb
If any of the wheels is not touching the
ground
If the vehicle needs to be jacked up
If the vehicle is to be tied down
If the vehicle is to be towed
NOTICE
Parking precaution
If the vehicle is parked for a long time,
the vehicle height may change due to
changes in the ambient temperature.
When parking the vehicle, make sure
that the area above and below the
vehicle is clear, so that the vehicle will
not contact anything if its height
changes.
Be careful when parking the vehicle in
an area with a low ceiling or near low
hanging objects, as the vehicle height
will increase when passengers exit the
vehicle and exit control of access
mode operates.
When the doors are closed or locked,
the vehicle height may decrease.
When parking in a parking lot with a
device which raises to contact the bot-
tom of the vehicle, make sure to disa-
ble the vehicle height control.
Selecting the vehicle height
382
4-5. Using the driving support systems
position.
When the vehicle height is increased by a
control of access mode press the vehicle
height adjustment switch twice to ena-
ble/disable high mode.
The vehicle height adjustment switch
can be used to change the mode when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
System protection function
If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased
and decreased using the vehicle height
adjustment switch, etc., the system may not
operate temporarily.
In order to improve the ease of enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle, the vehicle
height will automatically increase when
the P shift position is selected and a
door is opened.
When any of the following conditions
are met, the vehicle will return to its
previous height:
A certain amount of time has
elapsed since the doors were closed
The vehicle speed reaches approxi-
mately 5 km/h (3 mph)
The doors are locked using the
smart entry & start system or wire-
less remote control
Enabling/Disabling access mode
1Press the or meter control
switch to select .
2Press the or meter control
switch to select “Vehicle Settings”
and then press .
3Press the or meter control
switch to select and then
press .
4Press the or meter control
switch to select “Access Mode” and
then press .
The setting will change between ena-
bled/disabled each time the meter
control switch is pressed.
When the vehicle height has been
increased by a control of access mode
Press the vehicle height adjustment switch
with the engine switch in any mode to return
the vehicle to its previous vehicle height.
WARNING
When operating the vehicle height
adjustment switch
When operating the vehicle height
adjustment switch, make sure to check
the safety of the area around the vehicle,
as the vehicle height may change and
part of someone’s body may be caught
under the vehicle, possibly causing injury.
Vehicle height control when
entering/exiting the vehicle
(“Access Mode”)
383
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Access mode operation
Access mode will not operate if the vehi-
cle is not parked on a level road surface.
Depending on the current vehicle height,
access mode may not operate.
After the doors are unlocked, if access
mode operates, the vehicle height will
increase by approximately 20 mm (0.8
in.) from its normal position. After the
vehicle has been driven, if access mode
operates, the vehicle height will increase
by approximately 10 mm (0.4 in.) from its
normal position.
If the doors are opened and closed
repeatedly, the system may not operate
temporarily.
Vehicle height control can be tempo-
rarily disabled using the meter control
switches. (P.94)
When to temporarily disable vehicle height
control:P.381
1Press or to select .
2Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
3Press or to select
and then press .
4Press or to select “Height
Control” and then press .
This setting is memorized even if the
engine switch is turned off.
Even if the vehicle height control func-
tions are disabled, they will be enabled
automatically when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 30 km/h (19
mph).
Temporarily disabling vehicle
height control
384
4-5. Using the driving support systems
ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System) (vehicles with Lexus
Safety System + A)
The electronically controlled system
generates braking force correspond-
ing to the brake operation
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the
brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a
slippery road surface
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of brak-
ing force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a
panic stop situation
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding
when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
TRC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and pre-
vent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerat-
ing on slippery roads
Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward move-
ment of the vehicle when starting on an
uphill
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce
the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel.
Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-
tem (if equipped)
By independently controlling the
damping force of the shock absorbers
for each of the 4 wheels according to
the road and driving conditions, this
system helps riding comfort with supe-
rior vehicle stability, and helps good
vehicle posture.
Also, the damping force changes
depending on the selected driving
mode. (P.378)
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte-
grated Management)
Provides integrated control of the
ABS, brake assist, TRC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, EPS and Adaptive Varia-
ble Suspension System (if equipped)
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when
swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes, engine output,
steering assist, and steering ratio
Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard
Lights (if equipped)
The rear side radar sensors detect fol-
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and perfor-
mance, the following systems oper-
ate automatically in response to
various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are
supplementary and should not be
relied upon too heavily when oper-
ating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving assist
systems
385
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
lowing vehicles driving in the same
lane. If the system determines that the
possibility of a rear-end collision is
high, the emergency flashers will flash
rapidly to warn the driver of the follow-
ing vehicle. Simultaneously, a message
will be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display to notify the driver of the
approach of the following vehicle.
Emergency brake signal
When the brakes are applied suddenly,
the stop lights automatically flash to
alert the vehicle behind.
The Secondary Collision Brake (if
equipped)
When the SRS airbag sensor detects a
collision and the system operates, the
brakes and stop lights are automati-
cally controlled to reduce the vehicle
speed and help reduce the possibility
of further damage due to a secondary
collision.
When the TRC/VSC systems are oper-
ating (vehicles without Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A)
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRC/VSC systems are operating.
When the TRC/VSC/ABS systems are
operating (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A)
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.
Disabling the TRC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow,
the TRC system may reduce power from
the engine to the wheels. Pressing the
switch to turn the system off may make it
easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to
free it.
To turn the TRC system off, quickly press
and release the switch.
The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be
shown on the multi-information display.
Press the switch again to turn the sys-
tem back on.
Turning both TRC and VSC systems
To turn the TRC and VSC systems off, press
and hold the switch for more than 3
seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on
and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will
be shown on the multi-information display.
*
Press the switch again to turn the sys-
tem back on.
*
: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision
System), PCS will also be disabled (only
386
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Pre-Collision warning is available). The
PCS warning light will come on and a
message will be displayed on the
multi-information display. (P.285,
293)
When the message is displayed on the
multi-information display showing that
TRC has been disabled even if the
switch has not been pressed
TRC is temporary deactivated. If the infor-
mation continues to show, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Operating conditions of hill-start assist
control
When the following four conditions are met,
the hill-start assist control will operate:
The shift position is in a position other
than P or N (when stating off for-
ward/backward on an upward incline)
The vehicle is stopped
The accelerator pedal is not depressed
The parking brake is not engaged
Engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode
Automatic system cancelation of
hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any
of the following situations:
Shift the shift position to P or N
The accelerator pedal is depressed
The parking brake is engaged
2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the
brake pedal is released
Engine switch is turned Off
Sounds and vibrations caused by the
ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRC and
hill-start assist control systems
A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to
move. This sound does not indicate that a
malfunction has occurred in any of these
systems.
Any of the following conditions may
occur when the above systems are oper-
ating. None of these indicates that a mal-
function has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle
body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard also after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System +
A: The brake pedal may pulsate slightly
after the ABS is activated.
Vehicles without Lexus Safety System +
A: The brake pedal may move down
slightly after the ABS is activated.
ECB operating sound
ECB operating sound may be heard in the
following cases, but it does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred.
Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
operated.
Motor sound of the brake system heard
from the front part of the vehicle when
the driver’s door is opened.
Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when one or two minutes
passed after the stop of the engine.
EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Automatic reactivation of TRC and
VSC systems
After turning the TRC and VSC systems off,
the systems will be automatically re-ena-
bled in the following situations:
When the engine switch is turned off
If only the TRC system is turned off, the
TRC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases
If both the TRC and VSC systems are
turned off, automatic re-enabling will not
occur when vehicle speed increases.
387
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys-
tem
The effectiveness of the EPS system is
reduced to prevent the system from over-
heating when there is frequent steering
input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.
Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn
the engine off. The EPS system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.
Operating conditions of Automatic
Rear Flashing Hazard Lights
When the following two conditions are met,
the Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights
will operate:
The relative speed between your vehicle
and the following vehicle is between
approximately 30 and 100 km/h (19 and
62 mph).
Your vehicle is being driven at approxi-
mately 10 km/h (7 mph) or less or at any
speed with the brake pedal depressed.
Situations in which the Automatic Rear
Flashing Hazard Lights may not operate
properly
In the following situations, the system may
not detect a following vehicle properly:
When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering the sensor or surrounding area
on the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
When the following vehicle is not
approaching from straight behind your
vehicle
When the following vehicle is approach-
ing from an angle
If a vehicle suddenly cuts behind your
vehicle
When the following vehicle is surrounded
by other vehicles
When a bicycle carrier or other acces-
sory is installed to the rear of your vehicle
In the following situations, the system may
operate even though there is no possibil-
ity of a collision
When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
When your vehicle is surrounded by
other vehicles
When your vehicle is stopped to make a
turn at an intersection, etc. and a vehicle
passes your vehicle from straight behind
When your vehicle is stopped on the
roadside, etc. and a vehicle passes close
to the side of your vehicle
When a following vehicle closely
approaches your vehicle before overtak-
ing
When a following vehicle suddenly
approaches to close to your vehicle
When “FHL Not Available” is shown on
the multi-information display
The Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights
function is suspended.
In this case, ice, snow, mud, etc., may be
attached to the bumper in the area around
the sensor. (P.346) The system should
return to normal operation after removing
the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear
bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not
operate normally when driving in extremely
hot or cold environments.
Operating conditions of emergency
brake signal
When the following conditions are met, the
emergency brake signal will operates:
The emergency flashers are off.
Actual vehicle speed is over 55 km/h
(35 mph).
The system judges from the vehicle
deceleration that it is a sudden braking
operation.
Automatic system cancelation of emer-
gency brake signal
The emergency brake signal will be
canceled in any of the following situations:
The emergency flashers are turned on.
388
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The system judges from the vehicle
deceleration that is not a sudden braking
operation.
Secondary Collision Brake operating
conditions
The system operates when the SRS airbag
sensor detects a collision while the vehicle
is in motion. However, the system does not
operate in any of the following situations.
When driving at a low speed
Components are damaged
Secondary Collision Brake automatic
cancellation
The system is automatically canceled in any
of the following situations.
The vehicle speed has decreased to a
certain speed
A certain amount of time elapses during
operation
The accelerator pedal is depressed a
large amount
WARNING
The ABS does not operate effectively
when
The limits of tire gripping performance
have been exceeded (such as exces-
sively worn tires on a snow covered
road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving
at high speed on wet or slick roads.
Stopping distance when the ABS is
operating may exceed that of normal
conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the
vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, especially in the following
situations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or
snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes
or uneven surfaces
TRC/VSC may not operate effec-
tively when
Directional control and power may not
be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRC/VSC sys-
tem is operating. Drive the vehicle care-
fully in conditions where stability and
power may be lost.
Hill-start assist control does not oper-
ate effectively when
Do not overly rely on hill-start assist
control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep
inclines and roads covered with ice.
Unlike the parking brake, hill-start
assist control is not intended to hold
the vehicle stationary for an extended
period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehi-
cle on an incline, as doing so may lead
to an accident.
When the TRC/VSC is activated
(vehicles without Lexus Safety Sys-
tem + A)
The slip indicator light flashes. Always
drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular
care when the indicator light flashes.
When the TRC/ABS/VSC is acti-
vated (vehicles without Lexus Safety
System + A)
The slip indicator light flashes. Always
drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular
care when the indicator light flashes.
389
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
WARNING
When the TRC/VSC systems are
turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed
appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help ensure
vehicle stability and driving force, do not
turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless
necessary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the speci-
fied size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that
the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not
function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for further information when
replacing tires or wheels.
Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or
modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a
system to malfunction.
Secondary Collision Brake
Do not rely solely upon the Secondary
Collision Brake. This system is designed
to help reduce the possibility of further
damage due to a secondary collision,
however, that effect changes according
to various conditions. Overly relying on
the system may result in death or serious
injury.
Handling the rear side radar sensor
(vehicles with Automatic Rear Flash-
ing Hazard Lights)
P.346
390
4-6. Driving tips
4-6.Driving t ips
Use fluids that are appropriate to
the prevailing outside temperatures.
•Engine oil
Engine coolant
•Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect
the condition of the battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four
snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
*
Ensure that all tires are the specified size
and brand, and that chains match the size
of the tires.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehi-
cles with front and rear tires of differing
sizes.
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary prepara-
tions and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive
the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather condi-
tions.
Preparation for winter
WARNING
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of
vehicle control and cause death or seri-
ous injury.
Use tires of the specified size.
Maintain the recommended level of air
pressure.
Do not drive at speeds in excess of the
speed limit or the speed limit specified
for the snow tires being used.
Use snow tires on all, not just some
wheels.
When installing tire chains
Before installing tire chains, make sure to
disable all functions of the vehicle height
control of the electronically modulated
air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change while installing the
tire chains and part or your body may be
caught under the vehicle, possibly caus-
ing injury. (P.383)
Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), which-
ever is lower.
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces
or over potholes.
Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine
braking.
Slow down sufficiently before entering
a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
system. (if equipped)
391
4
4-6. Driving tips
Driving
Perform the following according to the
driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window
or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to
melt the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the
climate control system fan, remove
any snow that has accumulated on
the air inlet vents in front of the
windshield.
Check for and remove any excess
ice or snow that may have accumu-
lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s
roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the
bottom of your shoes before getting
in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a
safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced
speed suitable to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and shift the shift posi-
tion to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze
up, preventing it from being released. If
the vehicle is parked without setting
the parking brake, make sure to block
the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous
because it may cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly, possibly leading to
an accident.
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
the same size
Use the correct tire chain size when
mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire
size.
Side chain (3 mm [0.12 in.] in diam-
eter)
Cross chain (4 mm [0.16 in.] in
diameter)
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow
tires from any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attach-
ment of snow tires affects the operation
of the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
Selecting tire chains
A
B
392
4-6. Driving tips
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
differing sizes
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary depending on location and
type of road. Always check local regu-
lations before installing chains.
Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when
installing and removing chains:
Install and remove tire chains in a safe
location.
Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not
install tire chains on the front tires.
Install tire chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 0.51.0 km (1/41/2 mile).
Install tire chains following the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
To enable the windshield wipers to be
lifted when heavy snow or icy condi-
tions are expected, change the rest
position of the windshield wipers from
the retracted position below the hood
to the service position using the wiper
lever. (P.246)
Regulations on the use of tire
chains
NOTICE
Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
Windshield wipers
5
393
5
Interior features
Interior features
.
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch............................ 394
Center Display........................... 396
Rear Multi Operation Panel
........................................................398
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge......401
5-3. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning
system.........................................403
Rear automatic air conditioning
system.......................................... 413
Heated steering wheel/seat heat-
ers/seat ventilators................. 416
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.........................420
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features ........... 424
Trunk features............................. 429
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ...........432
394
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
5-1.Remote Touch/Display
Switches
“MAP” button
Vehicles with navigation function:
Press this button to display the vehicle’s
current position.
Vehicles without navigation function:
Press this button to display the global map
screen.
“MENU” button
Press this button to display the menu
screen.
Back button
Press this button to display the previous
screen.
Touchpad
Slide your finger on the touchpad and
move the pointer to select a function, letter
and screen button.
Press the touchpad to enter the selected
function, letter or screen button. Certain
finger movements on the touchpad can
perform functions, such as changing map
scalings and scrolling list screens.
Sub function button
When is displayed on the screen, a
function screen assigned to the screen can
be displayed.
Using the touchpad
1Select: Touch the touchpad to
select the desired button on the
screen.
2Enter: Buttons on the screen can be
selected by either depressing or
double tapping the touchpad.
Once a button has been selected,
the screen will change.
Touch operation
Operations are performed by touching
the touchpad with your finger.
Trace
Trace the pad surface while maintaining
contact with the touchpad. Moving the
cursor and the pointer.
Remote Touch
The Remote Touch can be used to
operate the Center Display.
For details on the Remote touch,
refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Remote Touch operation
A
B
C
D
E
395
5
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Interior features
Double tap
Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the
button on the screen.
Flick
Quick and short movement along the
touchpad with you finger. Move the list
screen.
Pinch in/Pinch out
Slide fingers toward each other or apart on
the touchpad. Change the scale of the
map.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the Remote
Touch
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may cause damage to the
Remote Touch.
Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit
cigarettes to contact the Remote
Touch.
Do not subject the Remote Touch to
excessive pressure or strong impact.
Do not push the touchpad with a
strong force or use a sharp pointed
object to operate the pad.
396
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Menu screen
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the menu
screen.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen. For details, refer to “NAVI-
GATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
The displays shown in the illustrations
are used for example only and may dif-
fer from the actual vehicle.
*1
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
*2
: This function is not made available in
some models or areas.
Split-screen display
Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For
Center Display
Center Display overview
Switch Function
Select to display the
“Destination” screen.
*1,
2
Select to display the
audio control screen.
*1
Select to display the
hands-free control
screen.
*1
Select to display the
“Apps” screen.
*1, 2
Select to display the
home screen of Apple
CarPlay.
*1, 2
Select to display the
Android Auto screen.
*1,
2
Select to display the
information screen.
*1
(P.105)
Select to display the
setup screen.
*1
Select to display the air
conditioning control
screen. (P.406)
Switch Function
397
5
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Interior features
example, audio control screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel con-
sumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the
display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side
display.
Main display
For details about the functions and
operation of the main display, refer to
the respective section and “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Side display
The following functions can be dis-
played and operated on the side dis-
play.
Select or to display the desired
screen.
Navigation system
*
Audio
*
Vehicle information (P.107)
Air conditioning system (P.409)
Show/hide the side display
*
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
Screen display during low temperatures
When the ambient temperature is
extremely low, screen response may be
delayed even if the Remote Touch is oper-
ated.
A
B
C
D
E
398
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
*
:If equipped
Home screen
Touch to display the audio control
screen.
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Touch to display the rear air condi-
tioning control screen. (P.414,
418)
Touch to display the rear seat
adjustment screen. (P.172, 181,
183)
Touch to display the relaxation seat
(if equipped) control screen.
(P.175)
Touch to display the rear sun-
shade/rear interior light control
screen. (P.421, 422, 436)
Touch to display the Rear Multi
Operation Panel settings screen.
(P.398)
Touch to display/hide the shortcut
screen.
Shortcut screen
The following can be adjusted or operated:
Rear air conditioning system tempera-
ture setting (P.414)
Rear seat heaters/rear seat ventilators
(P.418)
Audio system
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Rear door sunshades/rear quarter sun-
shades/rear sunshade (P.436)
button
Press to display the home screen.
When the screen is on, press and
hold to turn the screen off.
Rear Multi Operation Panel set-
tings screen
Screen operation settings and the
brightness of the screen can be
changed.
Rear Multi Operation Panel*
The Rear Multi Operation Panel
built-into the rear armrest can be
used to operate the rear audio sys-
tem, air conditioning system, seat,
relaxation seat, shades or lights.
Rear Multi Operation Panel
overview
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
399
5
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Interior features
Touch to turn the screen off.
Press the buttun to display the
home screen.
Touch to adjust the brightness of
the screen.
Touch to display the automatic
screen transition settings screen.
Touch to lock the Rear Multi Oper-
ation Panel.
Auto screen change settings
screen
Touch to turn the automatic screen
transition function on/off.
Touch to set whether the screen will
transition to the home screen or
turn off when the automatic screen
transition function operates.
Touch to set the amount of time
(10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear
Multi Operation Panel must be idle
before the automatic screen transi-
tion function operates.
When the screen is off, press the
button to turn the screen on and display
the previously displayed screen. Press
again to display the home screen.
Unlocking the Rear Multi Opera-
tion Panel
Touch and hold until the unlock sta-
tus indicators ( ) are completely illu-
minated to unlock the Rear Multi
Operation Panel.
Operating the Rear Multi Operation
Panel
When operating the Rear Multi Opera-
tion Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The
Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be
operated with a fingernail, pen, etc.
Use only one finger when operating the
Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear
Multi Operation Panel cannot be oper-
ated with multiple fingers.
When the engine switch is changed to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,
if a hand object, liquid or foreign matter is
touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel,
it may not operate correctly. In this case,
remove anything touching the Rear Multi
Operation Panel and wait for approxi-
mately 30 seconds before operating it
again.
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
A
B
400
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still
cannot be operated normally, press and
hold the button to turn the Rear
Multi Operation Panel off, and then press
the button again to turn it back
on and operate it.
In the following situations, the Rear Multi
Operation Panel may not operate prop-
erly:
If wearing gloves during operation, non
response may occur.
If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
If a screen cover or coating is applied to
on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty
or has liquid attached to it, incorrect
operation or non-response may occur.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel
receives electro magnetic waves, incor-
rect operation or non-response may
occur.
If a mobile phone or other wireless com-
munication device brought near the Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
If the a metal object, such as the follow-
ing, is touching or covering the Rear
Multi Operation Panel:
•Coins
•Keys
Metallic wallets or bags
Magnetic isolation cards
Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging
of a cigarette box
Disposable heat packs
Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables,
such as a USB cable
Mobile devices, such as smartphones,
mobile phones, tablets, etc.
Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Oper-
ation Panel clean. If the Rear Multi Oper-
ation Panel is dirty, it may not operate
correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi
Operation Panel, turn the screen off to
avoid unexpected operation.)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the Rear Multi
Operation Panel
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may cause damage to the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel
free of liquids, such as drinks or rain, as
they may cause a short circuit.
Do not sit on or set heavy objects on
the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
Do not push the Rear Multi Operation
Panel with a strong force or use a
sharp pointed object to operate the
panel.
401
5
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Interior features
5-2.Lexus Climate C oncierge
Select .
The indicator on the Lexus Climate Con-
cierge control screen illuminates, and the
automatic air conditioning system, seat
heaters and ventilators, and heated steer-
ing wheel operate in automatic mode.
If any of the system is operated manually,
the indicator turns off. However, all other
functions continue to operate in automatic
mode.
Changing Lexus Climate Con-
cierge control screen between
front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE
climate control)
Select “Rear” to display the rear air
conditioning system screen.
Select “Front” to display the front air condi-
tioning system screen.
When using the Lexus Climate Con-
cierge
Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated
on the sub function menu or option control
screen. (P.406)
Automatic air conditioning system
(P.403, 413)
The temperature can be adjusted inde-
pendently for each seat.
Seat heaters and ventilators (if
equipped) (P.416)
Heating or ventilation is automatically
selected according to the set tempera-
ture of the air conditioning system, the
outside temperature, etc.
Heated steering wheel (if
equipped) (P.416)
Heated steering wheel operates auto-
Lexus Climate Concierge
The seat heaters (if equipped), seat
ventilators (if equipped) and heated
steering wheel (if equipped) are
each automatically controlled
according to the set temperature of
the air conditioning system, the out-
side and cabin temperature, etc.
Lexus Climate Concierge allows a
comfortable condition to be main-
tained without adjusting each sys-
tem.
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main
menu and move the cursor to
to display the climate control short-
cut buttons. Then, select to dis-
play the Lexus Climate Concierge
control screen.
Turning on Lexus Climate Con-
cierge
Operation of each system
402
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
matically according to the set tempera-
ture of the air conditioning system, the
outside temperature, etc.
Passenger detection functions
When a passenger is detected in the
front passenger seat, the seat heater and
ventilator will operate automatically.
When a passenger is detected in a rear
seat, the seat heater and ventilator will
operate automatically. (vehicles with
power rear seat)
Seat heater/ventilator operation
When automatic mode is selected using the
seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger
detection is not performed.
Rear seat heater operation (vehicles
with DUAL-ZONE climate control)
The rear seat heaters are not controlled by
the Lexus Climate Concierge.
403
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
5-3.Using the a ir conditioning system and defogger
Left-hand side temperature control switch
Automatic mode switch
Off switch
Fan speed decreases switch
Fan speed increases switch
Windshield defogger switch
Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
Outside/recirculated air mode switch
Right-hand side temperature control switch
Adjusting the temperature
Operate the temperature control
switch upwards to increase the tem-
perature and downwards to decrease
the temperature.
Setting the fan speed
Operate the switch to increase the
fan speed and the switch to
decrease the fan speed.
Front automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temper-
ature setting.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and
move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then,
select to display the air conditioning control screen.
The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Air conditioning controls
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
404
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Press the off switch to turn the fan off.
Changing the air flow mode
P.406
Switching between outside air and
recirculated air modes
Press the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.
The mode changes as follows each time
the switch is pressed.
automatic mode (outside air
mode) (recirculated air mode)
automatic mode
When the system is switched to automatic
mode, the air conditioning system operates
automatically.
Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the wind-
shield and front side windows.
Press the windshield defogger switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
switch to outside air mode if the recircu-
lated air mode is used. (It may switch auto-
matically.)
To defog the windshield and the side win-
dows quickly, turn the air flow and temper-
ature up.
To return to the previous mode, press the
windshield defogger switch again when the
windshield is defogged.
Defogging the rear window and
outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear
window, and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view
mirrors.
Press the rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically turn off
after a while. The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and
vehicle speed.
Blower customization
P.409
Windshield wiper de-icer (if
equipped)
P.410
Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C”
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets
and defog the windshield effectively.
If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog
up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recircu-
lated air mode is used.
When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the
vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake mode be set to outside air
mode and the fan speed to any setting
except off.
Outside/recirculated air mode
Setting to the recirculated air mode tem-
porarily is recommended in preventing
dirty air from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle when the
outside air temperature is high.
Outside/recirculated air mode may auto-
matically switch depending on the tem-
perature setting or the inside
temperature.
Registering air conditioning settings to
electronic keys
Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic
key and turning the engine switch to
IGNITION ON mode will recall that
key’s registered air conditioning settings.
405
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
When the engine switch is turned off, the
current air conditioning settings will auto-
matically be registered to the electronic
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The system may not operate correctly if
more than one electronic key is in the
vicinity or if the smart entry & start system
is used to unlock a passenger door.
The doors that can recall the air condi-
tioning setting
*
when unlocked using the
smart entry & start system can be
changed. For details, contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
*
: The doors that can recall the driving
position memory are changed at the
same time.
Operation of the air conditioning sys-
tem in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning sys-
tem is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel
efficiency:
Engine speed and compressor operation
controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
Fan speed restricted when automatic
mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations:
Adjust the fan speed
Turn off Eco drive mode (P.378)
When the outside temperature falls to
nearly 0°C (32°F)
The dehumidification function may not
operate even when “A/C” is selected.
Ventilation and air conditioning odors
To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning
system to the outside air mode.
During use, various odors from inside and
outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning sys-
tem. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occur-
ring:
It is recommended that the air condition-
ing system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be
delayed for a short period of time imme-
diately after the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode or pollen
removal mode.
When parking, the system automatically
switches to outside air mode to encour-
age better air circulation throughout the
vehicle, helping to reduce odors that
occur when starting the vehicle.
Air conditioning filter
P.488
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
WARNING
To prevent the windshield from fog-
ging up
Do not use the windshield defogger
switch during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the outside
air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, blocking your vision.
When the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are operating
Do not touch the outside rear view mir-
ror surfaces, as they can become very
hot and burn you.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system
on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
406
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Main control screen
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen.
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control
Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the
main screen.
: Display the air conditioning control
screen
: Display the heated steering
wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-
tor control screen (if equipped)
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen (if equipped)
: Display the Lexus Climate Con-
cierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
Adjust the left side seat tempera-
ture setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates
Adjust the right side seat tempera-
ture setting
Switch the following functions on
and off
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification
function
If the indicator is turned off, the system will
blow ambient temperature airor heated air.
: Select front seat concentrated
airflow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
: Changing the fan speed setting
during the automatic mode operation
(Blower customization)
: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver
and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (P.412)
Air conditioning control screen
A
B
C
D
E
F
407
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-
trol
Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the
main screen.
: Display the front air conditioning
control screen
: Display the heated steering
wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-
tor control screen
: Display the rear air conditioning con-
trol screen
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen
: Display the Lexus Climate Con-
cierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
Adjust the left side seat tempera-
ture setting
Select the right side seat air flow
mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates
Select the left side seat air flow
mode
Adjust the fan speed setting
Switch the following functions on
and off
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification
function
If the indicator is turned off, the system will
blow ambient temperature airor heated air.
: Select front seat concentrated
airflow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
: Changing the fan speed setting
during the automatic mode operation
(Blower customization)
: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
“4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the
driver, front passenger and left and right
rear passenger seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)
Adjust the right side seat tempera-
ture setting
Option control screen
Select on the sub menu to display
the option control screen.
The functions can be switched on and off.
When the function is on, the indicator illu-
minates on the screen.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
408
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
Adjusting the temperature for
driver and passenger seats sepa-
rately (“DUAL” mode) (P.412)
Cooling and dehumidification func-
tion
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the sys-
tem will blow ambient temperature airor
heated air.
nanoe™
*
system on/off
Select front seat concentrated air-
flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
Prevent ice from building up on the
windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if
equipped)
Removing pollen from the air (Pol-
len removal mode)
*
: nanoe™ and the nanoe™ mark are
trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-
trol
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
Adjust the temperature for driver,
passenger and rear seats sepa-
rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)
Cooling and dehumidification func-
tion
If the “A/C” indicator is turned off, the sys-
tem will blow ambient temperature airor
heated air.
nanoe™
*
system on/off
Select front seat concentrated air-
flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
Prevent ice from building up on the
windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if
equipped)
Removing pollen from the air (Pol-
len removal mode)
*
: nanoe™ and the nanoe™ mark are
trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
409
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Side display
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control
Display the front seat heaters/front
seat ventilators control screen
(P.417)
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the air flow mode
Set cooling and dehumidification
function on/off
If the indicator is turned off, the system will
blow ambient temperature airor heated air.
Select front seat concentrated air-
flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
Adjusting the temperature for
driver and passenger seats sepa-
rately (“DUAL” mode) (P.412)
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-
trol
Display the front seat heaters/front
seat ventilators control screen
(P.417)
Select the left side seat air flow
mode
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the right side seat air flow
mode
Set cooling and dehumidification
function on/off
If the indicator is turned off, the system will
blow ambient temperature airor heated air.
Select front seat concentrated air-
flow mode (S-FLOW) (P.411)
Adjust the temperature for driver,
passenger and rear seats sepa-
rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (P.412)
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(P.401)
Blower customization
Fan speed setting during the automatic
mode operation can be customized.
Each time is selected, the fan speed
setting mode changes as follows.
“NORMAL” “ECO” “FAST”
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
410
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
“NORMAL”
Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from
building up on the windshield and wiper
blades.
The windshield de-icer will automatically
turn off after a while.
Pollen removal mode
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed
from the air and the air flows to the upper
part of the body.
Usually the system will automatically turn
off after a while.
In order to prevent the windshield from fog-
ging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate or
the outside/recirculated air mode may not
switch to (recirculated air) mode.
Pollen is filtered even if the pollen removal
mode is turned off.
nanoe™ system
This vehicle incorporates a biocidal prod-
uct.
Ionised air generated by a device incorpo-
rated in the vehicle purifies the air in the
cabin by suppressing bacteria.
Active substance: Free radicals generated
in situ from ambient air or water
nanoe™ helps to provide purified air by
emitting electrically charged water parti-
cles through the front center vent on the
driver’s side*.
When the fan is turned on and nanoe™
on the option control screen is selected,
the nanoe™ system is activated.
When the fan is operated in the following
conditions, system performance will be
maximized. If the following conditions are
not met, performance will be limited.
The , or air outlets are
being used.
The front center vent on driver’s side is
open.
When nanoe™ is generated, a small
amount of ozone is emitted and may be
faintly smelled in some situations. How-
ever, this is approximately the same as the
amount that already exists in nature, such
as in forests, and it has no affect on the
human body.
A slight noise may be heard during oper-
ation. This is not a malfunction.
*
: According to temperature and humidity
conditions, fan speed and direction of
the air flow, the nanoe™ system may not
operate at full capacity.
1Press the automatic mode switch.
2Press the outside/recirculated air
mode switch to switch to automatic
air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically
WARNING
To prevent burns (vehicles with wind-
shield wiper de-icer)
Do not touch the glass at lower part of
the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer
is on.
nanoe™ generator
Do not disassemble or repair the genera-
tor because it contains high voltage
parts. Contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer if the generator
needs repair.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the nanoe™
Do not insert anything into the driver’s
side vent, attach anything to it, or use
sprays around the driver’s side vent.
These things may cause the generator
not to work properly.
Using automatic mode
411
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
switches between outside air and recircu-
lated air modes.
3Adjust the temperature setting.
4To stop the operation, press the off
switch.
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes
are operated, the automatic mode indica-
tor goes off. However, automatic mode for
functions other than that operated is main-
tained.
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-
ing to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-
ately after the automatic mode switch is
pressed or “AUTO” is selected.
Cool air may blow around the upper body
even when the heater is on due to sunlight.
Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects
exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-
matically switches between outside air and
recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off,
and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification
function.
This function automatically controls the
air conditioning airflow so that priority
is given to the front seats. When the
front passenger seat is not occupied,
airflow may switch to only the driver's
seat. Unnecessary air conditioning is
suppressed, contributing to increased
fuel efficiency.
Front seat concentrated airflow mode
operates in the following situations.
No passengers are detected in the
rear seats
The windshield defogger is not
operating
Pollen removal mode is not operat-
ing
While operating, the indicator is turned
on.
Manually turning front seat con-
centrated airflow mode on/off
In front seat concentrated airflow
mode, directing airflow to the front
seats only and to all seats can be
switched via switch operation. When
the mode has been switched manually,
automatic airflow control stops operat-
ing.
Select on the option control
screen (P.407) and switch the air-
flow.
Indicator illuminated: Airflow to the
front seats only
Indicator off: Airflow to all the seats.
Operation of automatic airflow control
In order to maintain a comfortable inte-
rior, airflow may be directed to seats
without passengers immediately after the
engine is started and at other times
depending on the outside temperature.
After the engine is started, if passengers
move around inside or enter/exit the vehi-
cle, the system cannot accurately detect
the presence of passengers and auto-
matic airflow control will not operate.
Front seat concentrated airflow
mode (S-FLOW)
412
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Operation of manual airflow control
Even if the function is manually switched to
directing airflow to only the front seats,
when a rear seat is occupied, it may auto-
matically direct airflow to all seats.
To return to automatic airflow control
1With the indicator off, turn the engine
switch off.
2After 60 minutes or more elapse, turn
the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate
control
To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform
any of the following procedures:
Select “DUAL” on the main control
screen. (P.406)
Select “DUAL” on the option con-
trol screen.
Adjust the passenger’s side temper-
ature setting.
The indicator on the main control screen
comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-
trol
To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, per-
form any of the following procedures:
Select “4-ZONE” on the main con-
trol screen. (P.406)
Select “4-ZONE” on the option
control screen.
Adjust a passenger seat tempera-
ture setting.
The indicator on the main control screen
comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on.
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume changes
according to the selected air flow
mode.
Adjusting the position of and open-
ing and closing the air outlets
Front center/front side
1Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
Adjusting the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats
separately
Air outlet layout and operations
413
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Rear center/rear side
1Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
*
: If equipped
Center Display
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main
menu and move the cursor to to
display the climate control shortcut
buttons. Then, select to display the
rear air conditioning control screen.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen.
Adjust the left side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Select the left side rear seat air flow
WARNING
To prevent the windshield defogger
from operating improperly
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
Rear automatic air condi-
tioning system*
The air outlets and fan speed are
automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
The rear air conditioning system
can be operated using the Center
Display and Rear Multi Operation
Panel.
Rear air conditioning control
screen
A
B
414
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-
ting
Select the right side rear seat air
flow mode
Adjust the right side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Switch the following functions on
and off
“REAR Off”: Turn the rear seats fan off
“REAR AUTO”: Set the rear seats auto-
matic mode on/off (P.415)
: Disables operation of the rear air
conditioning system using the Rear Multi
Operation Panel
Rear Multi Operation Panel
Touch “Climate” on the home screen to
display the rear air conditioning con-
trol screen.(P.398)
Some functions of the rear air condi-
tioning system can also be operated
from the shortcut screen.
The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be
used to operate the rear air conditioning
system if the function is disabled.
Rear air conditioning control screen
Adjust the left side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Select the left side rear seat air flow
mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
Set the rear seats automatic mode
on/off (P.415)
Select the right side rear seat air
flow mode
Turn the rear seats fan off
Adjust the right side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-
ting
Shortcut screen
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
415
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Adjust the left side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Adjust the right side rear seat tem-
perature setting
Center Display
1Select “REAR AUTO” on the rear
air conditioning control screen.
(P.413)
2To stop the operation, select
“REAR Off” on the rear air condi-
tioning control screen. (P.413)
If the fan speed setting or air flow
modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However,
automatic mode for functions other
than that operated is maintained.
Rear Multi Operation Panel
1Select “AUTO” on the rear air con-
ditioning control screen. (P.414)
2To stop the operation, select “OFF”
on the rear air conditioning control
screen. (P.413)
If the fan speed setting or air flow
modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However,
automatic mode for functions other
than that operated is maintained.
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-
ing to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-
ately after “REAR AUTO” is selected or
“AUTO” is touched.
Cool air may blow around the upper body
even when the heater is on due to sunlight.
The temperature setting of the rear
seats can be adjusted using the follow-
ing methods:
When the “4-ZONE” indicator is
off: Adjust the driver’s seat tempera-
ture.
Adjust the temperature setting of each
rear seat using the Center Display or Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
Adjust the temperature setting of
each rear seat using the Center Dis-
play (rear air conditioning control
screen) or Rear Multi Operation
Panel.
The temperature setting of each rear seat
can be changed independently.
Rear center outlets and rear side
outlets
1Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
Using automatic mode
A
B
Adjusting the temperature set-
ting of the rear seats
Air outlet layout and operations
416
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
2Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
*
: If equipped
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system
on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
Heated steering wheel*/seat
heaters*/seat ventilators*
Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the steering
wheel
Front seat heaters/Rear seat
heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
Front seat ventilators/Rear seat
ventilators
Maintain good ventilation by pulling
air through the seat upholstery
The Center Display and Rear Multi
Operation Panel/rear control
panel can be used to operate the
heated steering wheel, seat heaters
and seat ventilators.
WARNING
To prevent minor burn injuries
Care should be taken if anyone in the fol-
lowing categories comes in contact with
the steering wheel or seats when the
heater is on:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the
sick and the physically challenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
417
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Center Display
Press the switch to display the heated
steering wheel/front seat heater/front
seat ventilator control screen.
Vehicles without heated steering
wheel
Vehicles with heated steering
wheel
The heated steering wheel/front seat
heater/front seat ventilator control screen
can also be displayed by pressing the
“MENU” button on the Remote Touch and
then moving the cursor to and select-
ing from the displayed shortcut menu.
To display the rear seat heater/rear seat
ventilator control screen, select . (if
equipped)
Main screen
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
This system can also be operated by the
touch screen.
Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed
level
The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-
els. (Low, Mid or Hi)
Adjust the seat heater temperature
level
The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels.
(Low, Mid or Hi)
Adjust the heated steering wheel
temperature level
*
The heated steering wheel can be adjusted
in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)
Change the following functions to
automatic mode.
When the automatic mode is on, the indi-
cator illuminates on the screen.
: Left-hand side seat heater/seat
ventilator
: Heated steering wheel
*
: Right-hand side seat heater/seat
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seat heat-
ers and seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an
uneven surface on the seat and do not
stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the functions when the
engine is off.
Control screen
A
B
A
B
C
D
418
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
ventilator
*
: Available on the front seat control
screen only
Side screen
Display the air conditioning control
screen: P.409
Adjust the front seat heater tem-
perature level
Each time the switch is selected, the tem-
perature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Adjust the front seat ventilator fan
speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Adjust the heated steering wheel
temperature level
Each time the switch is selected, the tem-
perature level and level indicator change
as follows:
AUTOHiLoOFF
Rear Multi Operation Panel (if
equipped)
Touch “Climate” on the home screen to
display the air conditioning control
screen.(P.398)
The rear seat heaters and rear seat ventila-
tors can also be operated from the short-
cut screen.
The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be
used to operate the rear air conditioning
system if the function is disabled. (P.413)
Rear air conditioning control screen
Adjust the rear seat heater temper-
ature level
Each time the switch is selected, the tem-
perature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan
speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Shortcut screen
Adjust the rear seat heater temper-
A
B
C
D
A
B
A
419
5
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
ature level
Each time the switch is selected, the tem-
perature level and level indicator (orange)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan
speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan
speed level and level indicator (blue)
change as follows:
AUTOHiMidLoOFF
Rear control panel (if equipped)
Increases the rear seat heater tem-
perature level
The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-
els. (Low, Mid or Hi)
Enables/Disables the automatic
mode of the rear seat heaters
Decreases the rear seat heater
temperature level
If this switch is selected when the rear seat
heater temperature level is set to Lo, the
rear seat heater will turn off.
The heated steering wheel, seat heaters
and seat ventilators can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Air conditioning system-linked control
mode
When the seat ventilator fan speed level is
Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes
higher according to the fan speed of the air
conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is
operating in front seat concentrated air-
flow mode (S-FLOW)
If a passenger is not detected in the front
passenger seat, the seat ventilator and seat
heater of the front passenger’s seat will be
turned off if on. (P.411)
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
B
A
B
C
WARNING
To prevent overheating and minor
burn injuries
Observe the following precautions when
using the seat heaters.
Do not cover the seat with a blanket or
cushion when using the seat heater.
Do not use seat heater more than nec-
essary.
420
5-4. Using the interior lights
5-4.Using the interior lights
Rear personal lights (P.421)
Inside door handle lights
Front personal lights (P.421)
Front interior lights (P.421)
Clock light
Footwell lights
Engine switch light
Door trim ornament lights
Door courtesy lights
Seat belt buckle lights
Outer foot lights
Rear interior light (P.421)
Shift lever lights
Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
421
5
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior features
Turning the door position on
Press the door-linked interior light
switch
The lights are turned on and off according
to whether the doors are opened/closed.
When the door position is on, the indicator
illuminates.
Turning the lights on/off
Front
Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.
Rear
On/off
The rear interior lights turn on/off together
the front interior lights.
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.
Using the Rear Multi Operation
Panel (if equipped)
1Display the home screen and then
touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)
2To turn on/off the rear interior
lights, touch the respective button.
Turning the lights on/off
Front
Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.
Operating the interior lights
A
Operating the personal lights
422
5-4. Using the interior lights
Rear
On/dimmed/off
When a door is opened while the door
position is on, the lights turn on.
Using the Rear Multi Operation
Panel (if equipped)
1Display the home screen and then
touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)
2To turn on/dimmed/off the rear per-
sonal lights, touch the respective
button.
Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off accord-
ing to the engine switch mode, the pres-
ence of the electronic key, whether the
doors are locked/unlocked, and whether
the doors are opened/closed.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged
If the interior lights remain on when the
engine switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
When front interior light or front per-
sonal lights do not respond as normal
When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to
the lens surface
When operated with a wet hand
When wearing gloves, etc.
The interior lights may turn on automati-
cally when
If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or
in the event of a strong rear impact, the inte-
rior lights will turn on automatically.
The interior lights will turn off automatically
after approximately 20 minutes.
The interior lights can be turned off manu-
ally. However, in order to help prevent fur-
ther collisions, it is recommended that they
be left on until safety can be ensured.
(The interior lights may not turn on auto-
matically depending on the force of the
impact and conditions of the collision.)
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(P.546)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
423
5
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior features
NOTICE
Removing light lenses
Never remove the lens for the front inte-
rior light and front personal lights. Other-
wise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens
needs to be removed, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
424
5-5. Using the storage features
5-5.Using the storag e features
Vehicles without power rear seat
Glove box (P.425)
Auxiliary boxes (P.428)
Cup holders (P.426)
Console box (P.427)
Coin holder (P.426)
List of storage features
Location of the storage features
A
B
C
D
E
425
5
5-5. Using the storage features
Interior features
Vehicles with power rear seat
Glove box (P.425)
Auxiliary boxes (P.428)
Cup holders (P.426)
Console box (P.427)
Coin holder (P.426)
1Open (push button)
2Unlock with the mechanical key
3Lock with the mechanical key
A
B
C
D
E
WARNING
Items that should not be left in the
storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray
cans in the storage spaces, as this may
cause the following when cabin tempera-
ture becomes high:
Glasses may be deformed by heat or
cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If
they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire
or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
426
5-5. Using the storage features
Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in
the glove box. (P.125)
Removing the partition
The partition inside the glove box can be
removed by pulling it.
Push the button.
Coin holder light
The Coin holder light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
Front
Press in and release the button.
Rear (vehicles without power rear
seat)
Pull the armrest down then push in the
cup holder trim to extend the cup hold-
ers.
Rear (vehicles with power rear seat)
Press in and release the button.
WARNING
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event
of sudden braking or sudden swerving,
an accident may occur due to an occu-
pant being struck by the open glove box
or the items stored inside.
Coin holder
WARNING
Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden braking.
Cup holders
427
5
5-5. Using the storage features
Interior features
When stowing the rear cup holders
(vehicles without power rear seat)
Stow the cup holder with the armrest down.
The cup holder cannot be stowed if the
armrest is not down.
Press a button to open the console box.
The console box can be opened from
either side.
Tray in the console box
The tray can be slid and removed.
Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
WARNING
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or
beverage cans in the cup holders.
Inappropriate items must not be stored in
the cup holders even if the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of the
holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possi-
ble, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden braking.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the rear cup
holder (vehicles without power rear
seat)
Stow the cup holder before stowing the
armrest.
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the lid of the power outlet in the
front cup holder when the power outlet is
not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that
enter the power outlet may cause a short
circuit.
Console box
WARNING
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden braking.
NOTICE
Tray
Do not insert items exceeding the height
of the tray. Doing so may prevent open-
ing and closing of the lid.
428
5-5. Using the storage features
Overhead (if equipped)
Press in the button.
This box is useful for temporarily storing
sunglasses and similar small items.
Rear seat (vehicles without power
rear seat)
Pull the armrest down then push the
knob and lift the lid to open it.
Rear seat (vehicles with power rear
seat)
Pull the armrest down then press the
button to open the lid.
Auxiliary boxes
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while
driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or
serious injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
Items unsuitable for storing (over-
head)
Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg
(0.4 lb.).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to
open and the items inside may fall out,
resulting in an accident.
429
5
5-5. Using the storage features
Interior features
The cargo net is provided for securing
loose items on the floor or items inside
the trunk.
Raise the cargo hooks on the floor.
Hook the net on the cargo hooks.
Rear (if equipped)
Pull the strap upwards to lift the lug-
gage mat and remove it.
Side
Pull the strap upwards to lift the lug-
gage mat and remove it.
Trunk features
Cargo net
WARNING
When the cargo net is not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo
hooks on the floor to their stowed posi-
tions.
Shopping bag hooks
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the grocery
bag hooks
Do not hang any object heavier than 5 kg
(11 lb.) on the grocery bag hooks.
Luggage mats
430
5-5. Using the storage features
Front
1Pull the strap upwards and lift up
the luggage mat.
2Lift the luggage mat until it engages
with the hook.
To return the luggage mat to its original
position, push the hook and lower the
luggage mat.
Front
Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage
mats.
Rear (if equipped)
Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage
mats.
A warning reflector can be stowed.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the hook for
the front luggage mat
Do not hang a grocery bag or any other
object from the hook.
Auxiliary boxes
431
5
5-5. Using the storage features
Interior features
1Loosen the belt
2Tighten the belt
Using a belt to hold an object
1Loosen the belt
2Pass the belt through the clip
3Tighten the belt
Depending on the size and shape of an
object, such as the case of a warning
reflector, the object may not be able to be
secured with the belts or stowed in an aux-
iliary box.
Stowing the belt
1Fold the belt
2Secure the belt with the clip
To prevent damage to the warning reflec-
tor storage belt when it is not in use, stow
the belt.
First-aid kit storage belt
Warning reflector storage belt
432
5-6. Using the other interior features
5-6.Using the other interior features
The USB charging ports are used to
supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to
external devices.
The USB charging ports are for charg-
ing only. They are not designed for data
transfer or other purposes.
Depending on the external device, it
may not charge properly. Refer to the
manual included with the device
before using a USB charging port.
Using the USB charging ports
Open the auxiliary boxes lid.
Vehicles without power rear seat
Vehicles with power rear seat
The USB charging ports can be used
when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
Situations in which the USB charging
ports may not operate correctly
If a device which consumes more than 2.1
A at 5 V is connected
If a device designed to communicate with
a personal computer, such as a USB
memory device, is connected
If the connected external device is turned
off (depending on device)
If the temperature inside the vehicle is
high, such as after the vehicle has been
parked in the sun
About connected external devices
Depending on the connected external
device, charging may occasionally be sus-
pended and then start again. This is not a
malfunction.
Other interior features
USB charging ports
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the USB charg-
ing ports
Do not insert foreign objects into the
ports.
Do not spill water or other liquids into
the ports.
When the USB charging ports are not
in use, close the lids. If a foreign object
or liquid enters a port may cause a
short circuit.
Do not apply excessive force to or
impact the USB charging ports.
Do not disassemble or modify the USB
charging ports.
433
5
5-6. Using the other interior features
Interior features
Vehicle without power rear seat
Pull the armrest down for use.
Vehicle with power rear seat
Pull the lock release lever and fold the
rear seatback down.
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to external
devices
Do not leave external devices in the
vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in
damage to an external device.
Do not push down on or apply unnec-
essary force to an external device or
the cable of an external device while it
is connected.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the USB charging ports for a
long period of time with the engine
stopped.
Armrest
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the arm-
rest.
Assist grips
WARNING
Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in
or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or
could cause you to injure yourself by fall-
ing over.
434
5-6. Using the other interior features
To use the coat hook, push it on.
The GPS clock’s time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time infor-
mation. For details, refer to “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
The power outlet can be used for 12 V
accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Front
Open the cup holder, and open the lid.
Console box
Open the console box and open the
lid.
Rear
Open the lid.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a
heavy load on the assist grip.
Coat hooks
WARNING
Items that must not be hung on the
hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard
or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items
may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
Clock
Power outlets
435
5
5-6. Using the other interior features
Interior features
The power outlet can be used when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
1To set the visor in the forward posi-
tion, flip it down.
2To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to
the side.
3To use the side extender, place the
visor in the side position, then slide
it backward.
Front
Slide the cover to open.
The vanity light turns on.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the
power outlet may cause a short circuit.
To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more
than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent incorrect operation of the
vehicle
When turning the engine switch off,
make sure to disconnect accessories
designed for charging, such as portable
chargers, power banks, etc. from the
power outlets.
If such an accessory is left connected, the
following may occur:
The doors cannot be locked using the
smart entry & start system or wireless
remote control.
The opening screen will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
The interior lights, instrument panel
lights, etc. will illuminate.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged
Do not use the power outlet longer than
necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
Sun visors
Vanity mirrors
436
5-6. Using the other interior features
Rear
Press the button to open.
The vanity light turns on.
To prevent battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when the
engine switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades
can be extended and retracted using
the driver’s power window switch and
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
From driver’s seat
Operate the driver’s power window
switch.
Rear quarter sunshade (if
equipped)
Rear door sunshade
1Extend
2Retract
*
*
: If the driver’s power window switch is
operated when a rear door sun-
shade/rear quarter sunshade is
retracted or being retracted, the rear
window will open.
From rear seat
The rear seat power window switches
cannot be used to extend the rear door
sunshades/rear quarter sunshades.
Rear shade/lamp control screen
1Display the home screen and then
touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)
2To fully extend/retract a rear
door/rear quarter sunshade, touch
the respective button.
NOTICE
When not in use
Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged
Do not leave the vanity lights on for
extended periods while the engine is
stopped.
Rear door/rear quarter sun-
shades (if equipped)
A
B
437
5
5-6. Using the other interior features
Interior features
Shortcut screen
To fully extend/retract a rear door/rear
quarter sunshade, touch the respective
button.
Operating conditions
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
The rear side windows are fully closed.
Operation of rear door sunshades/rear
quarter sunshades when extended
If a rear door power window switch is oper-
ated when the rear door sunshade/rear
quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door
sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract
while the rear window is opening.
Operating the rear door/rear quarter
sunshades after turning the engine
switch off
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can
be operated for a while even after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or off.
However, they cannot be operated using
the driver’s power window switch after
either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between a rear
door sunshade and the window frame, the
rear door sunshade will stop and then
extend/retract slightly.
When reconnecting the battery
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will
always be retracted the first time the button
is pressed.
The rear sunshade can be can be
extended and retracted using the rear
sunshade switch and Rear Multi Oper-
ation Panel.
From front seat
Extend/retract
WARNING
When the rear door/rear quarter sun-
shades are being extended or
retracted
Do not place fingers or other objects in
the shade mechanism or in the opening
as injury may result.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to inten-
tionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
NOTICE
To ensure normal operation of the
sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
Do not place excessive load on the
motor or other components.
Do not place objects where they may
hinder opening and closing opera-
tions.
Do not attach items to the rear
door/rear quarter sunshades.
Keep the opening clean and clear of
obstructions.
Do not operate the rear door/rear
quarter sunshades continuously for
long periods of time.
Rear sunshade
438
5-6. Using the other interior features
From rear seat
Vehicles without power rear seat
Extend/retract
Vehicles with power rear seat (Rear
shade/lamp control screen)
1Display the home screen and then
touch “Shade/Lamp”. (P.398)
2To fully extend/retract a rear door
sunshade, touch the respective but-
ton.
Vehicles with power rear seat
(shortcut screen)
To fully extend/retract a rear door sun-
shade, touch the respective button.
The rear sunshade can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
Operating the rear sunshade after turn-
ing the engine switch off
The rear sunshade can be operated for a
while even after the engine switch is
switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off.
Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear
sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift position is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again
if any of the following occurs:
The switch is pressed again.
The shift position is shifted to P.
The shift position is shifted out of P and R,
and the vehicle reaches a speed of 15
km/h (9 mph).
If the engine is turned off when the rear sun-
shade has been lowered due to the reverse
operation feature, it will not be raised even
when the engine is turned on again and the
vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9
mph). To raise the sunshade again, press the
switch.
439
5
5-6. Using the other interior features
Interior features
WARNING
When the rear sunshade is being
extended or retracted
Do not place fingers or other objects in
the shade mechanism or in the opening
as injury may result.
NOTICE
To ensure normal operation of the
sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
Do not place excessive load on the
motor or other components.
Do not place objects where they may
hinder opening and closing opera-
tions.
Do not attach items to the rear sun-
shade.
Keep the opening clean and clear of
obstructions.
Do not operate the rear sunshade con-
tinuously for long periods of time.
440
5-6. Using the other interior features
6
441
6
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
.
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle exterior................................ 442
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle interior................................. 445
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
........................................................448
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
........................................................450
Hood ............................................... 451
Positioning a floor jack............ 452
Engine compartment............... 453
Battery ........................................... 463
Tires ................................................ 465
Replacing the tire......................482
Tire inflation pressure..............486
Wheels ..........................................487
Air conditioning filter...............488
Electronic key battery.............490
Checking and replacing fuses
........................................................ 492
Light bulbs....................................495
442
6-1. Maintenance and care
6-1.Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom, liber-
ally apply water to the vehicle body,
wheel wells and underside of the
vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a
sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car
wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the water-
proof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface,
apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
Self-restoring coat
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coat-
ing that is resistant to small surface
scratches caused in a car wash etc.
The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from
when the vehicle is delivered from the
plant.
The restoration time differs depending on
the depth of the scratch and outside tem-
perature.
The restoration time may become
shorter when the coating is warmed by
applying warm water.
Deep scratches caused by keys, coins,
etc. cannot be restored.
Do not use wax that contains abrasives.
Automatic car washes
Before washing the vehicle:
Fold the mirrors
Turn off the power trunk lid
Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Extend the mirrors before driving.
Brushes used in automatic car washes
may scratch the vehicle surface, parts
(wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle’s
paint.
When it is necessary to set the engine
switch to ACCESSORY mode with the
shift position held in N, refer to P.225.
High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do not bring
the nozzle tip near the gaps around the
doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray
these areas continuously.
When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In
that case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle:
Place the key in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or
more separate from the vehicle while the
vehicle is being washed. (Take care to
ensure that the key is not stolen.)
Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart entry & start
system.(P.127)
Wheels and wheel ornaments
Remove any dirt immediately by using a
neutral detergent.
Wash detergent off with water immedi-
ately after use.
To protect the paint from damage, make
sure to observe the following precau-
tions.
•Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive
detergent
Do not use hard brushes
Do not use detergent on the wheels when
they are hot, such as after driving or park-
ing in hot weather
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior
Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.
Cleaning instructions
443
6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
Brake caliper coating (F SPORT mod-
els)
When using detergent, use neutral deter-
gent. Do not use hard brushes or abra-
sive cleaners, as they will damage the
coating.
Do not use detergent on the brake cali-
pers when they are hot.
Wash detergent off immediately after
use.
Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Front side windows water-repellent
coating (if equipped)
The following precautions can extend the
effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-
ing.
Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side
windows regularly.
Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate
on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp
cloth as soon as possible.
Do not use wax or glass cleaners that
contain abrasives when cleaning the win-
dows.
Do not use any metallic objects to
remove condensation build up.
When the water-repellent performance
has become insufficient, the coating can
be repaired. Contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as
follows:
Use a soft cloth dampened with an
approximately 5% solution of neutral
detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to
remove any remaining moisture.
To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet
wipes or a similar product.
WARNING
When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the
engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components, etc. to
catch fire.
When cleaning the windshield
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-
lowing situations, and may result in hands
being caught or other serious injuries
and cause damage to the wiper blades.
Off
AUTO
When the upper part of the windshield
where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
When a wet rag or similar is held close
to the raindrop sensor
If something bumps against the wind-
shield
If you directly touch the raindrop sen-
sor body or if something bumps into
the raindrop sensor
A
B
444
6-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
Precautions regarding the exhaust
pipes and rear bumper diffusers
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes
and rear bumper diffusers to become
quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipes and diffusers until they
have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot
exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
can cause burns.
Precaution regarding the front
bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A)
If the paint of the front bumper is chipped
or scratched, the Lexus Safety System +
A may not function correctly. If this
occurs, consult any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
Precaution regarding the rear
bumper
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped
or scratched, the following systems may
not function correctly. If this occurs, con-
sult any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Lexus Safety System + A (if equipped)
BSM (if equipped)
Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard
Lights (if equipped)
RCTA (if equipped)
PKSB (if equipped)
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and
corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels, etc.)
Wash the vehicle immediately in the
following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the
paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or
bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
After driving in an area contaminated
with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled
with dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline
are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched,
have it repaired immediately.
To prevent the wheels from corroding,
remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the
wheels.
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic
substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the
lights.
Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the
lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate and the wiper blades
may be damaged.
445
6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with luke-
warm water.
If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off
with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approx-
imately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and
water.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type
cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush
to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping cir-
cles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces
and let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water
using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying
or cuts.
When cleaning the carpeted portions of
the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a
possibility that the surface of the carpet
could be damaged.
NOTICE
When using a high pressure car wash
When washing the vehicle, do not
spray the camera or its surrounding
area directly with a high pressure
washer. Shock applied from high pres-
sure water may cause the device to not
operate normally.
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following
parts. The parts may be damaged if
they come into contact with high-pres-
sure water.
Traction related parts
•Steering parts
•Suspension parts
Brake parts
Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 30
cm (11.9 in.) away from the vehicle
body. Otherwise resin section, such as
moldings and bumpers, may be
deformed and damaged.
Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle
in the same place.
Do not spray the lower part of the
windshield continuously.
If water enters the air conditioning sys-
tem intake located near the lower part of
the windshield, the air conditioning sys-
tem may not operate correctly.
Do not wash the underside of the vehi-
cle using a high pressure car washer.
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.
Protecting the vehicle interior
446
6-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi-
cle.
Doing so may cause electrical compo-
nents, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components
or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P.30)
An electrical malfunction may cause
the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially
instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.
The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view
and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of
detergent, as they may discolor the
vehicle interior or cause streaks or
damage to painted surfaces:
Areas other than the seats and steer-
ing wheel: Organic substances such as
benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic
solutions, dye, and bleach
Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions,
such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
Steering wheel: Organic substances,
such as thinner, and cleaner that con-
tains alcohol
Do not use polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel’s or
other interior part’s painted surface
may be damaged.
Preventing damage to leather sur-
faces
Observe the following precautions to
avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
Remove any dust or dirt from leather
surfaces immediately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct
sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, espe-
cially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plas-
tic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather
surface if the vehicle interior heats up
significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system
may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components such
as the audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may also
cause the body to rust.
When cleaning the inside of the wind-
shield (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A or Lexus Safety System +)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(P.250, 262)
Cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the
rear window, as this may cause dam-
age to the rear window defogger
heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean. Wipe
the window in strokes running parallel
to the heater wires or antenna.
Be careful not to scratch or damage
the heater wires or antenna.
447
6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt using a water-damp-
ened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
Cleaning the areas with satin-finish
metal accents
The metal areas use a layer of real metal for
the surface. It is necessary to clean them
regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for
long periods of time, they may be difficult to
clean.
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and dust
with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approxi-
mately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in
a shaded and ventilated area.
Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of
the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth damp-
ened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and
water.
To remove dust from the fabric, use
a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape.
Use a cloth dampened with water to
gently wipe the fabric clean.
Do not use detergents to clean the fabric.
Cleaning the areas with satin-fin-
ish metal accents
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather
areas
Cleaning fabric portions of the
instrument panel
448
6-2. Maintenance
6-2.Maintenance
Where to go for maintenance service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the best
possible condition, Lexus recommends that
maintenance service operations as well as
other inspections and repairs be carried out
by authorized Lexus retailers or Lexus
authorized repairers, or any reliable repair-
ers. For repairs and services covered by
your warranty, please visit an authorized
Lexus retailer or repairer, who will use gen-
uine Lexus parts in repairing any difficulties
you may encounter. There can also be
advantages in utilizing authorized Lexus
retailers or repairers for non-warranty
repairs and services, as members of the
Lexus network will be able to expertly assist
you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer will per-
form all of the scheduled maintenance on
your vehicle reliably and economically due
to their experience with Lexus vehicles.
Scheduled maintenance should be
performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance sched-
ule.
For full details of your maintenance sched-
ule, refer to the “Lexus Service Booklet” or
“Lexus Warranty Booklet”.
What about do-it-yourself mainte-
nance?
Many maintenance items are easy to do
yourself if you have a little mechanical abil-
ity and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance
tasks require special tools and skills. These
are best performed by qualified techni-
cians. Even if you’re an experienced
do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend
that repairs and maintenance be con-
ducted by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer. Any authorized Lexus retailer or
repairer will keep a record of maintenance,
which could be useful should you ever
require Warranty Service. Should you
choose to select a qualified and equipped
professional other than an authorized
Lexus repairer to service or maintain your
vehicle, we recommend that you request
that a record of maintenance be kept.
Does your vehicle need repairs?
Be on the alert for changes in performance
and sounds, and visual tip-offs that indicate
service is needed. Some important clues
are:
Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driv-
ing, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. Lexus
recommends the maintenance
below.
WARNING
If your vehicle is not properly main-
tained
Improper maintenance could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and possi-
ble death or serious injury.
Handling of the battery
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain
damage. Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P.463)
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
449
6
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance and care
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However,
water dripping from the air conditioning
system after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indi-
cate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak.
Drive with the windows open and have
the exhaust system checked immedi-
ately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal
when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driven
straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension
movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feel-
ing brake pedal, pedal almost touches the
floor, vehicle pulls to one side when brak-
ing
Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal (P.86, 89)
If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer as soon as possible.
Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.
450
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6-3.Do-it-yourself mainten ance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions
If you perform maintenance by
yourself, be sure to follow the cor-
rect procedure as given in these
sections.
Maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition
(P.463)
•Grease
Conventional
wrench (for terminal
clamp bolts)
Engine/inter-
cooler coolant
level (P.460)
“Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” or a
similar high quality
ethylene gly-
col-based non-sili-
cate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and
non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid
organic acid tech-
nology
“Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50%
deionized water.
Funnel (used only for
adding coolant)
Engine oil level
(P.458)
•“Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or equiv-
alent
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for
adding engine oil)
Fuses (P.492)
•Fuse with same
amperage rating as
original
Radiator, con-
denser, inter-
cooler radiator
and intercooler
sub radiator
(P.461)
Tire inflation pres-
sure (P.486)
Tire pressure gauge
Compressed air
source
Washer fluid
(P.462)
Water or washer
fluid containing anti-
freeze (for winter
use)
•Funnel (used only for
adding water or
washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many
mechanisms and fluids that may move
suddenly, become hot, or become elec-
trically energized. To avoid death or seri-
ous injury, observe the following
precautions.
When working on the engine com-
partment
Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine,
radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil
and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn
easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
Items Parts and tools
451
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
1Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
WARNING
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose
an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are
flammable.
Take care because brake fluid can
harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the
affected area with clean water imme-
diately.
If you still experience discomfort, con-
sult a doctor.
When working near the electric cool-
ing fan or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode, the electric cooling fan may
automatically start to run if the air condi-
tioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (
P.461)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-
ting in your eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive engine
wear due to dirt in the air.
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious problem.
Hood
Opening the hood
WARNING
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and
locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may
open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in
death or serious injury.
452
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Front
2WD models
AWD models
Rear
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the
instructions in the manual provided
with the jack and perform the oper-
ation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a
floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may
damage your vehicle or cause
injury.
Location of the jack point
453
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
LS500
Fuse boxes (P.492)
Engine oil level dipstick (P.458)
Engine oil filler cap (P.459)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.460)
Intercooler coolant reservoir (P.460)
Washer fluid tank (P.462)
Radiator (P.461)
Intercooler radiator (P.461)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P.461)
Intercooler sub radiator (P.461)
Engine compartment
Components
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
454
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LS350
Fuse boxes (P.492)
Engine oil level dipstick (P.458)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.460)
Engine oil filler cap (P.459)
Washer fluid tank (P.462)
Radiator (P.461)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (P.461)
Battery
P.463
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
455
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
Removing the engine compartment cover
Outside (LS500)
Outside (LS350)
Front (LS500)
Engine compartment cover
456
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Front (LS350)
Installing the clips
1Push up center portion
2Insert
3Press
Removing the engine cover
LS500
Lift the front of the engine cover
straight up and then pull it forward.
LS350
1Push the tab in and open the engine
compartment cover.
NOTICE
Checking the engine compartment
cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely
installed in its original position.
Engine cover
A
457
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
2Remove the engine cover.
Installing the engine cover
LS500
Engage the claws of the engine cover
to install it.
LS350
1Install the engine cover.
2Install the engine compartment
cover.
Removing the service cover
1Pull up the passenger side end of
the rubber strip to disengage it
from the vehicle body.
2Remove the service cover.
Push the tabs and lift away the service
cover.
Installing the service cover
1Install the service cover.
Make sure to engage the claws on the
windshield side of the service cover when
NOTICE
Checking the engine cover after
installation
Make sure that the cover is securely
installed in its original position.
Service cover
458
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
installing the service cover.
2Engage the rubber strip to the vehi-
cle body.
With the engine at operating tempera-
ture and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
1Park the vehicle on level ground.
After warming up the engine and
turning it off, wait more than 5 min-
utes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
2Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
LS500
LS350
3Wipe the dipstick clean.
4Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out and check the oil
level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ
NOTICE
Checking the service cover after
installation
Make sure that the cover is securely
installed in its original position.
Checking and adding the engine
oil
A
B
C
459
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
depending on the type of vehicle or
engine.
6Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it
fully.
Checking the oil type and prepar-
ing the item needed
Make sure to check the oil type and
prepare the items needed before add-
ing oil.
Engine oil selection
P.539
Oil quantity (Low Full)
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Item
Clean funnel
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low
level mark, add engine oil of the same
type as that already in the engine.
LS500
LS350
1Remove the oil filler cap by turning
it counterclockwise.
2Add engine oil slowly, checking the
dipstick.
3Install the oil filler cap by turning it
clockwise.
Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be con-
sumed while driving. In the following situa-
tions, oil consumption may increase, and
engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
When the engine is new, for example
directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate
viscosity is used
When driving at high engine speeds or
with a heavy load, or when driving while
accelerating or decelerating frequently
When leaving the engine idling for a long
time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be
reset. Perform the following procedures:
1Press or of the meter control
switch to select .
2Press or to select “Vehicle Set-
tings” and then press .
460
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3Press or to select “Oil Mainte-
nance” and then press .
4Press or to select “Yes” and
then press .
A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display when the reset
procedure has been completed.
Engine coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
LS500
LS350
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant up to the “F” line. (P.530)
Intercooler coolant reservoir
(LS500)
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the
WARNING
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflamma-
tion and skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thor-
oughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a
safe and acceptable manner. Do not
dispose of used oil and filters in house-
hold trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer, service station or auto
parts store for information concerning
recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the
reach of children.
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the
vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could
be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick
every time you refill the vehicle.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop-
erly tightened.
Checking the coolant
A
B
C
461
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant up to the “F” line. (P.530)
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-
ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -35°C
[-31°F])
For more details about coolant, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine
coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and
water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer, test the
cap and check for leaks in the cooling sys-
tem.
Check the radiator, condenser, inter-
cooler radiator and intercooler sub
radiator and clear away any foreign
objects. If either of the above parts is
extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
A
B
C
WARNING
When the engine is hot
LS500: Do not remove the engine cool-
ant reservoir cap, the intercooler coolant
reservoir cap and the coolant inlet cap.
(P.533)
LS350: Do not remove the engine cool-
ant reservoir cap and the coolant inlet
cap. (P.533)
The cooling system may be under pres-
sure and may spray hot coolant if the cap
is removed, causing serious injuries, such
as burns.
NOTICE
When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct mixture
of water and antifreeze must be used to
provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read
the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to pre-
vent it from damaging parts or paint.
Checking the radiator, con-
denser, intercooler radiator (if
equipped) and intercooler sub
radiator (if equipped)
462
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the washer
tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
WARNING
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser,
intercooler radiator or intercooler sub
radiator as they may be hot and cause
serious injuries, such as burns.
Adding the washer fluid
WARNING
When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine
is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on
the engine, etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than
washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine anti-
freeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the
vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems
of the washer fluid not spraying.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as neces-
sary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed
on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
463
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
The battery is located in the trunk
under the luggage mat.
Removing the luggage mat: P.429
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following
precautions before recharging:
If recharging with the battery installed on
the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
Make sure the charger is off when con-
necting and disconnecting the charger
cables to the battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the bat-
tery
Unlocking the doors using the smart
entry & start system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the bat-
tery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to
lock/unlock the doors.
Start the engine with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY mode. The engine may
not start with the engine switch turned off.
However, the engine will operate nor-
mally from the second attempt.
The engine switch mode is recorded by
the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected,
the vehicle will return the engine switch
mode to the status it was in before the
battery was disconnected. Make sure to
turn off the engine switch before discon-
necting the battery. Take extra care when
connecting the battery if the engine
switch mode prior to discharge is
unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple
attempts, contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Battery
Location
WARNING
Chemicals in the battery
The battery contains poisonous and cor-
rosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. To reduce the risk of death or
serious injury, take the following precau-
tions while working on or near the bat-
tery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the
battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the
battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
When there is insufficient battery
fluid
Do not use if there is insufficient fluid in
the battery. There is a possible danger
that the battery may explode.
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open
area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is
insufficient ventilation.
464
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Make sure that the battery terminals
are not corroded and that there are no
loose connections, cracks, or loose
clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Check the battery condition by indica-
tor color.
Type A
Blue: Good condition
Red: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Clear: Replacement is necessary.
Have the battery checked by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
WARNING
Emergency measures regarding
electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or cloth
while traveling to the nearest medical
facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your
skin. Immediately take off the clothing
and follow the procedure above if nec-
essary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk.
Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
When replacing the battery
Use a battery designed for this vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause gas (hydro-
gen) to enter the passenger compart-
ment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the battery, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
NOTICE
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all acces-
sories are turned off.
Exterior
Checking the battery condition
A
B
A
B
C
465
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
repairer.
Type B
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Red: Not working properly.
Have the battery checked by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Check if the treadwear indicators are
showing on the tires. Also check the
tires for uneven wear, such as excessive
wear on one side of the tread.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is
shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc.,
molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indica-
tors are showing on a tire.
A
B
C
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accord-
ance with maintenance schedules
and treadwear.
Checking tires
A
B
C
466
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
The treadwear indicators are showing on
a tire.
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits,
cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,
and bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or loca-
tion of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked
by a qualified technician even if it has sel-
dom or never been used or damage is not
obvious.
If the tread on snow tires wears down
below 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is
lost.
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
the same size
Vehicles with front and rear tires of
differing sizes
WARNING
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
parts of the drive train as well as danger-
ous handling characteristics, which may
lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
Do not mix tires of different makes,
models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably
different treadwear.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended by Lexus.
Do not mix differently constructed
tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
Do not mix summer, all season and
snow tires.
Do not use tires that have been used
on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know
how they were used previously.
NOTICE
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on
roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire
inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving
on rough roads may cause damage to
the tires themselves, as well as the vehi-
cle’s wheels and body.
Tire rotation
467
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire
life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is
carried out approximately every 10000
km (6000 miles) for 2WD models or
5000 km (3000 miles) for AWD models.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.
For XXX/XXRXX size tires
When run-flat tires are installed, the
vehicle can be driven for a maximum of
80 km (50 miles) at a speed below 80
km/h (50 mph) after any tire goes flat.
(However, the vehicle speed may not
increase to near 80 km/h [50 mph]
depending on weather or driving con-
ditions.)
Make sure to replace the flat tire before the
vehicle has been driven for near 80 km
(50 miles). Also, do not use a repaired tire.
For XXX/XXRFXX size tires
When run-flat tires are installed, the
vehicle can be driven for a maximum of
160 km (100 miles) at a speed below
80 km/h (50 mph) after any tire goes
flat. (However, the vehicle speed may
not increase to near 80 km/h [50
mph] depending on weather or driving
conditions.)
Make sure to replace the flat tire before the
vehicle has been driven for near 160 km
(100 miles). Also, do not use a repaired
tire.
A run-flat tire has a or
mark on the side wall.
Run-flat tires
The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle.
Do not use the tires on other vehicles.
Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires.
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it
may be impossible to sufficiently demon-
strate the performance of run-flat tires.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters to detect low tire inflation pressure
before serious problems arise.
The tire pressure detected by the
tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information
display. (P.93)
If the tire pressure drops below a
predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a
warning light. (P.511)
Run-flat tires Tire pressure warning system
468
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not
replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation
pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
Tire inflation pressure
It may take a few minutes to display the
tire inflation pressure after the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
It may also take a few minutes to display
the tire inflation pressure after inflation
pressure has been adjusted.
Tire inflation pressure changes with tem-
perature. The displayed values may also
be different from the values measured
using a tire pressure gauge.
Situations in which the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly
In the following cases, the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly.
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
If a tire has been replaced with a tire that
is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
If a tire has been replaced with a tire that
is not of the specified size.
If tire chains, etc. are installed.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is
equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehi-
cle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
If the tire inflation pressure is much higher
than the specified level.
If wheels not equipped with tire pressure
warning valves and transmitter are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning
computer.
Performance may be affected in the fol-
lowing situations.
When driving near a TV tower, electric
power plant, gas station, radio station,
large display, airport or other facility that
generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular
phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
If tire position information is not correctly
displayed due to the radio wave conditions,
the display may be corrected by changing
the location of the vehicle as the radio wave
conditions may change.
When the vehicle is stopped, the time
taken for the warning to start or turn off
may be longer.
When the inflation pressure of a tire
drops rapidly, for example when a tire has
burst, the warning may not operate.
Warning performance of the tire pres-
sure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning
system will change in accordance with driv-
ing conditions. For this reason, the system
may give a warning even if the tire pressure
does not reach a low enough level, or if the
pressure is higher than the pressure that
was adjusted to when the system was initial-
ized.
469
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
Tire pressure warning system certification
470
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
471
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
472
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
473
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
474
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
475
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
476
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
477
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
When replacing the tires or wheels, the
tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitters must be installed to the wheels
which will be installed to the vehicle.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the
tire pressure warning computer and
the tire pressure warning system must
be initialized. (P.480)
Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitters are not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not
work properly. In this case, after driving for
about 10 minutes, the tire pressure warning
light will blink for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminate to indicate a system
malfunction.
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
478
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The tire pressure warning system
must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
When the tire inflation pressure is
changed such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire inflation pressure is
changed such as when the tire size
is changed.
When rotating the tires.
After performing the transmitter ID
code registration procedure.
(P.480)
When the tire pressure warning system
is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pres-
sure.
How to initialize the tire pressure
warning system
1Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn
the engine switch off and wait 20
minutes or more.
The initialization procedure cannot be
started while the vehicle is moving.
2Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified cold tire inflation pres-
sure level.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the
specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
The tire pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3Start the engine.
4Press or of the meter con-
trol switch to select .
5Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
6Press or to select “TPWS”
and then press .
7Press or to select “Set
Pressure”. Then press and hold
until the tire pressure warning light
blinks 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
“---” will be displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display for the inflation pressure of
each tire while initialization is being per-
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,
tire pressure warning valves, trans-
mitters and tire valve caps
When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer as the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters may be dam-
aged if not handled correctly.
Make sure to install the tire valve caps.
If the tire valve caps are not installed,
water may enter the valves of the tire
pressure warning valve and transmit-
ters and the valves may become stuck.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not
use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.
Initializing the tire pressure
warning system
479
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
formed.
8Drive straight (with occasional left
and right turns) at approximately
40 km/h (25 mph) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Initialization is complete when the position
of each tire is determined and the inflation
pressure of each tire is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Initialization may take longer than normal
to complete if the vehicle speed cannot be
maintained at approximately 40 km/h (25
mph) or more. If initialization cannot be
completed after driving for 1 hour or more,
park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the
engine switch off and wait 20 minutes or
more before performing the driving proce-
dure again. (P.479)
Initialization procedure
Make sure to perform the initialization
procedure after adjusting the tire inflation
pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before
performing the initialization procedure or
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
If the engine switch is turned off during
initialization, it is not necessary to restart
the initialization procedure from the
beginning as it will begin automatically
when the engine switch is turned back to
IGNITION ON mode.
If initialization has accidentally been
started when it is not necessary, adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level when the tires are cold and then
perform the initialization procedure
again.
While the position of each tire is being
determined and the inflation pressures
are not being displayed on the
multi-information display, if the inflation
pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure
warning light will come on.
If the tire pressure warning system is not
initialized properly
In the following situations, initialization
may take longer than usual to be com-
pleted or may not be possible. (Usually,
the vehicle will need to be driven for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-
plete initialization.) If initialization is not
complete after driving approximately 30
minutes, continue driving for a while.
If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved
road, it may take longer to complete ini-
tialization.
If the vehicle is backed up while perform-
ing initialization, data collected during ini-
tialization will be cleared and it will take
longer than normal to complete.
If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or
another situation where other vehicles
are driven close by, it may take time for
the system to recognize the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehicles.
If initialization is not complete after driving
for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in
a safe place for approximately 20 minutes
and then drive the vehicle again.
In the following situations, initialization
will not be started or was not completed
properly and the system will not operate
properly. Perform the initialization proce-
dure again.
If, when attempting to start initialization,
the tire pressure warning light does not
blink 3 times.
If, when the vehicle has been driven for
about 20 minutes after performing ini-
tialization, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for approximately 1 minute and
then illuminates.
If initialization cannot be completed after
performing the above procedure, con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer or
480
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Every tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter has a unique ID code.
When replacing a tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter, it is necessary
to register the ID codes.
The ID codes can be registered on
of the multi-information display.
1Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn
the engine switch off, wait 20 min-
utes or more, and then start the
engine.
2Press or of the meter con-
trol switch to select .
3Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
4Press or to select “TPWS”
and then press .
5Press or to select “Change
Wheel Set”. Then press and hold
until the tire pressure warning
light blinks slowly 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
When registration is being performed, the
tire pressure warning light will blink for
approximately 1 minute then illuminate and
“---” will be displayed for the inflation pres-
sure of each tire on the multi-information
display.
6Drive straight (with occasional left
and right turns) at approximately
40 km/h (25 mph) or more for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Registration is complete when the tire
pressure warning light turns off and the
inflation pressure of each tire is displayed
on the multi-information display.
Registration may take longer than normal
to complete if the vehicle speed cannot be
maintained at approximately 40 km/h (25
mph) or more. If registration cannot be
completed after driving for 1 hour or more,
perform the registration procedure again
from the beginning. (P.481)
After registering the ID codes, make sure
to initialize the tire pressure warning sys-
tem. (P.478)
When registering ID codes
Before performing ID code registration,
make sure that no wheels with tire pres-
sure warning valve and transmitters
installed are near the vehicle.
Make sure to initialize the tire pressure
WARNING
When initializing the tire pressure
warning system
Do not initialize the tire pressure warning
system without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level.
Otherwise, the tire pressure warning
light may not come on even if the tire
inflation pressure is low, or it may come
on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
Registering ID codes
481
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
warning system after registering the ID
codes. If the system is initialized before
registering the ID codes, the initialized
values will be invalid.
As the tires will be warm when registra-
tion is completed, make sure to allow the
tires to cool before performing initializa-
tion.
Canceling ID code registration
To cancel ID code registration after it has
been started, turn the engine switch off
before driving the vehicle.
If the vehicle is driven after ID code regis-
tration is started, to cancel registration,
perform the ID code registration start
procedure again and turn the engine
switch off before driving.
If ID code registration has been canceled,
the tire pressure warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute when the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode and then illuminate. The tire
pressure warning system will be opera-
tional when the tire pressure warning
light turns off.
If the warning light does not turn off even
after several minutes have elapsed, ID
code registration may not have been can-
celled correctly. To cancel registration,
perform the ID code registration start
procedure again and then turn the engine
switch off before driving.
If ID codes are not registered properly
In the following situations, ID code regis-
tration may take longer than usual to be
completed or may not be possible. (Usu-
ally, the vehicle will need to be driven for
approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-
plete ID code registration.)
If ID code registration is not complete
after driving for approximately 30 min-
utes, continue driving for a while.
If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved
road, it may take longer than normal to
complete registration.
If the vehicle is backed up while perform-
ing registration, data collected during
registration will be cleared, and it will take
longer than normal to complete.
If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or
another situation where other vehicles
are driven close by, it may take time for
the system to recognize the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters of your
vehicle over those of other vehicles.
If a wheel with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter installed is inside or
near the vehicle, registration of the ID
codes for the installed wheels may not be
possible.
If ID registration is not complete after driv-
ing for approximately 1 hour, park the vehi-
cle in a safe place for approximately 20
minutes and then perform the ID code reg-
istration procedure again.
In the following situations, ID code regis-
tration will not be started or was not com-
pleted properly and the system will not
operate properly. Perform the ID code
registration procedure again.
If, when attempting to start ID code regis-
tration, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink slowly 3 times.
If, when the vehicle has been driven for
about 10 minutes after performing ID
code registration, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for approximately 1 minute
and then illuminates.
If ID code registration cannot be com-
pleted after performing the above proce-
dure, contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
482
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a
hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift position to P.
Disabling the height control. (if
equipped) (P.383)
Stop the engine.
Jack and tools
As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, the following tools for replacing a tire
are not included with your vehicle. They can
be purchased at any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Wheel nut wrench
Jack
Jack handle
Replacing the tire
When raising your vehicle with a
jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage
your vehicle or cause injury.
If necessary tire replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact
any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer.
Before jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause
the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
Do not use the tire jack for any pur-
pose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
Do not use other tire jacks for replac-
ing tires on this vehicle.
Put the jack properly in its jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under
the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
Do not start the engine or drive the
vehicle while the vehicle is supported
by the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while some-
one is inside.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an
object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height
greater than that required to replace
the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get
under the vehicle.
Make sure to disable all functions of
the vehicle height control of the elec-
tronically modulated air suspension
and then stopping the engine.
(
P.383)
When lowering the vehicle, make sure
that there is no-one near the vehicle. If
there are people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
483
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
1Chock the tires.
2Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
3Turn the tire jack portion by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
4Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
5Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place
WARNING
Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with
power trunk lid
In cases such as when replacing tires,
make sure to turn off the trunk opener
main switch (P.125). Failure to do so
may cause the trunk lid to operate unin-
tentionally if the power trunk lid switch is
accidentally touched, resulting in hands
and fingers being caught and injured.
Removing a tire
Tire Wheel chock posi-
tions
Front left-hand side Behind the rear
right-hand side tire
Front right-hand
side
Behind the rear
left-hand side tire
Rear left-hand side In front of the front
right-hand side tire
Rear right-hand side In front of the front
left-hand side tire
A
484
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
the tire so that the wheel design faces up to
avoid scratching the wheel surface.
1Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while
the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to
come off.
2Install the tire and loosely tighten
each wheel nut by hand by approxi-
mately the same amount.
Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come
into contact with the disc wheel.
Disc wheel
Washer
3Lower the vehicle.
4Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
WARNING
Replacing a tire
Do not touch the disc wheels or the area
around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc
wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these
areas with hands, feet or other body
parts while changing a tire, etc. may
result in burns.
Installing the tire
A
B
485
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
Tightening torque:
140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)
WARNING
When installing the tire
Failure to follow these precautions could
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious
injury.
Never use oil or grease on the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel
nuts to be excessively tightened, lead-
ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. In
addition, the oil or grease can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel
may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a
torque wrench to 140 N•m (14.3
kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf) as soon as possible
after changing wheels.
Do not attach a heavily damaged
wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
When installing a tire, only use wheel
nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
If there are any cracks or deformations
in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,
tire pressure warning valves, trans-
mitters and tire valve caps
P.477
486
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres-
sure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure
may result in the following:
Reduced fuel economy
Reduced driving comfort and poor han-
dling
Reduced tire life due to wear
Reduced safety
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it
checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation
pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure,
observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at
least 3 hours or has not been driven for
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an
accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-
ing.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly
inflated based only on its appearance.
It is normal for the tire inflation pressure
to be higher after driving as heat is gen-
erated in the tire. Do not reduce tire infla-
tion pressure after driving.
Passengers and luggage weight should
be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
Tire inflation pressure
Make sure to maintain proper tire
inflation pressure. Tire inflation
pressure should be checked at least
once per month. However, Lexus
recommends that tire inflation
pressure be checked once every
two weeks.
WARNING
Proper inflation is critical to save tire
performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the
following conditions may occur which
could lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury:
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from
overheated tires
Air leaking from between tire and
wheel
Wheel deformation and/or tire dam-
age
Greater possibility of tire damage
while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the
road, etc.)
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire
inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or mois-
ture may get into the valve and cause an
air leak, resulting in decreased tire infla-
tion pressure.
487
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
When replacing wheels, care should
be taken to ensure that they are equiv-
alent to those removed in load capac-
ity, diameter, rim width and inset
*
.
Replacement wheels are available at
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as offset.
Lexus does not recommend using the
following:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straight-
ened
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped
with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning
system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
must be installed. (P.477)
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and
wheel nut wrenches designed for
use with your aluminum wheels.
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily
corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate
from the wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
WARNING
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different
size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a
loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking
wheel which is designed for a tubeless
tire.
Doing so may result in an accident,
causing death or serious injury.
Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air
during driving, possibly causing an acci-
dent.
NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
Because tire repair or replacement
may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to
have tires serviced by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer or
other qualified service shop. In addi-
tion, make sure to purchase your tire
pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters at any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer.
Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels
are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters may not work properly with
non-genuine wheels.
Aluminum wheel precautions
488
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When rotating, repairing or chang-
ing your tires, check that the wheel
nuts are still tight after driving 1600
km (1000 miles).
Be careful not to damage the alumi-
num wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Lexus genuine balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic
or rubber hammer when balancing
your wheels. 1Turn the engine switch off.
2Open the glove box. Remove the
partition. (P.426)
3Remove the panel.
4Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the
filter cover out of the claws ( ),
and remove the filter cover.
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be
changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removing the air conditioning
filter
A
B
489
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
5Remove the filter case.
6Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing up.
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning fil-
ter according to the maintenance schedule.
In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic
flow, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Lexus Service Booklet”
or “Lexus Warranty Booklet”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dra-
matically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter
and replace if necessary.
Air conditioning filter with deodorizing
function
When fragrances are placed in your vehi-
cle, the deodorizing effect may become
significantly weakened in a short period.
When an air conditioning odor comes out
continuously, replace the air conditioning
filter.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning sys-
tem
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without
a filter may cause damage to the system.
To prevent damage to the filter cover
When moving the filter cover in the
direction of arrow to release the fitting,
pay attention not to apply excessive force
to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may
be damaged.
490
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
The smart entry & start system and wire-
less remote control will not function
properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
When the card key battery needs to be
replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only
at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
Use a CR2032 lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer, local electrical appliance shops
or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to
local laws.
1Take out the mechanical key.
2Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip
of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.
3Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal
facing up.
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one
if it is depleted.
As the key may be damaged if the
following procedure is not per-
formed properly, it is recom-
mended that key battery
replacement be performed by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Items to prepare
Replacing the battery
491
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
WARNING
Battery precautions
Observe the following precautions.Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
Do not swallow the battery. Doing so
may cause chemical burns.
A coin battery or button battery is
used in the electronic key. If a battery is
swallowed, it may cause severe chemi-
cal burns in as little as 2 hours and may
result in death or serious injury.
Keep away new and removed batteries
from children.
If the cover cannot be firmly closed,
stop using the electronic key and stow
the key in the place where children
cannot reach, and then contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
If you accidentally swallow a battery or
put a battery into a part of your body,
get emergency medical attention
immediately.
To prevent battery explosion or leak-
age of flammable liquid or gas
Replace the battery with a new battery
of the same type. If a wrong type of
battery is used, it may explode.
Do not expose batteries to extremely
low pressure due to high altitude or
extremely high temperatures.
Do not burn, break or cut a battery.
Lithium battery precautions
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUC-
TIONS
NOTICE
When replacing the battery
Use a flathead screwdriver of appropri-
ate size. Applying excessive force may
deform or damage the cover.
For normal operation after replacing
the battery
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents:
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to
rust.
Do not touch or move any other com-
ponent inside the remote control.
Do not bend either of the battery ter-
minals.
492
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
1Turn the engine switch off.
2Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A fuse
box (LS500)
Remove the service cover (P.457) and
push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment: type A fuse
box (LS350)
Remove the service cover (P.457) and
push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment: type B fuse
box
Remove the engine compartment cover
(P.455) and push the tabs in and lift the
lid off.
Driver’s side instrument panel
Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during
removal or installation.
Passenger’s side instrument panel
Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during
removal or installation.
Checking and replacing
fuses
If any of the electrical components
do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and
replace the fuses as necessary.
Checking and replacing fuses
493
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
Trunk
Remove the luggage mat. (P.429)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
3Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.
4Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of
an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
A
B
494
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
After a fuse is replaced
When installing the lid, make sure that the
tab is installed securely.
If the lights do not turn on even after the
fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement.
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the
vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting
the wiring harness from damage.
A
B
A
B
A
B
WARNING
To prevent system breakdowns and
vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage
rating than that indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or
equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even
as a temporary fix.
Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload
determined and repaired by any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer as soon
as possible.
495
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
LED Lights
The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If
any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle
to any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer
to have the light replaced.
Condensation build-up on the inside of
the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the
inside of the headlight lens does not indi-
cate a malfunction. Contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer for more informa-
tion in the following situations:
Large drops of water have built up on the
inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
Light bulbs
If any lights burn out, have it
replaced by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
496
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
497
7
When trouble arises
When trouble arises
.
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................498
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency..........................498
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water............................................ 499
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
.........................................................501
If you think something is wrong
........................................................505
Fuel pump shut off system .....506
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds .......507
If a warning message is displayed
......................................................... 515
If you have a flat tire...................518
If the engine will not start ........ 519
If you lose your keys.................520
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ........................................ 521
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..................... 521
If the vehicle battery is discharged
........................................................ 524
If your vehicle overheats........530
If the vehicle becomes stuck
........................................................ 534
498
7-1. Essential information
7-1.Essential inf ormation
Press the switch to flash all of the turn
signal lights.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.
Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a
long time while the engine is not running,
the battery may discharge.
If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
or in the event of a strong rear impact, the
emergency flashers will turn on automati-
cally.
The emergency flashers will turn off auto-
matically after operating for approxi-
mately 20 minutes. To manually turn the
emergency flashers off, press the switch
twice.
(The emergency flashers may not turn on
automatically depending on the force of
the impact and conditions of the colli-
sion.)
1Steadily step on the brake pedal
with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly
as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2Shift the shift position to N.
If the shift position is shifted to N
3After slowing down, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place by the road.
4Stop the engine.
If the shift position cannot be shifted
to N
3Keep depressing the brake pedal
with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
4To stop the engine, press and hold
the engine switch for 2 consecutive
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to
warn other drivers when the vehicle
has to be stopped on the road due
to a breakdown, etc.
Operating instructions
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it
becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the
vehicle using the following proce-
dure:
Stopping the vehicle
499
7
7-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
seconds or more, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession.
5Stop the vehicle in a safe place by
the road.
Remove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened, open the
door and exit the vehicle.
If the door can not be opened, open
the window using the power window
switch and exit the vehicle through
the window.
If the window can not be opened
using the power window switch,
remain calm, wait until the water
level inside the vehicle rises to the
point that the water pressure inside
of the vehicle equals the water pres-
sure outside of the vehicle, and then
open the door and exit the vehicle.
WARNING
If the engine has to be turned off while
driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will
be lost, making the steering wheel heav-
ier to turn. Decelerate as much as possi-
ble before turning off the engine.
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water
In the event the vehicle is sub-
merged in water, remain calm and
perform the following.
WARNING
Using an emergency hammer
*
for
emergency escape
The rear window of this vehicle can be
shattered by an emergency hammer
*
used for emergency escape, however,
since the windshield, front side windows
and rear side windows are laminated
glass they can not be shattered by an
emergency hammer
*
.
*
: Contact your Lexus dealer or
aftermarket accessory manufacturer
for further information about an emer-
gency hammer.
500
7-1. Essential information
WARNING
Escaping the vehicle from the window
There are cases where escaping the
vehicle from the window is not possible
due to seating position, passenger body
type, etc.
When using an emergency hammer,
consider your seat location and the size
of the window opening to ensure that the
opening is accessible and large enough
to escape.
501
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
7-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend having your vehicle towed by
any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer or commercial
towing service, using a wheel-lift
type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all
towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing your vehicle with a
wheel-lift type truck from the front,
the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles
must be in good conditions.
(P.503, 501) If they are dam-
aged, use a towing dolly or flatbed
truck.
For AWD models: If towing your
vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck,
use a towing dolly. (P.503, 501)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
When towing the vehicle
2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain and related
parts may be damaged or an accident
may occur due to a change in direction
of the vehicle.
AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehicle may
fly off the truck.
502
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
In the following situations, it is not pos-
sible to be towed by another vehicle
using cables or chains, as the rear
wheels may be locked due to the park-
ing lock. Contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer or commercial
towing service.
There is a malfunction in the P posi-
tion control system. (P.219, 515)
There is a malfunction in the engine
immobilizer system. (P.64)
There is a malfunction in the smart
entry & start system. (P.521)
The battery is discharged.
(P.524)
The following may indicate a problem
with your transmission. Contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer or commercial towing service
before towing.
WARNING
While towing
When towing using cables or chains,
avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing eyelets,
cables or chains. The towing eyelets,
cables or chains may become dam-
aged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.
Make sure to disable all functions of
the vehicle height control of the elec-
tronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change and part of your body may be
caught under the vehicle, possibly
causing injury. (
P.383)
Do not turn the engine switch off.
This may lead to an accident as the
rear wheels will be locked by the park-
ing lock.
Installing towing eyelets to the vehi-
cle
Make sure that towing eyelets are
installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets
may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the vehicle
when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the engine switch is off. The
steering lock mechanism is not strong
enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
When raising the vehicle, ensure ade-
quate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle.
Without adequate clearance, the vehi-
cle could be damaged while being
towed.
To prevent damage to the vehicle
when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either
from the front or rear.
To prevent damage to the vehicle dur-
ing emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the
suspension components.
Situations when it is not possible
to be towed by another vehicle
Situations when it is necessary to
contact dealers before towing
503
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
The engine is running but the vehi-
cle does not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal
sound.
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
When using a flat-bed truck to trans-
port the vehicle, use tire strapping
belts. Refer to the owner’s manual of
the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping
method.
In order to suppress vehicle movement
during transportation, set the parking
brake and turn the engine switch off.
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using cables or chains
secured to the emergency towing eye-
lets. This should only be attempted on
hard surfaced roads for short distances
at under 30 km/h (18 mph).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and
brakes must be in good condition.
Towing with a wheel-lift type
truck
NOTICE
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to pre-
vent body damage.
Using a flatbed truck
Emergency towing
504
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
To have your vehicle towed by another
vehicle, the towing eyelet must be
installed to your vehicle. Install the tow-
ing eyelet using the following proce-
dure.
1Take out the phillips-head screw-
driver and towing eyelet.
Phillips-head screwdriver
Towing eyelet
2Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle
body as shown in the illustration.
3Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
4Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a phillips-head
screwdriver or hard metal bar.
5Securely attach cables or chains to
the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6Enter the vehicle being towed and
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine
switch to IGNITION ON mode.
7Shift the shift position to N and
release the parking brake.
Turn automatic mode off. (P.228)
While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist
for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
Emergency towing procedure
A
B
505
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench can be purchased at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air condi-
tioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire
wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge
continually points higher than nor-
mal.
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when corner-
ing
Strange noises related to the sus-
pension system
Pinging or other noises related to
the engine
Engine missing, stumbling or run-
ning roughly
Appreciable loss of power
If you think something is
wrong
If you notice any of the following
symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Con-
tact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any
reliable repairer as soon as possi-
ble.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
506
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy
feeling, pedal almost touches the
floor
Follow the procedure below to restart
the engine after the system is activated.
1Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or turn it off.
2Restart the engine.
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage
when the engine stalls or when an
airbag inflates upon collision, the
fuel pump shut off system stops the
supply of fuel to the engine.
Restarting the engine
NOTICE
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system has been dam-
aged and is in need of repair. Do not
restart the engine.
507
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
High coolant temperature warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
Warning light Details/Actions
(red)
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can
be detected)
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Warning light Details/Actions
(yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronically controlled brake system (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + A); or
The electric parking brake
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.530)
508
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Charging system warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)
SRS warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The emission control system (on some models);
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The electronic automatic transmission control system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reli-
able repairer.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
509
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer)
ABS warning light (warning buzzer)
Inappropriate pedal operation warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated
The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated.
Have it replaced by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in:
The Brake Override System
The Drive-Start Control
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Indicates that the shift position was changed and Drive-Start Control
was operated while depressing the accelerator pedal.
Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being depressed
simultaneously, and the Brake Override System is operating.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
510
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Low fuel level warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)
*
*
: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver and
front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the
buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain
speed.
Warning light Details/Actions
(red)
or
(yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 13 L (3.4 gal., 2.8 Imp.
gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat
belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning
buzzer) turn off.
511
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning buzzer)
*
*
: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently
for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
Tire pressure warning light
LTA indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(except F SPORT
models)
(F SPORT models)
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
Warning light Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
Natural causes
Flat tire
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (P.513)
Warning light Details/Actions
(orange)
(if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(P.306)
512
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop & Start cancel indicator (warning buzzer)
RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
PCS warning light
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the Stop & Start system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
(if equipped)
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the cam-
era being dirty, etc.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(P.360, 515)
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes or illumi-
nates)
(if equipped)
When a buzzer sounds simultaneously:
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
The PCS (Pre-Collision System) has become temporarily unavailable,
corrective action may be necessary.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
(P.260, 271, 516)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
P.285, 293
513
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Slip indicator
Parking brake indicator (warning buzzer)
Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard
due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
Front passenger detection sensor, seat
belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to
flash and the warning buzzer to sound
even if a passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sen-
sor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes
on while driving
The malfunction indicator lamp will come
on if the fuel tank becomes completely
empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the
vehicle immediately. The malfunction indi-
cator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not
go off, contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system warning
light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insuffi-
cient or the voltage temporarily drops, the
electric power steering system warning
light may come on and the warning buzzer
may sound.
When the tire pressure warning light
comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punc-
tured.
If a tire is punctured: P.518
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn it to
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC system;
The TRC system; or
The hill-start assist control system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer immediately.
514
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire
pressure warning light comes on or blinks.
If the tire pressure warning light blinks for
approximately 1 minute then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes
on
1After the temperature of the tires has
lowered sufficiently, check the inflation
pressure of each tire and adjust them to
the specified level.
2If the warning light does not turn off
even after several minutes have
elapsed, check that the inflation pres-
sure of each tire is at the specified level
and perform initialization. (P.478)
The tire pressure warning light may
come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come
on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
Conditions that the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not function properly
P.468
WARNING
If both the ABS and the brake system
warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immedi-
ately and contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
The vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking, and the ABS
system may fail, which could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
When the electric power steering
system warning light comes on
When the light comes on yellow, the
assist to the power steering is restricted.
When the light comes on red, the assist
to the power steering is lost and handling
operations of the steering wheel become
extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are
heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using more
force than usual.
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on
Be sure to observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or
serious injury.
Decelerate to the lowest appropriate
speed as soon as possible. Do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph).
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes
on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have
a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by
the nearest any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-
ing.
If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering
wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage
should occur
The tire pressure warning system may
not activate immediately.
515
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Warning messages
The warning messages explained below
may differ from the actual messages
according to operation conditions and vehi-
cle specifications.
Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard
due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level is low. Check the level
of the engine oil, and add if necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is
stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a
level surface and check to see if the mes-
sage disappears.
NOTICE
To ensure the tire pressure warning
system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifi-
cations or makers, as the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly.
If a warning message is dis-
played
The multi-information display
shows warnings for system malfunc-
tions and incorrectly performed
operations, and messages that indi-
cate a need for maintenance.
When a message is displayed, per-
form the appropriate corrective
action for the message.
If a warning message is displayed
again after the appropriate actions
have been performed, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Additionally, if a warning light
comes on or flashes at the same
time that a warning message is dis-
played, take the appropriate cor-
rective action for the warning light.
(P.507)
516
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If “Engine Stopped Steering Power
Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the engine is
stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are heav-
ier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly
and operate it using more force than usual.
If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery”
is displayed
Power was turned off due to the automatic
power off function. Next time when starting
the engine, increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain that level for approxi-
mately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit
Your Dealer” is displayed
The following systems may be malfunction-
ing. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer imme-
diately.
The LED headlight system
The automatic headlight leveling system
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System) (if
equipped)
AHB (Automatic High Beam) (if
equipped)
Multi Weather Lights
If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable
See Owner's Manual” is displayed (on
some models)
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range system is suspended tem-
porarily or until the problem shown in the
message is resolved. (causes and coping
methods: P.260, 271)
If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is
displayed (on some models)
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range system cannot be used
temporarily. Use the system when it
becomes available again.
If a message that indicates the malfunc-
tion of front camera is displayed
The following systems may be suspended
until the problem shown in the message is
resolved. (P.260, 271, 512)
PCS (Pre-Collision system) (if equipped)
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (if equipped)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System) (if
equipped)
AHB (Automatic High Beam) (if
equipped)
If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is
displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should be
scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil and change it if neces-
sary. After changing the engine oil, make
sure to reset the message. (P.459)
If “Oil Maintenance Required” is dis-
played
Indicates that the engine oil should be
changed.
Check and change the engine oil, and oil fil-
ter by any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer. After changing the engine oil,
make sure to reset the message. (P.459)
If “Shift System Malfunction Driving
Unavailable” is displayed
There is a malfunction in the shift control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer imme-
diately.
If a message that indicates the need for
the shift lever operation is displayed
To prevent the shift lever from being oper-
ated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly, a message that requires shift-
ing the shift position may be displayed on
the multi-information display. In that case,
follow the instruction of the message and
shift the shift position.
517
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
If a message that indicates the need for
visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the
multi-information display is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-
ately.
If a message that indicates the need for
referring to Owner’s Manual is dis-
played
If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display,
follow the instructions.
“Engine Coolant Temp High” (P.530)
•“Battery Low (P.524)
“Transmission Fluid Temp High”
(P.220)
If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display, it
may indicate a malfunction. Have the
vehicle inspected by any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer immedi-
ately.
“Entry & Start System Malfunction”
“Shift System Malfunction”
“P Switch Malfunction”
“Shift System Unavailable”
If any of the following messages are
shown on the multi-information display, it
may indicate a malfunction. Immediately
stop the vehicle and contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
“Braking Power Low”
“Charging System Malfunction”
“Oil Pressure Low”
NOTICE
If “High Power Consumption Partial
Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is
displayed frequently
There is a possible malfunction relating
to the charging system or the battery
may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
518
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Take your vehicle to the nearest
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer, or authorized tire dealer as
soon as possible if any tire goes flat.
For XXX/XXRXX size tires
The vehicle can be driven for a maximum
of 80 km (50 miles) at a speed below 80
km/h (50 mph) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on. (P.511)
For XXX/XXRFXX size tires
The vehicle can be driven for a maximum
of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 80
km/h (50 mph) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on. (P.511)
A run-flat tire has a or mark
on the side wall.
In some conditions (such as at high tem-
peratures)
For XXX/XXRXX size tires: You cannot
continue driving for up to 50 km (80
miles).
For XXX/XXRFXX size tires: You cannot
continue driving for up to 100 km (160
miles).
For the detailed information on run-flat
tires
See the tire warranty booklet.
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
spare tire, but instead you can con-
tinue driving the vehicle with
run-flat tires even if any tire goes
flat.
In this case, slow down and drive
with extra caution.
Run-flat tires
NOTICE
When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer as the
tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter may be damaged if not handled cor-
rectly.
When driving over bumps
If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle
height will be lower than usual. Ensure
that nothing strikes the bottom of the
vehicle.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid seal-
ants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a
liquid sealant is used, contact any author-
ized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer or other
qualified service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire pres-
sure warning valve and transmitter when
replacing the tire. (P.477)
519
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
There may not be sufficient fuel in
the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again fol-
lowing correct starting procedures.
(P.216)
There may be a malfunction in the
engine immobilizer system.
(P.64)
There may be a malfunction in the
shift control system.
*
(P.219, 516)
*
: It may not be possible to shift the shift
position from P.
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
The battery may be discharged.
(P.524)
The battery terminal connections
may be loose or corroded.
(P.463)
The engine starting system may be
malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as electronic key battery
depletion or a blown fuse. However, an
interim measure is available to start the
engine. (P.519)
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
One or both of the battery terminals
may be disconnected. (P.463)
The battery may be discharged.
(P.524)
There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock system.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer if the problem cannot be repaired,
or if repair procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start, the
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even
though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P.216), con-
sider each of the following points:
The engine will not start even
though the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
The starter motor turns over
slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn
does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn
over
The starter motor does not turn
over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
Starting the engine in an emer-
gency
520
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if
the engine switch is functioning nor-
mally.
Do not use this starting procedure
except in cases of emergency.
1Press the parking brake switch to
check that the parking brake is set.
(P.227)
Parking brake indicator will come on.
2Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode.
3Press and hold the engine switch
for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using
the above steps, the system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer.
If you lose your keys
New genuine mechanical keys can
be made by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer
using another mechanical key and
the key number stamped on your
key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such
as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
NOTICE
When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk
of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer immediately with all remaining
electronic keys and the card key (if
equipped) that were provided with your
vehicle.
521
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Remove the cover inside the trunk and
pull the lever.
When the electronic key does not work
properly
Make sure that the smart entry & start
system has not been disabled using the
Remote Touch or at any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer. If it has been disa-
bled, re-enable it.
Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is
set, cancel the function. (P.127)
Unlocking the door
Use the mechanical key (P.112) in
If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened
If the fuel filler door opener switch
cannot be operated, contact any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer to service the vehicle. In
case where refueling is urgently
necessary, the following procedure
can be used to open the fuel filler
door.
Opening the fuel filler door
If the electronic key does not
operate properly
If communication between the
electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P.127) or the electronic
key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart entry
& start system and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In such
cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened and the engine can be
started by following the procedure
below.
NOTICE
In case of a smart entry & start system
malfunction or other key-related
problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic
keys provided with your vehicle, to any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Locking and unlocking the
doors, unlocking the trunk
522
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
order to perform the following opera-
tions:
1Pull the driver’s door handle and
insert the mechanical key.
2Unlock the door. (P.77)
3Remove the key, return the handle,
and then pull the handle again.
Locking the door
1With the door open, push down the
inside lock button.
For the front doors
2Close the door while pulling the
door handle.
For the rear doors
2Close the door.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
open. (P.77)
Key linked functions
1Closes the windows and the moon roof
(turn and hold)
2Opens the windows and the moon roof
(turn and hold)
These settings must be customized at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
523
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
1Depress the brake pedal.
2Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the engine switch will
turn to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart entry & start system is
deactivated in customization setting, the
engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY
mode.
3Firmly depress the brake pedal and
check that is shown on the
multi-information display.
4Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot
be started, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Stopping the engine
Set the parking brake, shift the shift position
to P and press the engine switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the engine.
Electronic key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary
measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately
when the battery is depleted. (P.490)
Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors
or trunk will not set the alarm system.
If a door or trunk is unlocked using the
mechanical key when the alarm system is
set, the alarm may be triggered. (P.77)
Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the
engine switch in step 3 above. The engine
does not start and modes will be changed
each time the switch is pressed. (P.218)
WARNING
When using the mechanical key and
operating the power windows or
moon roof
Operate the power window or moon
roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts caught in
the window or moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the
mechanical key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get caught in
the power window or moon roof.
Starting the engine
524
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a set of jumper (or booster)
cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your
vehicle by following the steps below.
Method connecting jumper (or
booster) cables to the battery
1Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and doors locked.
(P.78)
2Open the trunk lid and remove the
luggage mat. (P.429)
In the event that the trunk opener cannot
be used, use the mechanical key to open
the trunk. (P.521)
3Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the
clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then,
connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the
clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .
Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (your vehicle)
If the vehicle battery is dis-
charged
The following procedures may be
used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Restarting the engine
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
525
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
4Start the engine of the second vehi-
cle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehi-
cle.
5Open and close any of the doors of
your vehicle with the engine switch
off.
6Maintain the engine speed of the
second vehicle and start the engine
of your vehicle by turning the
engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
7Once the vehicle’s engine has
started, remove the jumper cables
in the exact reverse order from
which they were connected.
8Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to disable the Stop & Start
system. (P.331)
Method connecting jumper (or
booster) cables to the exclusive
jump starting terminal
1Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and doors locked.
(P.78)
2Open the hood. Remove the ser-
vice cover. (P.451, 457)
3Open the fuse box cover.
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
4Open the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover.
5Remove the engine cover.
(P.456)
6Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the
clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then,
A
B
526
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the
clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .
LS500
LS350
Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting
terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration
7Start the engine of the second vehi-
cle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehi-
cle.
C
D
A
B
C
D
527
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
8Open and close any of the doors of
your vehicle with the engine switch
off.
9Maintain the engine speed of the
second vehicle and start the engine
of your vehicle by turning the
engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
10 Once the vehicle’s engine has
started, remove the jumper cables
in the exact reverse order from
which they were connected.
11 Close the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse
box cover to its original position.
12 Install the service cover. (P.457)
13 Install the engine cover. (P.457)
14 Press the Stop & Start cancel
switch to disable the Stop & Start
system. (P.331)
Once the engine starts, have the vehi-
cle inspected at any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer,
or any reliable repairer as soon as pos-
sible.
Starting the engine when the battery is
discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-start-
ing.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn off the headlights and the audio sys-
tem while the engine is off. (Except when
the engine is stopped by the Stop & Start
system.)
Turn off any unnecessary electrical com-
ponents when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such
as in heavy traffic.
When the battery is removed or dis-
charged
Information stored in the ECU is cleared.
When the battery is depleted, have the
vehicle inspected at any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Some systems may require initialization.
(P.563)
When removing the battery terminals
When the battery terminals are removed,
the information stored in the ECU is
cleared. Before removing the battery termi-
nals, contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer as soon as possible.
Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will dis-
charge gradually even when the vehicle is
not in use, due to natural discharge and the
draining effects of certain electrical appli-
ances. If the vehicle is left for a long time,
the battery may discharge, and the engine
may be unable to start. (The battery
recharges automatically during driving.)
After jump starting the vehicle
Be sure to disable the Stop & Start system
so that the battery can be charged.
(P.331)
When recharging or replacing the bat-
tery
In some cases, it may not be possible to
unlock the doors using the smart entry &
start system when the battery is dis-
charged. Use the wireless remote control
or the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the doors.
The engine may not start on the first
attempt after the battery has recharged
but will start normally after the second
attempt. This is not a malfunction.
The engine switch mode is memorized by
the vehicle. When the battery is recon-
nected, the system will return to the
mode it was in before the battery was dis-
charged. Before disconnecting the bat-
tery, turn the engine switch off.
528
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you are unsure what mode the engine
switch was in before the battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when
reconnecting the battery.
For a while after the battery terminals
have been disconnected and recon-
nected, for a while after the battery has
been replaced, the Stop & Start system
may not automatically stop the engine for
approximately 5 to 60 minutes.
When replacing the battery
Use a Central Degassing type battery
(European Regulations).
Use a genuine battery specifically
designed for use with the Stop & Start
system or a battery with equivalent speci-
fications to a genuine battery. If an unsup-
ported battery is used, Stop & Start
system functions may be restricted to
protect the battery.
Also, battery performance may decrease
and the engine may not be able to restart.
Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer for details.
Use a battery with the same case size as
the previous battery and an equivalent
20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater.
If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be
properly secured.
If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if
the time period where the vehicle is not
used is a short time, the battery may dis-
charge and the engine may not be able to
start.
Use a battery with a handle. If a battery
without a handle is used, removal is more
difficult.
After replacing, firmly attach the follow-
ing items to the exhaust hole of the bat-
tery.
Use the exhaust hose that was attached
to the battery before replacing and con-
firm that it is firmly connected to the hole
section of the vehicle.
Use the exhaust hole plug included with
the battery replaced or the one installed
on the battery prior to the replacement.
(Depending on the battery to be
replaced, the exhaust hole may be
plugged.)
Exhaust hole plug
Exhaust hole
Exhaust hose
For details, consult any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer.
WARNING
When removing the battery terminals
Always remove the negative (-) terminal
first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts
any metal in the surrounding area when
the positive (+) terminal is removed, a
spark may occur, leading to a fire in addi-
tion to electrical shocks and death or
serious injury.
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidentally igniting the flamma-
ble gas that may be emitted from the bat-
tery:
Make sure each jumper cable is con-
nected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with
any other than the intended terminal.
A
B
C
529
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
WARNING
Do not allow the other end of the
jumper cable connected to the “+” ter-
minal to come into contact with any
other parts or metal surfaces in the
area, such as brackets or unpainted
metal.
Do not allow the + and - clamps of the
jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette
lighters or allow open flame near the
battery.
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and cor-
rosive acidic electrolyte, while related
parts contain lead and lead compounds.
Observe the following precautions when
handling the battery:
When working with the battery, always
wear safety glasses and take care not
to allow any battery fluids (acid) to
come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes
into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area
with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the
affected area until medical attention
can be received.
Always wash your hands after handling
the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the battery.
After recharging the battery
Have the battery inspected at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer as soon as possible.
If the battery is deteriorating, continued
use may cause the battery to emit a mal-
odorous gas, which may be detrimental
to the health of passengers.
When replacing the battery
When the vent plug and indicator are
close to the hold down clamp, the bat-
tery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak.
For information regarding battery
replacement, contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
After replacing, securely attach the
exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to
the exhaust hole of the replaced bat-
tery. If not properly installed, gases
(hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle
interior, and there is the possible dan-
ger of the gas igniting and exploding.
NOTICE
When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables,
ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or engine drive
belt.
To prevent damaging the vehicle
The exclusive jump starting terminal is to
be used when charging the battery from
another vehicle in an emergency. It can-
not be used to jump start another vehicle.
530
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
1Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
turn off the air conditioning system,
and then stop the engine.
2If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the
steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3After the engine has cooled down
sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
LS500
LS350
Radiators
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immedi-
ately contact any authorized Lexus retailer
or Lexus authorized repairer, or any relia-
ble repairer.
4The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir.
Engine (LS500)
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that
your vehicle is overheating.
The engine coolant temperature
gauge (P.86, 89) is in the red
zone or a loss of engine power is
experienced. (For example, the
vehicle speed does not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop
in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown on the
multi-information display.
Steam comes out from under the
hood.
Correction procedures
A
B
531
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
Coolant inlet cap
Engine (LS350)
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
Coolant inlet cap
Intercooler (LS500)
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
5Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if
coolant is unavailable.
Engine (LS500)
P.532
Engine (LS350)
P.532
Intercooler (LS500)
Remove the engine compartment cover
and add coolant.
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
532
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
6Start the engine and turn the air
conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fan oper-
ates and to check for coolant leaks
from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning
system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating
by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it
is difficult to check these, turn the air con-
ditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing tem-
peratures.)
7If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and
contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
When adding engine coolant (LS500)
Add coolant in accordance with the follow-
ing procedure.
1Remove the engine compartment
cover.
2Remove the engine cover. (P.456)
3Remove the caps and .
4Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
up to the “F” line , and then
replace the cap .
5Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
until it is full, and then replace the
cap .
6Install the engine compartment cover
and engine cover. (P.457)
When adding engine coolant (LS350)
Add coolant in accordance with the follow-
ing procedure.
A
B
A
C
A
B
B
533
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
1Remove the engine compartment
cover.
2Remove the engine cover. (P.456)
3Remove the caps and .
4Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
up to the “F” line , and then
replace the cap .
5Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
until it is full, and then replace the
cap .
6Install the engine compartment cover
and engine cover. (P.457)
WARNING
When inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury such as burns.
A
B
A
C
A
B
B
If steam is seen coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine com-
partment may be very hot.
Keep hands and clothing (especially a
tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the
fan and belts.
Failure to do so may cause the hands
or clothing to be caught, resulting in
serious injury.
Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap,
the engine coolant reservoir cap or the
intercooler coolant reservoir cap while
the engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant
could spray out.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has
cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool
coolant to a hot engine too quickly can
cause damage to the engine.
To prevent damage to the cooling sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions:
Avoid contaminating the coolant with
foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
Do not use any coolant additive.
534
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
1Stop the engine. Set the parking
brake and shift the shift position to
P.
2Remove the mud, snow or sand
from around the rear wheels.
3Place wood, stones or some other
material under the rear wheels to
help provide traction.
4Restart the engine.
5Shift the shift position to D or R and
release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress
the accelerator pedal.
When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press the switch to turn off TRC.
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following proce-
dures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
WARNING
When attempting to free a stuck vehi-
cle
If you choose to push the vehicle back
and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking
other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free. Use
extreme caution.
When shifting the shift position
Be careful not to shift the shift position
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid accel-
eration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission
and other components
Avoid spinning the rear wheels and
depressing the accelerator pedal
more than necessary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after
these procedures are performed, the
vehicle may require towing to be freed.
8
535
8
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle specifications
.
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.) ..............................................536
Fuel information.........................545
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ...........546
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................563
536
8-1. Specifications
8-1.Specificatio ns
Dimensions
Weights
*1
: Unladen vehicles
*2
: Without electronically modulated air suspension
*3
: With electronically modulated air suspension
*4
:Except F SPORT models
*5
: F SPORT models
*6
:LS500
*7
:LS350
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length 5235 mm (206.1 in.)
Overall width 1900 mm (74.8 in.)
Overall height
*1
2WD models 1460 mm (57.5 in.)
*2
1450 mm (57.1 in.)
*3
AWD models 1470 mm (57.9 in.)
*2
1460 mm (57.5 in.)
*3
Wheelbase 3125 mm (123.0 in.)
Tread
*1
Front
2WD models 1630 mm (64.2 in.)
AWD models 1630 mm (64.2 in.)
*2
1635 mm (64.4 in.)
*3
Rear 1635 mm (64.4 in.)
*4
1615 mm (63.6 in.)
*5
Gross vehicle mass 2760 kg (6085 lb.)
*6
2585 kg (5699 lb.)
*7
Maximum permissible axle capac-
ity
Front 1420 kg (3131 lb.)
Rear 1550 kg (3417 lb.)
537
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identifica-
tion number for your Lexus. It is used in
registering the ownership of your vehi-
cle.
This number is stamped on the top left
of the instrument panel.
This number is also stamped under the
right-hand front seat.
This number is also on the manufac-
turer’s label.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.
LS500
LS350
Vehicle identification
538
8-1. Specifications
LS500
LS350
Engine
Model V35A-FTS
Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline (with
turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 85.5 100.0 mm (3.37 3.94 in.)
Displacement 3445 cm
3
(210.2 cu. in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 8GR-FKS
Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 94.0 83.0 mm (3.70 3.27 in.)
Displacement 3456 cm
3
(210.9 cu. in.)
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
When you find these types of fuel label at the
gas station, use only the fuel with one of the
following labels.
EU area:
Unleaded gasoline conforming to European
standard EN228 only
Except EU area:
Unleaded gasoline only
539
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Ref-
erence
*
])
*
: The engine oil capacity is a reference
quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up and turn off the
engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and
check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Lexus vehicle. Lexus recom-
mends the use of approved “Toyota
Genuine Motor Oil”. Another motor
oil of matching quality can also be
used.
Oil grade:
0W-20 and 5W-30:
API grade SM “Energy-Conserving”,
SN “Resource-Conserving”, SN PLUS
“Resource-Conserving” or SP
“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC
GF-6A multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
Preferred
SAE 0W-20 is filled into your Lexus
vehicle at manufacturing, and the best
choice for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather. If SAE
0W-20 oil is not available, SAE
5W-30 oil may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 0W-20
at the next oil change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here
as an example):
The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the
characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower
value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold
weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the vis-
cosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil
Research Octane Number 95 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 82.0 L (21.7 gal., 18.0 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system
With filter
LS500
7.1 L (7.5 qt., 6.2 Imp. qt.)
LS350
5.8 L (6.1 qt., 5.1 Imp. qt.)
Without fil-
ter
LS500
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp. qt.)
LS350
5.5 L (5.8 qt., 4.8 Imp. qt.)
A
B
540
8-1. Specifications
with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if
the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load con-
ditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks
are added to some oil containers to
help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: “API SERVICE SP” means the
oil quality designation by American Petro-
leum Institute (API).
Center portion: “SAE 0W-20” means the
SAE viscosity grade.
Lower portion: “Resource-Conserving”
means that the oil has fuel-saving and envi-
ronmental protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The International Lubricant Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certifica-
tion Mark is displayed on the front of the
container.
A
B
Cooling system
Capacity
(Reference)
LS500
Engine
10.5 L (11.1 qt., 9.2 Imp. qt.)
Intercooler
4.3 L (4.5 qt., 3.8 Imp. qt.)
LS350 11.0 L (11.6 qt., 9.7 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
541
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
*
: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
Ignition system (spark plug)
LS500 LS350
Make DENSO EC22HPR-D7 DENSO FK20HBR8
Gap 0.7 mm (0.028 in.) 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system (battery)
Open voltage at 20°C (68°F):
12.3 V or higher
(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the head-
lights for 20 to 30 seconds.)
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity
*
LS500 8.9 L (9.4 qt., 7.8 Imp. qt.)
LS350 8.8 L (9.3 qt., 7.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibra-
tion, or damage the transmission of your vehicle.
542
8-1. Specifications
*
: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus
approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the
above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.
*
: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.
*
: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer for further details.
Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity 0.70 L (0.74 qt., 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
*
Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 or equivalent
Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity 0.65 L (0.69 qt., 0.57 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
Rear differential
Oil capacity 1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
Brakes
Pedal clearance
*1
121 mm (4.8 in.) Min.
*3
122 mm (4.8 in.) Min.
*4
Pedal free play 1 6 mm (0.04 0.24 in.)
Brake pad wear limit 1 mm (0.04 in.)
543
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
*1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 500 N (51 kgf, 112 lbf) while
the engine is running.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake sys-
tem warning light is not illuminated when the engine is running. (If the brake system
warning light is illuminated, refer to P.507.)
*2
: Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the
brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.507.)
*3
: Vehicles without Lexus Safety System + A
*4
: Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A
19-inch tires
Parking brake indicator
*2
When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 2
seconds: comes on
When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 2
seconds: turns off
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
Steering
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Tires and wheels
Tire size 245/50R19 101W
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Vehicle speed
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
Rear wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
More than 190 km/h
(118 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)
190 km/h (118 mph)
or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 19 8J
Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)
544
8-1. Specifications
20-inch tires (type A)
20-inch tires (type B)
Tire size 245/45R20 99Y
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Vehicle speed
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
Rear wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
More than 220 km/h
(137 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)
220 km/h (137 mph)
or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 20 8 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)
Tire size Front tires: 245/45RF20 99Y
Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102Y
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Vehicle speed
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
Rear wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
More than 220 km/h
(137 mph) 310 (3.1, 45) 310 (3.1, 45)
220 km/h (137 mph)
or less 250 (2.5, 36) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size Front wheels: 20 8 1/2J
Rear wheels: 20 9 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 140 N•m (14.3 kgf•m, 103 ft•lbf)
545
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a
gasoline engine
Lexus allows the use of ethanol blended
gasoline where the ethanol content is up to
10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended
gasoline to be used has a Research Octane
Number that follows the above.
If your engine knocks
Consult any authorized Lexus retailer or
Lexus authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
You may occasionally notice light knock-
ing for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is
no need for concern.
Fuel information
When you find these types of fuel
label at the gas station, use only the
fuel with one of the following labels.
EU area:
You must only use unleaded gaso-
line conforming to European stand-
ard EN228.
Select premium unleaded gasoline
with a Research Octane Number of
95 or higher for optimum engine
performance.
Except EU area:
You must only use unleaded gaso-
line.
Select premium unleaded gasoline
with a Research Octane Number of
95 or higher for optimum engine
performance.
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper
fuels are used, the engine will be dam-
aged.
Do not use gasoline with metallic addi-
tives, for example manganese, iron or
lead, otherwise it may cause damage
on your engine or emission control
system.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additives
which contain metallic additives.
EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold under
names such as “E50” or “E85” and
fuel containing a large amount of etha-
nol should not be used. The use of
these fuels will damage the vehicle’s
fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Except EU area: Bioethanol fuel sold
under names such as “E50” or “E85”
and fuel containing a large amount of
ethanol should not be used. Your vehi-
cle can use gasoline mixed with 10%
max ethanol. The use of fuel with more
than 10% ethanol content (E10) will
damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You
must ensure that refueling is carried
out only from a source where fuel
specification and quality can be guar-
anteed. In case of any doubt, ask any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Do not use the methanol blended gas-
oline such as M15, M85, M100.
The use of gasoline containing metha-
nol may cause engine damage or fail-
ure.
546
8-2. Customization
8-2.Customization
Changing by using the meter con-
trol switches
1Press or to select .
2Operate the meter control
switches to select the desired item
to be customized.
3According to the display, select the
desired setting and then press .
To go back to the previous screen or exit
the customize mode, press .
Changing by using the Remote
Touch
1Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2Select “Setup” on the menu screen
and select “Vehicle”.
3Select “Vehicle Customization” or
“Drive Mode Customization”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to
the list of settings that can be changed for
details.
For details on the Remote Touch, refer
to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
Changing by using the Rear Multi
Operation Panel (if equipped)
1Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel and
then touch “Seat”.
2Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3Touch .
4Touch a button to change the set-
ting.
When customizing using the Remote
Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the
parking brake, and shift the shift position to
P. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave
the engine running while customizing the
features.
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of
electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. The
settings of these features can be
changed by using the meter control
switches, the Remote Touch, Rear
Multi Operation Panel or at any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
Customizing vehicle features
WARNING
During customization
As the engine needs to be running dur-
ing customization, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate venti-
lation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon
monoxide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
NOTICE
During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that
the engine is running while customizing
features.
547
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus-
tomized. Contact any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized repairer, or
any reliable repairer for further details.
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
Settings that can be changed using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if
equipped)
Settings that can be changed by any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus author-
ized repairer, or any reliable repairer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Seat belts (P.26)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Vehicles with Active Assist for seat belts
Customizable features
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Easy Access Buckle
*1
On Off O
Retraction of front seat belts
when vehicle speed reaches
approximately 20 km/h (12
mph)
*2
On Off O
Retraction of front seat belt
when corresponding front
door is opened or seat belt is
released
*2
On Off O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
548
8-2. Customization
Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P.86, 89, 93)
Function
*1
Default setting Customized set-
ting
Language
*2
English
French
O
German
Spanish
Italian
Russian
Traditional Chi-
nese
*3
Turkish
*3
Arabic
*3
Units L/100 km km/L O O
Drive information 1
Current fuel con-
sumption
Customizable
items: P.96 O
Average fuel
economy (after
reset)
Drive information 2
Distance (driving
range)
Average vehicle
speed (after
reset)
Clock
*2
24-hour display 12-hour display O
Pop-up display On Off O
Accent color Color 1 Color 2 O O
Rev indicator
*4
5000 r/min.
2000 - 6400
r/min.
*5
2000 - 6800
r/min.
*6
O
Off
A
B
C
D
549
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
*1
: For details about each function: P.99
*2
: The default setting varies according to country.
*3
: The customized setting varies according to country.
*4
: F SPORT models
*5
:LS500
*6
:LS350
Head-up Display
*
(P.101)
*
:If equipped
Rev peak
*4
On Off O
Eco Driving Indicator Light On Off O
Suggestion function On
On (when the
vehicle is
stopped) O O
Off
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Gauge information Tachometer
Eco Driving Indi-
cator O
No content
Route guidance to destina-
tion/street name
*
On Off O
Driving support system dis-
play On Off O
Compass
*
On Off O
Audio system operation sta-
tus On Off O
Function
*1
Default setting Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
550
8-2. Customization
Door lock (P.114, 119, 521)
Smart entry & start system and wireless remote control (P.114, 126)
Smart entry & start system (P.114, 126)
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Unlocking using a mechani-
cal key
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
step
O
Speed linked door locking
function On Off O O
Shift position linked door
locking function Off On O O
Shift position linked door
unlocking function Off On O O
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function On Off O O
Locking/unlocking of the
trunk when all doors are
locked/unlocked
On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Operation signal (Emer-
gency flashers) On Off O O
Time elapsed before auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
O
120 seconds
Open door warning buzzer On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Smart entry & start system On Off O O
Smart door unlocking All the doors Driver’s door O O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
551
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Wireless remote control (P.112, 114, 119)
Trunk (P.119)
*
:If equipped
Time elapsed before unlock-
ing all the door when gripping
and holding the driver’s door
handle
2 seconds
Off
O1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
Number of consecutive door
lock operations
As many as
desired 2 times O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Wireless remote control On Off O
Unlocking operation
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
step
O O
Trunk unlocking operation Press and hold
(short)
One short press
O
Push twice
Press and hold
(long)
Off
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid
(kick sensor)
*
On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
552
8-2. Customization
Front seats (P.165)
*
:If equipped
Power rear seats
*
(P.172)
*
:If equipped
Driving position memory (P.177)
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Driver’s seat position linked
head restraint height opera-
tion
*
Off On O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Automatic rear seat opera-
tion (door-linked rear seat
return function and
shift-linked rear seat reclining
function)
On Off O
Door linked rear seat with
ottoman seatback position for
exiting
*
More upright
than upright posi-
tion
Upright position O
Shift-linked rear seat reclining
function On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Selecting doors linked to the
memory recall function Driver’s door All doors O
Driver’s seat slide movement
when exiting the vehicle Full Off O O
Partial
Driver’s seat height move-
ment when exiting the vehicle Off Full O O
Partial
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
553
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Outside rear view mirrors (P.195)
Power windows and moon roof (P.198, 201)
Reverse warning buzzer (P.220)
Automatic light control system (P.232)
Steering wheel movement Tilt only
Off
O OTelescopic only
Tilt and telescopic
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Automatic mirror folding and
extending operation
Linked to the
locking/ unlock-
ing of the doors
Off
O
Linked to opera-
tion of the engine
switch
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Mechanical key linked opera-
tion Off On O
Wireless remote control
linked operation Off On O
Wireless remote control
linked operation signal
(buzzer)
On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Signal (buzzer) when the shift
position is in R Single Intermittent O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
554
8-2. Customization
Lights (P.232)
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)
*
(P.235)
*
:If equipped
Extended Headlight Lighting
system (Time elapsed before
headlights automatically turn
off)
30 seconds
60 seconds
O90 seconds
120 seconds
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Welcome lighting On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
System Control All operations
Automatic high
beam/low beam
changing opera-
tion only
O
Clearance between a vehicle
ahead and the shaded high
beams
Wide
Narrow
O
Standard
Vehicle speed at which the
brightness and illuminated
area adjustment of the high
beams changes mode
Approximately
120 km/h (75
mph) or more
Approximately
100 km/h (63
mph) or more O
Approximately
80 km/h (50
mph) or more
Intensity adjustment of the
high beams when driving
around a curve (illuminates
the area in the direction vehi-
cle is turning more brightly)
On Off O
Projection distance adjust-
ment of the low beams
according to the distance to a
preceding vehicle
On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
555
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Multi Weather Lights (P.241)
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
*
(P.273, 285)
*
:If equipped
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
*
(P.294)
*
:If equipped
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
*
(P.297)
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Multi Weather Lights On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
PCS (Pre-Collision System) On Off O
Adjust alert timing Middle Early O
Late
Pedestrian alert
*
On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
FCTA function On Off O
Adjust alert timing Middle Early O
Late
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Lane centering function On Off O
Steering assist function On Off O
Alert type Steering wheel
vibration Buzzer O
Alert sensitivity High Standard O
Vehicle sway warning func-
tion On Off O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
556
8-2. Customization
*
:If equipped
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*1
(P.307)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: RSA function becomes On when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
*3
: If a Speed limit with supplemental mark is exceeded, the notification buzzer does not
operate.
*4
: Vehicles with navigation system
Vehicle sway warning sensi-
tivity Standard High O
Low
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*2
On Off O
Excess speed notification
method
*3
Display only
No notification
O
Display and
buzzer
Excess speed notification
level 2 km/h (1 mph) 5 km/h (3 mph) O
10 km/h (5 mph)
No overtaking notification
method Display only
No notification
O
Display and steer-
ing wheel vibra-
tion
Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
*4
Display only
No notification
O
Display and
buzzer
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
557
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
*1
(P.311)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Vehicles with Lexus Safety System + A
Stop & Start system (P.325)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
(P.332)
*
:If equipped
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Curve speed reduction func-
tion strength
*2
High Low O
Off
Dynamic Radar Cruise Con-
trol with Road Sign Assist Off On O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Change the Stop & Start sys-
tem duration when the A/C is
on
Standard Extended O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On Off O
Outside rear view mirror indi-
cator brightness Bright Dim O
Alert timing for presence of
approaching vehicle (sensitiv-
ity)
Intermediate
Early
O
Late
Only when vehi-
cle detected in
blind spot
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
558
8-2. Customization
PKSA (Parking Support Alert) (P.349)
Lexus parking assist-sensor (P.351)
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert) function
*
(P.355)
*
:If equipped
RCD (Rear camera detection) function
*
(P.359)
*
:If equipped
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
*
(P.362)
*
:If equipped
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Buzzer volume Level2 Level1 O
Level3
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Lexus parking assist-sensor On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic
alert) function On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
RCD (Rear camera detec-
tion) function On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) function On Off O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
559
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Driving mode select switch (P.378)
*
:If equipped
Electronically modulated air suspension
*
(P.380)
*
:If equipped
Automatic air conditioning system (P.403)
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Powertrain control in custom
mode
*
Normal Power O
Eco
Chassis control in custom
mode
*
Normal Sport O
Comfort
Air conditioning operation in
custom mode
*
Normal Eco O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Vehicle height control On Off O
Ingress/egress height control
function On Off O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Switching between outside
air and recirculated air mode
linked to “AUTO” switch
operation
On Off O O
A/C auto switch operation On Off O O
Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity Standard -3 to 3 O O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
560
8-2. Customization
Seat heater/seat ventilators
*1
(P.416)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Vehicles without power rear seat
Heated steering wheel
*
(P.416)
*
:If equipped
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Driver’s seat temperature
preference in automatic
mode
Standard -2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer) O O
Passenger’s seat tempera-
ture preference in automatic
mode
Standard -2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer) O O
Left-hand rear seat tempera-
ture preference in automatic
mode
*1
Standard -2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer) O O
Right-hand rear seat temper-
ature preference in automatic
mode
*1
Standard -2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer) O O
Engine switch linked auto-
matic activation of the
left-hand rear seat heater
*2
Off On O O
Engine switch linked auto-
matic activation of the
right-hand rear seat heater
*2
Off On O O
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Steering wheel heating pref-
erence in automatic mode Standard -2 (low) to 2
(high) O O
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
561
8
8-2. Customization
Vehicle specifications
Illumination (P.420)
Vehicle customization
When the speed linked door locking
function and shift position linked door
locking function are both on, the door
lock operates as follows.
When shifting the shift position to any
position other than P, all the doors will be
locked.
If the vehicle is started with all the doors
locked, the speed linked door locking
function will not operate.
If the vehicle is started with any door
unlocked, the speed linked door locking
Function Default setting Customized set-
ting
Time elapsed before the inte-
rior lights turn off 15 seconds
Off
O O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the engine
switch is turned off On Off O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked On Off O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with the
electronic key on your person
On Off O
Footwell lights On Off O
Door trim ornament lights On Off O
Time elapsed before the outer
foot lights turn off 15 seconds
Off
O O7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation of the outer foot
lights when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person
On Off O
Operation of the outer foot
lights when the doors are
unlocked
On Off O
Operation of the outer foot
lights when a door is opened On Off O
Fading out of the outer foot
lights when they turn off Long Short O
A
B
C
D
562
8-2. Customization
function will operate.
When the smart entry & start system is
off, the entry unlock function cannot be
customized.
When the doors remain closed after
unlocking the doors and the timer acti-
vated automatic door lock function acti-
vates, signals will be generated in
accordance with the operational signal
(Emergency flashers) function setting.
Some settings can be changed using a
switch or the audio system screen. If a
setting is changed using a switch, the
changed setting will not be reflected on
the audio system screen until the engine
switch is turned off and then to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Clock settings screen
If the clock adjustment screen is displayed
continuously when attempting to change
the clock settings, the system may be mal-
functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable repairer.
563
8
8-3. Initialization
Vehicle specifications
8-3.Initializat ion
*
:If equipped
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on
the vehicle:
List of items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)
*
After reconnecting or changing the
battery P.366
Lexus parking
assist-sensor
After reconnecting or changing the
battery P.353
Oil maintenance After maintenance is performed P.459
Tire pressure warning
system
When the tire inflation pressure is
changed, such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire inflation pressure is
changed, such as when the tire size is
changed.
When rotating the tires.
After performing the transmitter ID
code registration procedure.
P.478
Panoramic view moni-
tor
Battery has been reinstalled.
The steering wheel has been moved
while the battery was being reinstalled.
Battery power is low.
Refer to the “NAVI-
GATION AND MUL-
TIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
564
8-3. Initialization
565
Index
.
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
........................................................ 566
Alphabetical Index ...................569
566
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your mechanical keys,
new genuine mechanical keys can
be made by any authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer.
(P.520)
If you lose your electronic keys, the
risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Contact any authorized
Lexus retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer
immediately. (P.520)
Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted? (P.490)
Is the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine
switch off. (P.218)
Is the electronic key left inside the
vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that
you have the electronic key on your per-
son.
The function may not operate prop-
erly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (P.127)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then
unlock the child-protector lock. (P.118)
The function to prevent the elec-
tronic key from being left inside the
trunk will operate and you can open
the trunk as usual. Take the key out
from the trunk. (P.123)
Did you press the engine switch
while firmly depressing the brake
pedal? (P.216)
If you have a problem, check the
following before contacting any
authorized Lexus retailer or Lexus
authorized repairer, or any reliable
repairer.
The doors cannot be locked,
unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The electronic key does not
operate properly
The doors cannot be locked or
unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
The trunk lid is closed with the
electronic key left inside
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
567
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
Is the electronic key anywhere
detectable inside the vehicle?
(P.126)
Is the steering wheel unlocked?
(P.216)
Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a
temporary way. (P.523)
Is the battery discharged?
(P.524)
It is locked automatically to prevent
theft of the vehicle. (P.216)
Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at
the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the
window lock switch is pressed. (P.200)
The auto power off function will be
operated if the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY mode for a period of
time. (P.218)
The seat belt reminder light is flash-
ing
Are the driver and the front passenger
wearing the seat belts? (P.510)
The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P.227)
Depending on the situation, other
types of warning buzzer may also
sound. (P.507, 515)
Did anyone inside the vehicle open
a door or anything move inside the
vehicle during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects them and the alarm
sounds. (P.77)
Do one of the following to deactivate
or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors or open the trunk
using the entry function or wireless
remote control.
Starting the engine. (The alarm will
be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
Is the message displayed on the
multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.515)
The steering wheel cannot be
turned after the engine is
stopped
The windows do not open or
close by operating the power
window switches
The engine switch is turned off
automatically
A warning buzzer sounds during
driving
An alarm is activated and the
horn sounds
A warning buzzer sounds when
leaving the vehicle
568
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
When a warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed, refer
to P.507, 515.
Slow down the vehicle, drive with
extra caution, and take your vehicle
to the nearest authorized Lexus
retailer or Lexus authorized
repairer, or any reliable repairer, or
authorized tire dealer as soon as
possible to have the tire replaced.
(P.518)
Try the procedure for when the vehi-
cle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (P.534)
A warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
569
Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
Air conditioning filter............................... 488
Front automatic air conditioning system
.........................................................................403
Front seat concentrated airflow mode
(S-FLOW).................................................... 411
Pollen removal mode............................... 410
Rear automatic air conditioning system
...........................................................................413
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ............. 384
Warning light.............................................. 509
Adaptive High-beam System .................235
Adaptive Variable Suspension System384
AHB (Automatic High Beam)............... 238
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)...235
Air conditioning filter.................................488
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter............................... 488
Front automatic air conditioning system
.........................................................................403
Front seat concentrated airflow mode
(S-FLOW).................................................... 411
Pollen removal mode............................... 410
Rear automatic air conditioning system
...........................................................................413
Airbag manual on-off system...................... 41
Airbags
Airbag manual on-off system...................41
Airbag operating conditions................... 32
Airbag precautions for your child........35
Correct driving posture ............................ 25
Curtain shield airbag operating condi-
tions .................................................................. 33
Curtain shield airbag precautions........35
General airbag precautions ...................35
Locations of airbags....................................30
Modification and disposal of airbags . 37
Side airbag operating conditions.........33
Side airbag precautions ............................35
Side and curtain shield airbags operating
conditions......................................................33
Side and curtain shield airbags precau-
tions ..................................................................35
SRS airbags......................................................30
SRS warning light......................................508
Alarm ................................................................... 77
Warning buzzer........................................ 507
Antennas (smart entry & start system). 126
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............. 384
Warning light..............................................509
Approach warning .......................................317
Armrest............................................................433
Assist grips......................................................433
Audio system-linked display ..................... 98
Automatic headlight leveling system...233
Automatic High Beam.............................. 238
Automatic light control system ..............232
Automatic Rear Flashing Hazard Lights
......................................................................... 384
Automatic transmission..............................219
M mode ..........................................................225
Paddle shift switches ....................224, 225
Snow mode...................................................223
Auxiliary boxes..................................428, 430
Average fuel economy.................................96
Average vehicle speed.................................96
B
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Battery
Battery checking ........................................463
If the battery is discharged ....................524
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 390
Warning light..............................................508
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).......................332
Boost gauge......................................................97
570
Alphabetical Index
Brake
Brake hold.....................................................230
Fluid ..................................................................542
Parking brake...............................................227
Warning light...............................................507
Brake assist.................................................... 384
Break-in tips ..................................................208
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control........88, 92
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).......................332
Buzzer
Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA)
........................................................................ 305
C
Card key............................................................110
Care
Exterior............................................................442
Interior .............................................................445
Seat belts........................................................445
Wheels and wheel ornaments............442
Cargo net........................................................429
Center Display............................................. 396
Chains................................................................391
Child restraint system
Points to remember..................................... 43
Riding with children..................................... 42
Child safety
Airbag precautions......................................35
Battery precautions......................463, 529
Child restraint system................................. 43
Heated steering wheel and seat heater
precautions..................................................416
How your child should wear the seat belt
.............................................................................27
Installing child restraints ............................43
Moon roof precautions ..........................202
Power window lock switch.................. 200
Power window precautions.................. 199
Rear door child-protectors.....................118
Removed electronic key battery precau-
tions ................................................................ 491
Seat belt precautions .................................. 42
Trunk precautions.........................................119
Child-protectors ............................................ 118
Cleaning
Exterior............................................................442
Interior .............................................................445
Radar sensor.....................................251, 263
Seat belts........................................................445
Wheels and wheel ornaments............442
Clock............................................... 86, 89, 434
Clock light...................................................... 420
Coat hooks .....................................................434
Coin holder.....................................................426
Condenser.......................................................461
Console box...................................................427
Consumption screen...................................105
Cooling system............................................ 460
Engine overheating..................................530
Cornering lights............................................234
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range .............................307, 311
Warning message.....................................325
Cup holders....................................................426
Current fuel consumption...........................96
Curtain shield airbags.................................. 30
Customizable features ..............................546
D
Daytime running light system..................232
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors.................... 404
Rear window............................................... 404
Windshield................................................... 404
Differential
Front differential oil....................................542
Rear differential oil.....................................542
Digital Rearview Mirror .............................187
571
Alphabetical Index
Dimension...................................................... 536
Display
Center Display............................................396
Cruise control .............................................323
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range......................................... 311
Head-up display............................................101
Lexus parking assist-sensor.................. 351
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................302
Multi-information display..........................93
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) ..............................................375
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)........359
RCTA...............................................................357
Warning message...................................... 515
Distance until next engine oil change...87,
92
Do-it-yourself maintenance.................... 448
Door courtesy lights .................................. 420
Door lock
Doors.................................................................. 114
Smart entry & start system......................126
Wireless remote control............................112
Doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking
system .............................................................118
Door closer.......................................................117
Door glasses.................................................198
Door lock.......................................................... 114
Open door warning buzzer ...........115, 117
Outside rear view mirrors...................... 195
Rear door child-protectors.....................118
Double locking system .................................76
Drive distance...................................................96
Drive info 1/Drive info 2...............................96
Driver’s seat position memory
Driving position memory.........................177
Memory recall function ............................179
Power easy access system.....................177
Drive-Start Control (DSC).......................213
Driving
Break-in tips.................................................208
Correct driving posture ............................25
Driving mode select switch ..................378
Procedures....................................................207
Winter drive tips........................................ 390
Driving information display.........................95
Driving position memory............................177
Memory recall function............................ 179
Power easy access system .....................177
Driving range....................................................96
Driving support system information display
.............................................................................99
DSC (Drive-Start Control).......................213
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range................................307, 311
Warning message.......................................321
E
ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake Sys-
tem)................................................................ 384
Eco Driving Indicator ..........................97, 105
Eco Driving Indicator Light.........................97
Elapsed time......................................................96
Electric Power Steering (EPS).............. 384
Warning light ................................................510
Electronic key.................................................. 110
Battery-saving function.............................127
If the electronic key does not operate
properly ........................................................ 521
Replacing the battery.............................. 490
Electronically Controlled Brake System
(ECB)............................................................ 384
Electronically modulated air suspension
.........................................................................380
Emergency brake signal ..........................385
Emergency flashers.................................... 498
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds..................507
If a warning light turns on...................... 507
572
Alphabetical Index
If a warning message is displayed...... 515
If the battery is discharged....................524
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.........................................................521
If the engine will not start ........................ 519
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
...........................................................................521
If the vehicle is trapped in rising water
.........................................................................499
If you have a flat tire...................................518
If you lose your keys.................................520
If you think something is wrong.........505
If your vehicle becomes stuck.............534
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency................................................ 498
If your vehicle needs to be towed......501
If your vehicle overheats....................... 530
Engine
ACCESSORY mode .............................. 218
Compartment..............................................453
Engine compartment cover.................455
Engine cover................................................456
Engine switch.................................................216
Fuel pump shut off system.................... 506
Hood................................................................. 451
How to start the engine............................216
Identification number...............................537
If the engine will not start ........................ 519
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency................................................ 498
Ignition switch (engine switch) .............216
Overheating................................................ 530
Tachometer ........................................... 86, 89
Engine compartment cover.................... 455
Engine coolant
Capacity........................................................ 540
Checking ...................................................... 460
Preparing and checking before winter
........................................................................ 390
Engine coolant temperature gauge86, 89
Engine cover..................................................456
Engine immobilizer system.........................64
Engine oil
Capacity ........................................................ 539
Checking....................................................... 458
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 390
Warning light..............................................508
Engine oil maintenance data.................. 459
Engine switch..................................................216
Auto power off function........................... 218
Changing the engine switch modes.218
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency................................................498
EPS (Electric Power Steering).............. 384
Warning light ................................................510
ERA-GLONASS/EVAK........................... 60
Extended headlight lighting system .....233
F
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) .........293
First-aid kit storage belt..............................431
Flat tire
Tire pressure warning system .............467
Floor mats...........................................................24
Fluid
Automatic transmission ........................... 541
Brake................................................................542
Washer............................................................462
Fog lights
Switch...............................................................242
Footwell light................................................. 420
Front automatic air conditioning system
......................................................................... 403
Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA) .........293
Front seats
Adjustment.....................................................165
Cleaning.........................................................445
Correct driving posture ............................25
Driving position memory .........................177
Head restraints............................................. 182
573
Alphabetical Index
Memory recall function ............................179
Power easy access system.....................177
Refresh system..............................................170
Seat heaters....................................................416
Seat position memory ...............................177
Seat ventilators..............................................416
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs................................495
Turn signal lever......................................... 226
Fuel
Capacity........................................................ 538
Fuel gauge.............................................. 86, 89
Fuel pump shut off system.................... 506
Information....................................................545
Refueling ........................................................248
Type................................................................. 538
Warning light................................................510
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy ..............................96
Current fuel consumption........................96
Fuel filler door
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
...........................................................................521
Refueling ........................................................248
Fuel gauge.................................................86, 89
Fuel pump shut off system....................... 506
Fuses..................................................................492
G
Gauges.......................................................86, 89
Gear Position .................................................. 98
G-force ...............................................................97
Glove box .......................................................425
Glove box light..............................................426
H
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid................... 122
Head restraints...............................................182
Headlights
Adaptive High-beam System..............235
Automatic High Beam system........... 238
Extended headlight lighting system..233
Light switch ...................................................232
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Head-up display ............................................. 101
Driving information display area...........101
Driving support system display area.104
Eco Driving Indicator................................105
HUD (Head-up display) switch..........103
Navigation system-linked display.........101
Pop-up display.............................................104
Settings.............................................................103
Heated steering wheel................................416
Heaters
Front automatic air conditioning system
......................................................................... 403
Heated steering wheel............................. 416
Outside rear view mirrors.................... 404
Rear automatic air conditioning system
........................................................................... 413
Seat heaters ................................................... 416
Height control
Electronically modulated air suspension
...........................................................................381
Hill-start assist control............................... 384
Hood
Open................................................................. 451
Pop Up Hood.................................................38
Hooks
Coat hooks...................................................434
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 24
Horn....................................................................185
HUD (Head-up display) switch ..............103
I
Identification
Engine..............................................................537
Vehicle ............................................................537
Ignition switch (engine switch) ................216
Auto power off function........................... 218
574
Alphabetical Index
Changing the engine switch modes. 218
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency................................................ 498
Indicators............................................................84
Initialization
Items to initialize .........................................563
Maintenance ................................................459
Power windows........................................... 198
Tire pressure warning system.............478
Inside door handle lights.......................... 420
Inside rear view mirror......................186, 187
Installing a CRS to a front passenger seat
.............................................................................44
Installing a CRS to a power rear seat.....45
Instrument panel light control...........88, 92
Intercooler .......................................................461
Intercooler coolant
Capacity........................................................ 540
Checking ...................................................... 460
Interior lights ................................................. 420
Front interior light ......................................420
Rear interior light .......................................420
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack............................452
Jam protection function
Moon roof...................................................... 201
Power trunk lid..............................................123
Power windows........................................... 198
Rear door sunshade.................................436
K
Keyless entry
Smart entry & start system......................126
Wireless remote control............................112
Keys
Battery-saving function.............................127
Electronic key.................................................110
Engine switch.................................................216
If the electronic key does not operate
properly ........................................................ 521
If you lose your keys ................................ 520
Key number plate..........................................110
Keyless entry .........................................114, 126
Mechanical key..............................................110
Replacing the battery.............................. 490
Warning buzzer.......................................... 126
Wireless remote control ........................... 112
Knee airbags.................................................... 30
L
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)
Operation......................................................297
Warning messages..................................306
Language (multi-information display)....99
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .................................. 451
Hood lock release lever.......................... 451
Shift lever......................................................... 219
Turn signal lever .........................................226
Wiper lever...................................................243
Lexus climate concierge............................401
Lexus parking assist-sensor.......... 349, 351
Function ........................................................... 351
Warning message........................353, 366
Lexus Safety System +
AHB (Automatic High Beam)........... 238
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)235
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range .........................................311
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297
PCS (Pre-Collision System)...............285
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................307
Lexus Safety System + A
AHS (Adaptive High-beam System)235
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range .............................307, 311
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)......293
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297
575
Alphabetical Index
PCS (Pre-Collision System)................ 273
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................307
License plate lights
Light switch...................................................232
Replacing light bulbs................................495
Light bulbs
Replacing.......................................................495
Lights
Adaptive High-beam System..............235
Automatic High Beam system............238
Extended headlight lighting system .233
Fog light switch........................................... 242
Front interior lights......................................421
Front personal lights...................................421
Headlight switch......................................... 232
Interior lights.................................................420
Interior lights list..........................................420
Rear interior lights .......................................421
Rear personal lights....................................421
Replacing light bulbs................................495
Trunk lid light..................................................123
Trunk light........................................................123
Turn signal lever......................................... 226
Vanity lights ..................................................435
Welcome light illumination control ..233
Lock steering column..................................216
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Operation......................................................297
Warning messages.................................. 306
Luggage mats................................................429
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ................ 450
Maintenance data......................................536
Maintenance requirements..................448
Malfunction indicator lamp.....................508
Menu icons ........................................................94
Meter
Changing the main meter location......93
Clock......................................................... 86, 89
Indicators...........................................................84
Instrument panel light control....... 88, 92
Meter control switches ..............................94
Meters.......................................................86, 89
Multi-information display ..........................93
Settings...............................................................99
Units.................................................................... 98
Warning lights............................................ 507
Warning message......................................515
Mirrors
Digital Rearview Mirror ........................... 187
Inside rear view mirror.............................186
Outside rear view mirror defoggers404
Outside rear view mirrors......................195
Vanity mirrors............................................. 435
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof operation
...........................................................................201
Jam protection function...........................201
Operation....................................................... 201
Multi Weather Lights
Switch.................................................................241
Multi-information display.............................93
Audio system-linked display.................. 98
Boost gauge....................................................97
Cruise control..............................................323
Drive information 1/Drive information 2
.............................................................................96
Driving information display......................95
Driving support system information dis-
play....................................................................99
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range .........................................311
Eco Driving Indicator..................................97
Gear Position ................................................ 98
G-force..............................................................97
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)................... 302
Menu icons.......................................................94
Meter control switches ..............................94
Navigation system-linked display........ 98
576
Alphabetical Index
Pop-up display...............................................93
Settings...............................................................99
Stop & Start system information...........96
Suggestion function...................................100
Tire pressure ................................................467
Units ....................................................................98
Warning message...................................... 515
N
nanoe™.............................................................410
Navigation system-linked display ...98, 101
O
“ODO TRIP” switch.............................. 87, 92
Odometer................................................. 87, 92
Odometer and trip meter display
Display items.......................................... 87, 92
“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 87, 92
Pop-up display......................................88, 92
Oil
Engine oil .......................................................539
Front differential oil ...................................542
Rear differential oil.....................................542
Opener
Fuel filler door..............................................248
Hood................................................................. 451
Trunk ....................................................................121
Outer foot lights
Location..........................................................420
Outside door handle lights ..................... 420
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment..................................................... 195
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................332
Folding ............................................................. 196
Linked mirror function when reversing
.......................................................................... 195
Mirror position memory...........................177
Outside rear view mirror defoggers404
RCTA function............................................355
Outside temperature ...........................86, 89
Overheating.................................................. 530
P
Paddle shift switches....................... 224, 225
Parking assist sensors (Lexus parking
assist-sensor)...............................................351
Parking brake
Operation...................................................... 227
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
..........................................................................229
Warning light ................................................513
Warning message.....................................229
Parking lights
Light switch ...................................................232
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Parking Support Brake function (for
rear-crossing vehicles)...........................372
Function ..........................................................372
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians).................................................375
Function ..........................................................375
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)..........................................................367
Function ..........................................................367
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Function ..............................................273, 285
PCS OFF switch .......................................288
Warning light ................................................ 512
Personal lights .............................................. 420
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)...............349
PKSB (Parking Support Brake).............362
Warning message.................................... 366
Pollen removal mode ..................................410
Pop Up Hood .................................................. 38
Power easy access system.........................177
Power outlets.................................................434
Power rear seat.............................................. 172
Power steering (Electric power steering
system) ......................................................... 384
Warning light ................................................510
577
Alphabetical Index
Power trunk lid.................................................121
Power windows
Door lock linked window operation. 199
Jam protection function........................... 198
Operation.......................................................198
Window lock switch................................ 200
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Function..............................................273, 285
PCS OFF switch....................................... 288
Warning light.................................................512
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range) ....307, 311
Radiator.............................................................461
RCD (Rear camera detection) ..............349
Function..........................................................359
Warning message.................................... 360
RCTA
Function..........................................................355
Warning message.....................................356
RCTA (Rear crossing traffic alert)........349
Rear automatic air conditioning system413
Rear crossing traffic alert (RCTA)....... 355
Rear door sunshades..................................436
Rear fog lights
Switch .............................................................. 242
Rear Multi Operation Panel...................398
Rear seat position memory........................ 181
Rear seats......................................................... 172
Adjustment......................................................172
Head restraints............................................. 182
Rear seat position memory .....................181
Relaxation system........................................175
Seat heaters....................................................416
Seat ventilators..............................................416
Rear sunshades.............................................437
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs................................495
Turn signal lever......................................... 226
Rear view mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror ........................... 187
Inside rear view mirror.............................186
Outside rear view mirrors......................195
Rear window defogger............................. 404
Refueling
Capacity ........................................................ 538
Fuel types......................................................538
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
........................................................................... 521
Opening the fuel tank cap.....................248
Remote Touch...............................................394
Replacing
Electronic key battery............................. 490
Fuses.................................................................492
Light bulbs.................................................... 495
Tires...................................................................482
Rev indicator......................................................91
Rev peak..............................................................91
Road Sign Assist...........................................307
RSA (Road Sign Assist).............................307
Run-flat tires.........................................467, 518
S
Seat belt buckle lights ............................... 420
Seat belt reminder light.....................510, 511
Seat belts ............................................................26
Active Assist ....................................................29
Child restraint system installation .........43
Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt
..........................................................................445
Easy Access Buckle ....................................28
Emergency Locking Retractor ..............28
How to wear your seat belt ..................... 27
How your child should wear the seat belt
............................................................................. 27
Pregnant women, proper seat belt use
.............................................................................26
Reminder light and buzzer ...........510, 511
Seat belt pretensioners ..............................29
578
Alphabetical Index
SRS warning light......................................508
Seat heaters.....................................................416
Seat position memory .........................177, 181
Seat ventilators...............................................416
Seats
Adjustment........................................... 165, 172
Adjustment precautions.......................... 165
Child seats/child restraint system installa-
tion .................................................................... 43
Cleaning.........................................................445
Driving position memory.........................177
Front seat refresh system.........................170
Head restraints............................................. 182
Power easy access system.....................177
Properly sitting in the seat ........................ 25
Rear seat relaxation system....................175
Seat heaters....................................................416
Seat position memory ......................177, 181
Seat ventilators..............................................416
Secondary Collision Brake..................... 385
Sensor
Automatic headlight system................. 232
Automatic High Beam system............238
Digital Rearview Mirror........................... 190
Inside rear view mirror............................. 186
Lexus parking assist-sensor.................. 351
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)....................297
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)...................... 372
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)....................................................... 368
Radar sensor....................... 250, 262, 346
Rain-sensing windshield wipers.........245
Shift lever
Automatic transmission............................219
Shift lever light.............................................. 420
Shopping bag hooks...................................429
Side airbags...................................................... 30
Side mirrors
Adjustment..................................................... 195
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................332
Folding..............................................................196
Linked mirror function when reversing
...........................................................................195
Mirror position memory...........................177
RCTA function...........................................355
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Turn signal lever .........................................226
Side windows..................................................198
Smart entry & start system
Antenna location......................................... 126
Entry functions................................................ 114
Starting the engine ..................................... 216
Snow mode.....................................................223
Snow tires....................................................... 390
“SOS” button ................................................... 60
Spark plug........................................................541
Specifications................................................ 536
Speedometer...........................................86, 89
Steering lock
Column lock release................................. 216
Steering lock system warning message
........................................................................... 216
Steering wheel
Adjustment.....................................................185
Heated steering wheel............................. 416
Meter control switches ..............................94
Power easy access system .....................177
Steering wheel position memory.........177
Stop & Start system
Pop-up display..................................... 88, 92
System information display......................96
Warning light ................................................ 512
Stop & Start system information display96
Stop lights
Emergency brake signal .......................385
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Storage features...........................................424
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck............... 534
Suggestion function .....................................100
579
Alphabetical Index
Sun visors........................................................ 435
Sunshade
Roof ................................................................... 201
Switches
Activating the Adaptive High-beam Sys-
tem.................................................................235
Activating the Automatic High Beam
.........................................................................238
Automatic High Beam system............238
Brake Hold switch.....................................230
Cruise control switch ..............................323
Digital Rearview Mirror control switches
...........................................................................187
Door lock switches...................................... 116
Driving mode select switch..................378
Driving position memory switches ..... 177
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range switch.......................... 311
Emergency flashers switch.................. 498
Engine switch.................................................216
Fog light switch........................................... 242
Heated steering wheel switch...............416
HUD (Head-up display) switch.......... 103
Ignition switch................................................216
Instrument panel light control switches
...................................................................88, 92
Light switches.............................................. 232
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch.....302
Meter control switches..............................94
Moon roof switches................................... 201
Multi Weather Lights.................................241
“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 87, 92
Outside rear view mirror switches.... 195
Paddle shift switches.................... 224, 225
Parking brake switch ................................227
PCS OFF switch....................................... 288
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) switch
.........................................................................363
Power door lock switch ............................ 116
Power window switches......................... 198
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) switch
......................................................................... 359
Rear door sunshade switch..................436
Rear seat heater........................................... 414
Rear seat position memory switches..181
Rear seat ventilator .................................... 414
Rear sunshades switch............................437
Rear window and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch............................ 403
Seat heater switches.................................. 416
Seat ventilator switches............................ 416
Snow mode switch....................................223
Stop & Start cancel switch ..................... 331
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
...........................................................................185
Tire pressure warning reset switch...478
Trunk closer switch.....................................123
Trunk opener main switch...................... 125
Trunk opener switch.................................... 121
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch......311
VSC OFF switch ......................................385
Window lock switch................................ 200
Windshield wiper and washer switch
..........................................................................243
Windshield wiper de-icer switch.......407
T
Tachometer..............................................86, 89
Rev indicator .....................................................91
Rev peak..............................................................91
Tail lights
Light switch ...................................................232
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Theft deterrent system
Alarm................................................................... 77
Double locking system...............................76
Engine immobilizer system......................64
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data..................................... 543
580
Alphabetical Index
Tire inflation pressure display function
.........................................................................467
Warning light..................................................511
Tire pressure display...................................467
Tire pressure warning system
Function..........................................................467
Initializing........................................................478
Installing tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters....................................... 477
Registering ID codes.............................. 480
Warning light..................................................511
Tires
Chains ...............................................................391
Checking .......................................................465
If you have a flat tire...................................518
Inflation pressure....................................... 486
Replacing.......................................................482
Rotating tires................................................466
Run-flat tires.......................................467, 518
Size....................................................................543
Snow tires..................................................... 390
Tire inflation pressure display function
.........................................................................467
Tire pressure warning system.............467
Warning light..................................................511
Top tether anchorages .................................54
Towing
Emergency towing..................................... 501
Towing eyelet ............................................. 504
Trailer towing.................................................215
Traction Control (TRC)............................ 384
Trailer towing..................................................215
Transmission
Automatic transmission............................219
Driving mode select switch..................378
M mode..........................................................225
Paddle shift switches.................... 224, 225
Snow mode .................................................. 223
TRC (Traction Control)............................ 384
Trip meters................................................ 87, 92
Trunk ....................................................................119
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid................122
Power trunk lid ............................................... 121
Smart entry & start system ....................... 121
Trunk closer switch.....................................123
Trunk easy closer.........................................123
Trunk features..............................................429
Trunk grip.........................................................123
Trunk lid light..................................................123
Trunk light ........................................................123
Trunk opener main switch...................... 125
Trunk opener switch.................................... 121
Wireless remote control........................... 121
Trunk lid light...................................................123
Trunk light.........................................................123
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............................... 495
Turn signal lever .........................................226
U
USB charging ports ....................................432
V
Vanity lights................................................... 435
Vanity mirrors............................................... 435
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Man-
agement) ..................................................... 384
Vehicle data recording....................................7
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Manage-
ment (VDIM) ............................................. 384
Vehicle identification number ................537
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)........... 384
Ventilators (seat ventilators)....................416
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)........... 384
W
Warning buzzers
ABS..................................................................509
Airbags...........................................................508
581
Alphabetical Index
Approach warning......................................317
Brake hold...................................................... 513
Brake system ...............................................507
Charging system.......................................508
Downshifting.................................... 224, 225
Electric power steering ........................... 510
Engine.............................................................508
Hands off steering wheel warning (LTA)
........................................................................ 305
High coolant temperature ....................507
Inappropriate pedal operation .......... 509
Low engine oil pressure........................508
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)297, 300, 511
Open door...............................................115, 117
Open window.............................................. 199
PKSA (Parking Support Alert) .......... 350
Pop Up Hood ............................................509
Pre-collision braking.................... 273, 287
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)..........512
Seat belt.................................................. 510, 511
Warning lights.............................................. 507
ABS.................................................................. 509
Brake hold operated indicator ............ 513
Brake system ...............................................507
Charging system.......................................508
Electric power steering ........................... 510
High coolant temperature ....................507
Inappropriate pedal operation warning
light ............................................................... 509
Low engine oil pressure........................508
Low fuel level ................................................510
LTA indicator.................................................. 511
Malfunction indicator lamp..................508
Parking brake indicator........................... 513
Pop Up Hood ............................................509
Pre-collision system ...................................512
RCD OFF indicator ...................................512
Seat belt reminder light................... 510, 511
Slip indicator.................................................. 513
SRS...................................................................508
Stop & Start cancel indicator.................512
Tire pressure ...................................................511
Warning messages.......................................515
Warning reflector storage belt ...............431
Washer
Adding.............................................................462
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 390
Switch...............................................................243
Washing and waxing ..................................442
Weight
Weight............................................................ 536
Wheels
Replacing wheels.......................................482
Size................................................................... 543
Window lock switch................................... 200
Windows
Power windows...........................................198
Rear window defogger.......................... 404
Washer............................................................243
Windshield wiper de-icer..........................410
Windshield wipers
Position............................................................246
Rain-sensing windshield wipers.........243
Winter driving tips......................................390
Wireless remote control
Battery-Saving Function...........................127
Locking/Unlocking...................................... 112
Replacing the battery.............................. 490
For information regarding the
equipment listed below, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Rear seat entertainment system
· Lexus parking assist monitor
582
Alphabetical Index
583
Alphabetical Index
584
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever (P.451)
Trunk opener (P.121)
Fuel filler door opener (P.249)
Fuel filler door (P.249)
Hood lock release lever (P.451)
Tire inflation pressure (P.543)
Fuel tank capacity (Ref-
erence) 82.0 L (21.7 gal., 18.0 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
EU area: Unleaded gasoline conforming to Euro-
pean standard EN228 only
Except EU area: Unleaded gasoline only
P.538
P.545
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure P.543
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill ref-
erence)
P.539
Engine oil type P.539
A
B
C
D
E
F
3


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Lexus LS 350 - 2020 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Lexus LS 350 - 2020 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 144.72 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Lexus LS 350 - 2020

Lexus LS 350 - 2020 User Manual - German - 608 pages

Lexus LS 350 - 2020 User Manual - Dutch - 586 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info